WhenWasThePriceAction
Bars of largest range (volatility)
* see moments of strongest price action immediately
* colored & upDown by candle color
* amplifier: you see only the bull runs, and subsequent dumps
Very nice on the 5 years scale of BITSTAMP:BTCUSD - nothing comparable to 2013 has happened yet.
Internals:
squared_range = pow(high-low, 2)
That is essentially it already. The rest are details:
* gauge with (in case of Bitcoin exponentially rising) price
* show in red for negative candles
* take even higher polynomial (than 2) to show only the very largest values
* allow some user input (but there is not much more that can be chosen here.)
Sorry for such a simple formula - but sometimes the easiest things are powerful.
Please give feedback. www.tradingview.com and/or in the cryptocurrency chat. Thanks.
Cari dalam skrip untuk "bar"
Bars Since the last RSI ExtremeThis is something Jamie Saettele pointed out. Gold has been in 'neutral' RSI territory for its longest stretch in four years. It's coiling up for its next major move.
Strat Structure Engine 3-F2 Tiered Strat Structure Engine – 3→F2 Tiered Dashboard
Overview
The Strat Structure Engine – 3→F2 Tiered Dashboard is a structure-focused indicator built on The Strat methodology, designed to identify, score, and tier high-quality 3 → Failed 2 (3→F2) structural failures in real time.
Rather than treating all Failed 2s equally, this script evaluates structure strength, volatility, volume participation, and candle quality, producing a tiered signal system that helps traders prioritize only the most meaningful setups.
This indicator is intended for traders who want objective structure validation, not subjective pattern guessing.
Core Concepts
This script focuses on three-bar structure transitions, specifically:
3 → Failed 2 (3→F2)
Supporting context via 3→1 and 1→3 structural sequences
Optional Inside Bar detection for compression awareness
The primary edge comes from grading the quality of the 3→F2, not merely detecting it.
3→F2 Tiered Scoring System
When a confirmed 3-bar is followed by a strict Failed 2, the script assigns a numeric score (0–8) based on four objective components:
1. Three-Bar Structure Quality
Measured using ATR-based range expansion:
Large expansion relative to ATR receives higher scores
Ensures the setup originates from meaningful volatility, not noise
2. Failed 2 Close Quality
Evaluates where price closes relative to the midpoint of the prior 3-bar:
Strong closes through the midpoint score higher
Weak or indecisive closes are downgraded
3. Body Dominance
Measures the body-to-range ratio of the Failed 2 candle:
Large, decisive bodies indicate real participation
Wicks and indecision reduce the score
4. Relative Volume Confirmation
Compares current volume against a moving average baseline:
Elevated volume confirms acceptance
Low volume reduces conviction
Tier Classification
Based on the total score, each valid 3→F2 is classified into a tier:
A+ Tier → Exceptional structure, volatility, and participation
A Tier → High-quality, trade-worthy setup
B Tier → Valid but lower-confidence structure
Below Threshold → Ignored (filtered out)
Only setups meeting a minimum quality threshold are labeled, helping reduce chart clutter and overtrading.
Visual & Dashboard Features
Clear directional labels plotted above or below bars
Tier designation and score display (e.g., 6/8)
Configurable toggles for:
Failed 2 labels
3→1 and 1→3 sequence labels
Inside Bar labels
3→F2 tier labels
Designed to work cleanly across all timeframes and instruments
Intended Use
This indicator is best used as:
A structure qualification layer, not a standalone entry trigger
A tool to rank setups, not force trades
Confirmation alongside:
Key levels (VWAP, Value Area, prior highs/lows)
Order flow or delta tools
Session context (RTH, Globex, IB)
What This Indicator Is Not
Not a prediction tool
Not a signal that guarantees outcome
Not a replacement for risk management
It objectively answers one question only:
“Is this 3→Failed 2 structurally strong enough to matter?”
Adaptive Genesis Engine [AGE]ADAPTIVE GENESIS ENGINE (AGE)
Pure Signal Evolution Through Genetic Algorithms
Where Darwin Meets Technical Analysis
🧬 WHAT YOU'RE GETTING - THE PURE INDICATOR
This is a technical analysis indicator - it generates signals, visualizes probability, and shows you the evolutionary process in real-time. This is NOT a strategy with automatic execution - it's a sophisticated signal generation system that you control .
What This Indicator Does:
Generates Long/Short entry signals with probability scores (35-88% range)
Evolves a population of up to 12 competing strategies using genetic algorithms
Validates strategies through walk-forward optimization (train/test cycles)
Visualizes signal quality through premium gradient clouds and confidence halos
Displays comprehensive metrics via enhanced dashboard
Provides alerts for entries and exits
Works on any timeframe, any instrument, any broker
What This Indicator Does NOT Do:
Execute trades automatically
Manage positions or calculate position sizes
Place orders on your behalf
Make trading decisions for you
This is pure signal intelligence. AGE tells you when and how confident it is. You decide whether and how much to trade.
🔬 THE SCIENCE: GENETIC ALGORITHMS MEET TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
What Makes This Different - The Evolutionary Foundation
Most indicators are static - they use the same parameters forever, regardless of market conditions. AGE is alive . It maintains a population of competing strategies that evolve, adapt, and improve through natural selection principles:
Birth: New strategies spawn through crossover breeding (combining DNA from fit parents) plus random mutation for exploration
Life: Each strategy trades virtually via shadow portfolios, accumulating wins/losses, tracking drawdown, and building performance history
Selection: Strategies are ranked by comprehensive fitness scoring (win rate, expectancy, drawdown control, signal efficiency)
Death: Weak strategies are culled periodically, with elite performers (top 2 by default) protected from removal
Evolution: The gene pool continuously improves as successful traits propagate and unsuccessful ones die out
This is not curve-fitting. Each new strategy must prove itself on out-of-sample data through walk-forward validation before being trusted for live signals.
🧪 THE DNA: WHAT EVOLVES
Every strategy carries a 10-gene chromosome controlling how it interprets market data:
Signal Sensitivity Genes
Entropy Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to market order/disorder calculations. Low values = conservative, require strong directional clarity. High values = aggressive, act on weaker order signals.
Momentum Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to RSI/ROC/MACD composite. Controls responsiveness to momentum shifts vs. mean-reversion setups.
Structure Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to support/resistance positioning. Determines how much price location within swing range matters.
Probability Adjustment Genes
Probability Boost (-0.10 to +0.10): Inherent bias toward aggressive (+) or conservative (-) entries. Acts as personality trait - some strategies naturally optimistic, others pessimistic.
Trend Strength Requirement (0.3-0.8): Minimum trend conviction needed before signaling. Higher values = only trades strong trends, lower values = acts in weak/sideways markets.
Volume Filter (0.5-1.5): Strictness of volume confirmation. Higher values = requires strong volume, lower values = volume less important.
Risk Management Genes
ATR Multiplier (1.5-4.0): Base volatility scaling for all price levels. Controls whether strategy uses tight or wide stops/targets relative to ATR.
Stop Multiplier (1.0-2.5): Stop loss tightness. Lower values = aggressive profit protection, higher values = more breathing room.
Target Multiplier (1.5-4.0): Profit target ambition. Lower values = quick scalping exits, higher values = swing trading holds.
Adaptation Gene
Regime Adaptation (0.0-1.0): How much strategy adjusts behavior based on detected market regime (trending/volatile/choppy). Higher values = more reactive to regime changes.
The Magic: AGE doesn't just try random combinations. Through tournament selection and fitness-weighted crossover, successful gene combinations spread through the population while unsuccessful ones fade away. Over 50-100 bars, you'll see the population converge toward genes that work for YOUR instrument and timeframe.
📊 THE SIGNAL ENGINE: THREE-LAYER SYNTHESIS
Before any strategy generates a signal, AGE calculates probability through multi-indicator confluence:
Layer 1 - Market Entropy (Information Theory)
Measures whether price movements exhibit directional order or random walk characteristics:
The Math:
Shannon Entropy = -Σ(p × log(p))
Market Order = 1 - (Entropy / 0.693)
What It Means:
High entropy = choppy, random market → low confidence signals
Low entropy = directional market → high confidence signals
Direction determined by up-move vs down-move dominance over lookback period (default: 20 bars)
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (bearish order to bullish order)
Layer 2 - Momentum Synthesis
Combines three momentum indicators into single composite score:
Components:
RSI (40% weight): Normalized to -1/+1 scale using (RSI-50)/50
Rate of Change (30% weight): Percentage change over lookback (default: 14 bars), clamped to ±1
MACD Histogram (30% weight): Fast(12) - Slow(26), normalized by ATR
Why This Matters: RSI catches mean-reversion opportunities, ROC catches raw momentum, MACD catches momentum divergence. Weighting favors RSI for reliability while keeping other perspectives.
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (strong bearish to strong bullish)
Layer 3 - Structure Analysis
Evaluates price position within swing range (default: 50-bar lookback):
Position Classification:
Bottom 20% of range = Support Zone → bullish bounce potential
Top 20% of range = Resistance Zone → bearish rejection potential
Middle 60% = Neutral Zone → breakout/breakdown monitoring
Signal Logic:
At support + bullish candle = +0.7 (strong buy setup)
At resistance + bearish candle = -0.7 (strong sell setup)
Breaking above range highs = +0.5 (breakout confirmation)
Breaking below range lows = -0.5 (breakdown confirmation)
Consolidation within range = ±0.3 (weak directional bias)
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (bearish structure to bullish structure)
Confluence Voting System
Each layer casts a vote (Long/Short/Neutral). The system requires minimum 2-of-3 agreement (configurable 1-3) before generating a signal:
Examples:
Entropy: Bullish, Momentum: Bullish, Structure: Neutral → Signal generated (2 long votes)
Entropy: Bearish, Momentum: Neutral, Structure: Neutral → No signal (only 1 short vote)
All three bullish → Signal generated with +5% probability bonus
This is the key to quality. Single indicators give too many false signals. Triple confirmation dramatically improves accuracy.
📈 PROBABILITY CALCULATION: HOW CONFIDENCE IS MEASURED
Base Probability:
Raw_Prob = 50% + (Average_Signal_Strength × 25%)
Then AGE applies strategic adjustments:
Trend Alignment:
Signal with trend: +4%
Signal against strong trend: -8%
Weak/no trend: no adjustment
Regime Adaptation:
Trending market (efficiency >50%, moderate vol): +3%
Volatile market (vol ratio >1.5x): -5%
Choppy market (low efficiency): -2%
Volume Confirmation:
Volume > 70% of 20-bar SMA: no change
Volume below threshold: -3%
Volatility State (DVS Ratio):
High vol (>1.8x baseline): -4% (reduce confidence in chaos)
Low vol (<0.7x baseline): -2% (markets can whipsaw in compression)
Moderate elevated vol (1.0-1.3x): +2% (trending conditions emerging)
Confluence Bonus:
All 3 indicators agree: +5%
2 of 3 agree: +2%
Strategy Gene Adjustment:
Probability Boost gene: -10% to +10%
Regime Adaptation gene: scales regime adjustments by 0-100%
Final Probability: Clamped between 35% (minimum) and 88% (maximum)
Why These Ranges?
Below 35% = too uncertain, better not to signal
Above 88% = unrealistic, creates overconfidence
Sweet spot: 65-80% for quality entries
🔄 THE SHADOW PORTFOLIO SYSTEM: HOW STRATEGIES COMPETE
Each active strategy maintains a virtual trading account that executes in parallel with real-time data:
Shadow Trading Mechanics
Entry Logic:
Calculate signal direction, probability, and confluence using strategy's unique DNA
Check if signal meets quality gate:
Probability ≥ configured minimum threshold (default: 65%)
Confluence ≥ configured minimum (default: 2 of 3)
Direction is not zero (must be long or short, not neutral)
Verify signal persistence:
Base requirement: 2 bars (configurable 1-5)
Adapts based on probability: high-prob signals (75%+) enter 1 bar faster, low-prob signals need 1 bar more
Adjusts for regime: trending markets reduce persistence by 1, volatile markets add 1
Apply additional filters:
Trend strength must exceed strategy's requirement gene
Regime filter: if volatile market detected, probability must be 72%+ to override
Volume confirmation required (volume > 70% of average)
If all conditions met for required persistence bars, enter shadow position at current close price
Position Management:
Entry Price: Recorded at close of entry bar
Stop Loss: ATR-based distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Stop_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Take Profit: ATR-based distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Target_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Position: +1 (long) or -1 (short), only one at a time per strategy
Exit Logic:
Check if price hit stop (on low) or target (on high) on current bar
Record trade outcome in R-multiples (profit/loss normalized by ATR)
Update performance metrics:
Total trades counter incremented
Wins counter (if profit > 0)
Cumulative P&L updated
Peak equity tracked (for drawdown calculation)
Maximum drawdown from peak recorded
Enter cooldown period (default: 8 bars, configurable 3-20) before next entry allowed
Reset signal age counter to zero
Walk-Forward Tracking:
During position lifecycle, trades are categorized:
Training Phase (first 250 bars): Trade counted toward training metrics
Testing Phase (next 75 bars): Trade counted toward testing metrics (out-of-sample)
Live Phase (after WFO period): Trade counted toward overall metrics
Why Shadow Portfolios?
No lookahead bias (uses only data available at the bar)
Realistic execution simulation (entry on close, stop/target checks on high/low)
Independent performance tracking for true fitness comparison
Allows safe experimentation without risking capital
Each strategy learns from its own experience
🏆 FITNESS SCORING: HOW STRATEGIES ARE RANKED
Fitness is not just win rate. AGE uses a comprehensive multi-factor scoring system:
Core Metrics (Minimum 3 trades required)
Win Rate (30% of fitness):
WinRate = Wins / TotalTrades
Normalized directly (0.0-1.0 scale)
Total P&L (30% of fitness):
Normalized_PnL = (PnL + 300) / 600
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Assumes P&L range of -300R to +300R for normalization scale.
Expectancy (25% of fitness):
Expectancy = Total_PnL / Total_Trades
Normalized_Expectancy = (Expectancy + 30) / 60
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Rewards consistency of profit per trade.
Drawdown Control (15% of fitness):
Normalized_DD = 1 - (Max_Drawdown / 15)
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Penalizes strategies that suffer large equity retracements from peak.
Sample Size Adjustment
Quality Factor:
<50 trades: 1.0 (full weight, small sample)
50-100 trades: 0.95 (slight penalty for medium sample)
100 trades: 0.85 (larger penalty for large sample)
Why penalize more trades? Prevents strategies from gaming the system by taking hundreds of tiny trades to inflate statistics. Favors quality over quantity.
Bonus Adjustments
Walk-Forward Validation Bonus:
if (WFO_Validated):
Fitness += (WFO_Efficiency - 0.5) × 0.1
Strategies proven on out-of-sample data receive up to +10% fitness boost based on test/train efficiency ratio.
Signal Efficiency Bonus (if diagnostics enabled):
if (Signals_Evaluated > 10):
Pass_Rate = Signals_Passed / Signals_Evaluated
Fitness += (Pass_Rate - 0.1) × 0.05
Rewards strategies that generate high-quality signals passing the quality gate, not just profitable trades.
Final Fitness: Clamped at 0.0 minimum (prevents negative fitness values)
Result: Elite strategies typically achieve 0.50-0.75 fitness. Anything above 0.60 is excellent. Below 0.30 is prime candidate for culling.
🔬 WALK-FORWARD OPTIMIZATION: ANTI-OVERFITTING PROTECTION
This is what separates AGE from curve-fitted garbage indicators.
The Three-Phase Process
Every new strategy undergoes a rigorous validation lifecycle:
Phase 1 - Training Window (First 250 bars, configurable 100-500):
Strategy trades normally via shadow portfolio
All trades count toward training performance metrics
System learns which gene combinations produce profitable patterns
Tracks independently: Training_Trades, Training_Wins, Training_PnL
Phase 2 - Testing Window (Next 75 bars, configurable 30-200):
Strategy continues trading without any parameter changes
Trades now count toward testing performance metrics (separate tracking)
This is out-of-sample data - strategy has never seen these bars during "optimization"
Tracks independently: Testing_Trades, Testing_Wins, Testing_PnL
Phase 3 - Validation Check:
Minimum_Trades = 5 (configurable 3-15)
IF (Train_Trades >= Minimum AND Test_Trades >= Minimum):
WR_Efficiency = Test_WinRate / Train_WinRate
Expectancy_Efficiency = Test_Expectancy / Train_Expectancy
WFO_Efficiency = (WR_Efficiency + Expectancy_Efficiency) / 2
IF (WFO_Efficiency >= 0.55): // configurable 0.3-0.9
Strategy.Validated = TRUE
Strategy receives fitness bonus
ELSE:
Strategy receives 30% fitness penalty
ELSE:
Validation deferred (insufficient trades in one or both periods)
What Validation Means
Validated Strategy (Green "✓ VAL" in dashboard):
Performed at least 55% as well on unseen data compared to training data
Gets fitness bonus: +(efficiency - 0.5) × 0.1
Receives priority during tournament selection for breeding
More likely to be chosen as active trading strategy
Unvalidated Strategy (Orange "○ TRAIN" in dashboard):
Failed to maintain performance on test data (likely curve-fitted to training period)
Receives 30% fitness penalty (0.7x multiplier)
Makes strategy prime candidate for culling
Can still trade but with lower selection probability
Insufficient Data (continues collecting):
Hasn't completed both training and testing periods yet
OR hasn't achieved minimum trade count in both periods
Validation check deferred until requirements met
Why 55% Efficiency Threshold?
If a strategy earned 10R during training but only 5.5R during testing, it still proved an edge exists beyond random luck. Requiring 100% efficiency would be unrealistic - market conditions change between periods. But requiring >50% ensures the strategy didn't completely degrade on fresh data.
The Protection: Strategies that work great on historical data but fail on new data are automatically identified and penalized. This prevents the population from being polluted by overfitted strategies that would fail in live trading.
🌊 DYNAMIC VOLATILITY SCALING (DVS): ADAPTIVE STOP/TARGET PLACEMENT
AGE doesn't use fixed stop distances. It adapts to current volatility conditions in real-time.
Four Volatility Measurement Methods
1. ATR Ratio (Simple Method):
Current_Vol = ATR(14) / Close
Baseline_Vol = SMA(Current_Vol, 100)
Ratio = Current_Vol / Baseline_Vol
Basic comparison of current ATR to 100-bar moving average baseline.
2. Parkinson (High-Low Range Based):
For each bar: HL = log(High / Low)
Parkinson_Vol = sqrt(Σ(HL²) / (4 × Period × log(2)))
More stable than close-to-close volatility. Captures intraday range expansion without overnight gap noise.
3. Garman-Klass (OHLC Based):
HL_Term = 0.5 × ²
CO_Term = (2×log(2) - 1) × ²
GK_Vol = sqrt(Σ(HL_Term - CO_Term) / Period)
Most sophisticated estimator. Incorporates all four price points (open, high, low, close) plus gap information.
4. Ensemble Method (Default - Median of All Three):
Ratio_1 = ATR_Current / ATR_Baseline
Ratio_2 = Parkinson_Current / Parkinson_Baseline
Ratio_3 = GK_Current / GK_Baseline
DVS_Ratio = Median(Ratio_1, Ratio_2, Ratio_3)
Why Ensemble?
Takes median to avoid outliers and false spikes
If ATR jumps but range-based methods stay calm, median prevents overreaction
If one method fails, other two compensate
Most robust approach across different market conditions
Sensitivity Scaling
Scaled_Ratio = (Raw_Ratio) ^ Sensitivity
Sensitivity 0.3: Cube root - heavily dampens volatility impact
Sensitivity 0.5: Square root - moderate dampening
Sensitivity 0.7 (Default): Balanced response to volatility changes
Sensitivity 1.0: Linear - full 1:1 volatility impact
Sensitivity 1.5: Exponential - amplified response to volatility spikes
Safety Clamps: Final DVS Ratio always clamped between 0.5x and 2.5x baseline to prevent extreme position sizing or stop placement errors.
How DVS Affects Shadow Trading
Every strategy's stop and target distances are multiplied by the current DVS ratio:
Stop Loss Distance:
Stop_Distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Stop_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Take Profit Distance:
Target_Distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Target_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Example Scenario:
ATR = 10 points
Strategy's ATR_Mult gene = 2.5
Strategy's Stop_Mult gene = 1.5
Strategy's Target_Mult gene = 2.5
DVS_Ratio = 1.4 (40% above baseline volatility - market heating up)
Stop = 10 × 2.5 × 1.5 × 1.4 = 52.5 points (vs. 37.5 in normal vol)
Target = 10 × 2.5 × 2.5 × 1.4 = 87.5 points (vs. 62.5 in normal vol)
Result:
During volatility spikes: Stops automatically widen to avoid noise-based exits, targets extend for bigger moves
During calm periods: Stops tighten for better risk/reward, targets compress for realistic profit-taking
Strategies adapt risk management to match current market behavior
🧬 THE EVOLUTIONARY CYCLE: SPAWN, COMPETE, CULL
Initialization (Bar 1)
AGE begins with 4 seed strategies (if evolution enabled):
Seed Strategy #0 (Balanced):
All sensitivities at 1.0 (neutral)
Zero probability boost
Moderate trend requirement (0.4)
Standard ATR/stop/target multiples (2.5/1.5/2.5)
Mid-level regime adaptation (0.5)
Seed Strategy #1 (Momentum-Focused):
Lower entropy sensitivity (0.7), higher momentum (1.5)
Slight probability boost (+0.03)
Higher trend requirement (0.5)
Tighter stops (1.3), wider targets (3.0)
Seed Strategy #2 (Entropy-Driven):
Higher entropy sensitivity (1.5), lower momentum (0.8)
Slight probability penalty (-0.02)
More trend tolerant (0.6)
Wider stops (1.8), standard targets (2.5)
Seed Strategy #3 (Structure-Based):
Balanced entropy/momentum (0.8/0.9), high structure (1.4)
Slight probability boost (+0.02)
Lower trend requirement (0.35)
Moderate risk parameters (1.6/2.8)
All seeds start with WFO validation bypassed if WFO is disabled, or must validate if enabled.
Spawning New Strategies
Timing (Adaptive):
Historical phase: Every 30 bars (configurable 10-100)
Live phase: Every 200 bars (configurable 100-500)
Automatically switches to live timing when barstate.isrealtime triggers
Conditions:
Current population < max population limit (default: 8, configurable 4-12)
At least 2 active strategies exist (need parents)
Available slot in population array
Selection Process:
Run tournament selection 3 times with different seeds
Each tournament: randomly sample active strategies, pick highest fitness
Best from 3 tournaments becomes Parent 1
Repeat independently for Parent 2
Ensures fit parents but maintains diversity
Crossover Breeding:
For each of 10 genes:
Parent1_Fitness = fitness
Parent2_Fitness = fitness
Weight1 = Parent1_Fitness / (Parent1_Fitness + Parent2_Fitness)
Gene1 = parent1's value
Gene2 = parent2's value
Child_Gene = Weight1 × Gene1 + (1 - Weight1) × Gene2
Fitness-weighted crossover ensures fitter parent contributes more genetic material.
Mutation:
For each gene in child:
IF (random < mutation_rate):
Gene_Range = GENE_MAX - GENE_MIN
Noise = (random - 0.5) × 2 × mutation_strength × Gene_Range
Mutated_Gene = Clamp(Child_Gene + Noise, GENE_MIN, GENE_MAX)
Historical mutation rate: 20% (aggressive exploration)
Live mutation rate: 8% (conservative stability)
Mutation strength: 12% of gene range (configurable 5-25%)
Initialization of New Strategy:
Unique ID assigned (total_spawned counter)
Parent ID recorded
Generation = max(parent generations) + 1
Birth bar recorded (for age tracking)
All performance metrics zeroed
Shadow portfolio reset
WFO validation flag set to false (must prove itself)
Result: New strategy with hybrid DNA enters population, begins trading in next bar.
Competition (Every Bar)
All active strategies:
Calculate their signal based on unique DNA
Check quality gate with their thresholds
Manage shadow positions (entries/exits)
Update performance metrics
Recalculate fitness score
Track WFO validation progress
Strategies compete indirectly through fitness ranking - no direct interaction.
Culling Weak Strategies
Timing (Adaptive):
Historical phase: Every 60 bars (configurable 20-200, should be 2x spawn interval)
Live phase: Every 400 bars (configurable 200-1000, should be 2x spawn interval)
Minimum Adaptation Score (MAS):
Initial MAS = 0.10
MAS decays: MAS × 0.995 every cull cycle
Minimum MAS = 0.03 (floor)
MAS represents the "survival threshold" - strategies below this fitness level are vulnerable.
Culling Conditions (ALL must be true):
Population > minimum population (default: 3, configurable 2-4)
At least one strategy has fitness < MAS
Strategy's age > culling interval (prevents premature culling of new strategies)
Strategy is not in top N elite (default: 2, configurable 1-3)
Culling Process:
Find worst strategy:
For each active strategy:
IF (age > cull_interval):
Fitness = base_fitness
IF (not WFO_validated AND WFO_enabled):
Fitness × 0.7 // 30% penalty for unvalidated
IF (Fitness < MAS AND Fitness < worst_fitness_found):
worst_strategy = this_strategy
worst_fitness = Fitness
IF (worst_strategy found):
Count elite strategies with fitness > worst_fitness
IF (elite_count >= elite_preservation_count):
Deactivate worst_strategy (set active flag = false)
Increment total_culled counter
Elite Protection:
Even if a strategy's fitness falls below MAS, it survives if fewer than N strategies are better. This prevents culling when population is generally weak.
Result: Weak strategies removed from population, freeing slots for new spawns. Gene pool improves over time.
Selection for Display (Every Bar)
AGE chooses one strategy to display signals:
Best fitness = -1
Selected = none
For each active strategy:
Fitness = base_fitness
IF (WFO_validated):
Fitness × 1.3 // 30% bonus for validated strategies
IF (Fitness > best_fitness):
best_fitness = Fitness
selected_strategy = this_strategy
Display selected strategy's signals on chart
Result: Only the highest-fitness (optionally validated-boosted) strategy's signals appear as chart markers. Other strategies trade invisibly in shadow portfolios.
🎨 PREMIUM VISUALIZATION SYSTEM
AGE includes sophisticated visual feedback that standard indicators lack:
1. Gradient Probability Cloud (Optional, Default: ON)
Multi-layer gradient showing signal buildup 2-3 bars before entry:
Activation Conditions:
Signal persistence > 0 (same directional signal held for multiple bars)
Signal probability ≥ minimum threshold (65% by default)
Signal hasn't yet executed (still in "forming" state)
Visual Construction:
7 gradient layers by default (configurable 3-15)
Each layer is a line-fill pair (top line, bottom line, filled between)
Layer spacing: 0.3 to 1.0 × ATR above/below price
Outer layers = faint, inner layers = bright
Color transitions from base to intense based on layer position
Transparency scales with probability (high prob = more opaque)
Color Selection:
Long signals: Gradient from theme.gradient_bull_mid to theme.gradient_bull_strong
Short signals: Gradient from theme.gradient_bear_mid to theme.gradient_bear_strong
Base transparency: 92%, reduces by up to 8% for high-probability setups
Dynamic Behavior:
Cloud grows/shrinks as signal persistence increases/decreases
Redraws every bar while signal is forming
Disappears when signal executes or invalidates
Performance Note: Computationally expensive due to linefill objects. Disable or reduce layers if chart performance degrades.
2. Population Fitness Ribbon (Optional, Default: ON)
Histogram showing fitness distribution across active strategies:
Activation: Only draws on last bar (barstate.islast) to avoid historical clutter
Visual Construction:
10 histogram layers by default (configurable 5-20)
Plots 50 bars back from current bar
Positioned below price at: lowest_low(100) - 1.5×ATR (doesn't interfere with price action)
Each layer represents a fitness threshold (evenly spaced min to max fitness)
Layer Logic:
For layer_num from 0 to ribbon_layers:
Fitness_threshold = min_fitness + (max_fitness - min_fitness) × (layer / layers)
Count strategies with fitness ≥ threshold
Height = ATR × 0.15 × (count / total_active)
Y_position = base_level + ATR × 0.2 × layer
Color = Gradient from weak to strong based on layer position
Line_width = Scaled by height (taller = thicker)
Visual Feedback:
Tall, bright ribbon = healthy population, many fit strategies at high fitness levels
Short, dim ribbon = weak population, few strategies achieving good fitness
Ribbon compression (layers close together) = population converging to similar fitness
Ribbon spread = diverse fitness range, active selection pressure
Use Case: Quick visual health check without opening dashboard. Ribbon growing upward over time = population improving.
3. Confidence Halo (Optional, Default: ON)
Circular polyline around entry signals showing probability strength:
Activation: Draws when new position opens (shadow_position changes from 0 to ±1)
Visual Construction:
20-segment polyline forming approximate circle
Center: Low - 0.5×ATR (long) or High + 0.5×ATR (short)
Radius: 0.3×ATR (low confidence) to 1.0×ATR (elite confidence)
Scales with: (probability - min_probability) / (1.0 - min_probability)
Color Coding:
Elite (85%+): Cyan (theme.conf_elite), large radius, minimal transparency (40%)
Strong (75-85%): Strong green (theme.conf_strong), medium radius, moderate transparency (50%)
Good (65-75%): Good green (theme.conf_good), smaller radius, more transparent (60%)
Moderate (<65%): Moderate green (theme.conf_moderate), tiny radius, very transparent (70%)
Technical Detail:
Uses chart.point array with index-based positioning
5-bar horizontal spread for circular appearance (±5 bars from entry)
Curved=false (Pine Script polyline limitation)
Fill color matches line color but more transparent (88% vs line's transparency)
Purpose: Instant visual probability assessment. No need to check dashboard - halo size/brightness tells the story.
4. Evolution Event Markers (Optional, Default: ON)
Visual indicators of genetic algorithm activity:
Spawn Markers (Diamond, Cyan):
Plots when total_spawned increases on current bar
Location: bottom of chart (location.bottom)
Color: theme.spawn_marker (cyan/bright blue)
Size: tiny
Indicates new strategy just entered population
Cull Markers (X-Cross, Red):
Plots when total_culled increases on current bar
Location: bottom of chart (location.bottom)
Color: theme.cull_marker (red/pink)
Size: tiny
Indicates weak strategy just removed from population
What It Tells You:
Frequent spawning early = population building, active exploration
Frequent culling early = high selection pressure, weak strategies dying fast
Balanced spawn/cull = healthy evolutionary churn
No markers for long periods = stable population (evolution plateaued or optimal genes found)
5. Entry/Exit Markers
Clear visual signals for selected strategy's trades:
Long Entry (Triangle Up, Green):
Plots when selected strategy opens long position (position changes 0 → +1)
Location: below bar (location.belowbar)
Color: theme.long_primary (green/cyan depending on theme)
Transparency: Scales with probability:
Elite (85%+): 0% (fully opaque)
Strong (75-85%): 10%
Good (65-75%): 20%
Acceptable (55-65%): 35%
Size: small
Short Entry (Triangle Down, Red):
Plots when selected strategy opens short position (position changes 0 → -1)
Location: above bar (location.abovebar)
Color: theme.short_primary (red/pink depending on theme)
Transparency: Same scaling as long entries
Size: small
Exit (X-Cross, Orange):
Plots when selected strategy closes position (position changes ±1 → 0)
Location: absolute (at actual exit price if stop/target lines enabled)
Color: theme.exit_color (orange/yellow depending on theme)
Transparency: 0% (fully opaque)
Size: tiny
Result: Clean, probability-scaled markers that don't clutter chart but convey essential information.
6. Stop Loss & Take Profit Lines (Optional, Default: ON)
Visual representation of shadow portfolio risk levels:
Stop Loss Line:
Plots when selected strategy has active position
Level: shadow_stop value from selected strategy
Color: theme.short_primary with 60% transparency (red/pink, subtle)
Width: 2
Style: plot.style_linebr (breaks when no position)
Take Profit Line:
Plots when selected strategy has active position
Level: shadow_target value from selected strategy
Color: theme.long_primary with 60% transparency (green, subtle)
Width: 2
Style: plot.style_linebr (breaks when no position)
Purpose:
Shows where shadow portfolio would exit for stop/target
Helps visualize strategy's risk/reward ratio
Useful for manual traders to set similar levels
Disable for cleaner chart (recommended for presentations)
7. Dynamic Trend EMA
Gradient-colored trend line that visualizes trend strength:
Calculation:
EMA(close, trend_length) - default 50 period (configurable 20-100)
Slope calculated over 10 bars: (current_ema - ema ) / ema × 100
Color Logic:
Trend_direction:
Slope > 0.1% = Bullish (1)
Slope < -0.1% = Bearish (-1)
Otherwise = Neutral (0)
Trend_strength = abs(slope)
Color = Gradient between:
- Neutral color (gray/purple)
- Strong bullish (bright green) if direction = 1
- Strong bearish (bright red) if direction = -1
Gradient factor = trend_strength (0 to 1+ scale)
Visual Behavior:
Faint gray/purple = weak/no trend (choppy conditions)
Light green/red = emerging trend (low strength)
Bright green/red = strong trend (high conviction)
Color intensity = trend strength magnitude
Transparency: 50% (subtle, doesn't overpower price action)
Purpose: Subconscious awareness of trend state without checking dashboard or indicators.
8. Regime Background Tinting (Subtle)
Ultra-low opacity background color indicating detected market regime:
Regime Detection:
Efficiency = directional_movement / total_range (over trend_length bars)
Vol_ratio = current_volatility / average_volatility
IF (efficiency > 0.5 AND vol_ratio < 1.3):
Regime = Trending (1)
ELSE IF (vol_ratio > 1.5):
Regime = Volatile (2)
ELSE:
Regime = Choppy (0)
Background Colors:
Trending: theme.regime_trending (dark green, 92-93% transparency)
Volatile: theme.regime_volatile (dark red, 93% transparency)
Choppy: No tint (normal background)
Purpose:
Subliminal regime awareness
Helps explain why signals are/aren't generating
Trending = ideal conditions for AGE
Volatile = fewer signals, higher thresholds applied
Choppy = mixed signals, lower confidence
Important: Extremely subtle by design. Not meant to be obvious, just subconscious context.
📊 ENHANCED DASHBOARD
Comprehensive real-time metrics in single organized panel (top-right position):
Dashboard Structure (5 columns × 14 rows)
Header Row:
Column 0: "🧬 AGE PRO" + phase indicator (🔴 LIVE or ⏪ HIST)
Column 1: "POPULATION"
Column 2: "PERFORMANCE"
Column 3: "CURRENT SIGNAL"
Column 4: "ACTIVE STRATEGY"
Column 0: Market State
Regime (📈 TREND / 🌊 CHAOS / ➖ CHOP)
DVS Ratio (current volatility scaling factor, format: #.##)
Trend Direction (▲ BULL / ▼ BEAR / ➖ FLAT with color coding)
Trend Strength (0-100 scale, format: #.##)
Column 1: Population Metrics
Active strategies (count / max_population)
Validated strategies (WFO passed / active total)
Current generation number
Total spawned (all-time strategy births)
Total culled (all-time strategy deaths)
Column 2: Aggregate Performance
Total trades across all active strategies
Aggregate win rate (%) - color-coded:
Green (>55%)
Orange (45-55%)
Red (<45%)
Total P&L in R-multiples - color-coded by positive/negative
Best fitness score in population (format: #.###)
MAS - Minimum Adaptation Score (cull threshold, format: #.###)
Column 3: Current Signal Status
Status indicator:
"▲ LONG" (green) if selected strategy in long position
"▼ SHORT" (red) if selected strategy in short position
"⏳ FORMING" (orange) if signal persisting but not yet executed
"○ WAITING" (gray) if no active signal
Confidence percentage (0-100%, format: #.#%)
Quality assessment:
"🔥 ELITE" (cyan) for 85%+ probability
"✓ STRONG" (bright green) for 75-85%
"○ GOOD" (green) for 65-75%
"- LOW" (dim) for <65%
Confluence score (X/3 format)
Signal age:
"X bars" if signal forming
"IN TRADE" if position active
"---" if no signal
Column 4: Selected Strategy Details
Strategy ID number (#X format)
Validation status:
"✓ VAL" (green) if WFO validated
"○ TRAIN" (orange) if still in training/testing phase
Generation number (GX format)
Personal fitness score (format: #.### with color coding)
Trade count
P&L and win rate (format: #.#R (##%) with color coding)
Color Scheme:
Panel background: theme.panel_bg (dark, low opacity)
Panel headers: theme.panel_header (slightly lighter)
Primary text: theme.text_primary (bright, high contrast)
Secondary text: theme.text_secondary (dim, lower contrast)
Positive metrics: theme.metric_positive (green)
Warning metrics: theme.metric_warning (orange)
Negative metrics: theme.metric_negative (red)
Special markers: theme.validated_marker, theme.spawn_marker
Update Frequency: Only on barstate.islast (current bar) to minimize CPU usage
Purpose:
Quick overview of entire system state
No need to check multiple indicators
Trading decisions informed by population health, regime state, and signal quality
Transparency into what AGE is thinking
🔍 DIAGNOSTICS PANEL (Optional, Default: OFF)
Detailed signal quality tracking for optimization and debugging:
Panel Structure (3 columns × 8 rows)
Position: Bottom-right corner (doesn't interfere with main dashboard)
Header Row:
Column 0: "🔍 DIAGNOSTICS"
Column 1: "COUNT"
Column 2: "%"
Metrics Tracked (for selected strategy only):
Total Evaluated:
Every signal that passed initial calculation (direction ≠ 0)
Represents total opportunities considered
✓ Passed:
Signals that passed quality gate and executed
Green color coding
Percentage of evaluated signals
Rejection Breakdown:
⨯ Probability:
Rejected because probability < minimum threshold
Most common rejection reason typically
⨯ Confluence:
Rejected because confluence < minimum required (e.g., only 1 of 3 indicators agreed)
⨯ Trend:
Rejected because signal opposed strong trend
Indicates counter-trend protection working
⨯ Regime:
Rejected because volatile regime detected and probability wasn't high enough to override
Shows regime filter in action
⨯ Volume:
Rejected because volume < 70% of 20-bar average
Indicates volume confirmation requirement
Color Coding:
Passed count: Green (success metric)
Rejection counts: Red (failure metrics)
Percentages: Gray (neutral, informational)
Performance Cost: Slight CPU overhead for tracking counters. Disable when not actively optimizing settings.
How to Use Diagnostics
Scenario 1: Too Few Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 10 (5%)
⨯ Probability: 120 (60%)
⨯ Confluence: 40 (20%)
⨯ Others: 30 (15%)
Diagnosis: Probability threshold too high for this strategy's DNA.
Solution: Lower min probability from 65% to 60%, or allow strategy more time to evolve better DNA.
Scenario 2: Too Many False Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 80 (40%)
Strategy win rate: 45%
Diagnosis: Quality gate too loose, letting low-quality signals through.
Solution: Raise min probability to 70%, or increase min confluence to 3 (all indicators must agree).
Scenario 3: Regime-Specific Issues
⨯ Regime: 90 (45% of rejections)
Diagnosis: Frequent volatile regime detection blocking otherwise good signals.
Solution: Either accept fewer trades during chaos (recommended), or disable regime filter if you want signals regardless of market state.
Optimization Workflow:
Enable diagnostics
Run 200+ bars
Analyze rejection patterns
Adjust settings based on data
Re-run and compare pass rate
Disable diagnostics when satisfied
⚙️ CONFIGURATION GUIDE
🧬 Evolution Engine Settings
Enable AGE Evolution (Default: ON):
ON: Full genetic algorithm (recommended for best results)
OFF: Uses only 4 seed strategies, no spawning/culling (static population for comparison testing)
Max Population (4-12, Default: 8):
Higher = more diversity, more exploration, slower performance
Lower = faster computation, less exploration, risk of premature convergence
Sweet spot: 6-8 for most use cases
4 = minimum for meaningful evolution
12 = maximum before diminishing returns
Min Population (2-4, Default: 3):
Safety floor - system never culls below this count
Prevents population extinction during harsh selection
Should be at least half of max population
Elite Preservation (1-3, Default: 2):
Top N performers completely immune to culling
Ensures best genes always survive
1 = minimal protection, aggressive selection
2 = balanced (recommended)
3 = conservative, slower gene pool turnover
Historical: Spawn Interval (10-100, Default: 30):
Bars between spawning new strategies during historical data
Lower = faster evolution, more exploration
Higher = slower evolution, more evaluation time per strategy
30 bars = ~1-2 hours on 15min chart
Historical: Cull Interval (20-200, Default: 60):
Bars between culling weak strategies during historical data
Should be 2x spawn interval for balanced churn
Lower = aggressive selection pressure
Higher = patient evaluation
Live: Spawn Interval (100-500, Default: 200):
Bars between spawning during live trading
Much slower than historical for stability
Prevents population chaos during live trading
200 bars = ~1.5 trading days on 15min chart
Live: Cull Interval (200-1000, Default: 400):
Bars between culling during live trading
Should be 2x live spawn interval
Conservative removal during live trading
Historical: Mutation Rate (0.05-0.40, Default: 0.20):
Probability each gene mutates during breeding (20% = 2 out of 10 genes on average)
Higher = more exploration, slower convergence
Lower = more exploitation, faster convergence but risk of local optima
20% balances exploration vs exploitation
Live: Mutation Rate (0.02-0.20, Default: 0.08):
Mutation rate during live trading
Much lower for stability (don't want population to suddenly degrade)
8% = mostly inherits parent genes with small tweaks
Mutation Strength (0.05-0.25, Default: 0.12):
How much genes change when mutated (% of gene's total range)
0.05 = tiny nudges (fine-tuning)
0.12 = moderate jumps (recommended)
0.25 = large leaps (aggressive exploration)
Example: If gene range is 0.5-2.0, 12% strength = ±0.18 possible change
📈 Signal Quality Settings
Min Signal Probability (0.55-0.80, Default: 0.65):
Quality gate threshold - signals below this never generate
0.55-0.60 = More signals, accept lower confidence (higher risk)
0.65 = Institutional-grade balance (recommended)
0.70-0.75 = Fewer but higher-quality signals (conservative)
0.80+ = Very selective, very few signals (ultra-conservative)
Min Confluence Score (1-3, Default: 2):
Required indicator agreement before signal generates
1 = Any single indicator can trigger (not recommended - too many false signals)
2 = Requires 2 of 3 indicators agree (RECOMMENDED for balance)
3 = All 3 must agree (very selective, few signals, high quality)
Base Persistence Bars (1-5, Default: 2):
Base bars signal must persist before entry
System adapts automatically:
High probability signals (75%+) enter 1 bar faster
Low probability signals (<68%) need 1 bar more
Trending regime: -1 bar (faster entries)
Volatile regime: +1 bar (more confirmation)
1 = Immediate entry after quality gate (responsive but prone to whipsaw)
2 = Balanced confirmation (recommended)
3-5 = Patient confirmation (slower but more reliable)
Cooldown After Trade (3-20, Default: 8):
Bars to wait after exit before next entry allowed
Prevents overtrading and revenge trading
3 = Minimal cooldown (active trading)
8 = Balanced (recommended)
15-20 = Conservative (position trading)
Entropy Length (10-50, Default: 20):
Lookback period for market order/disorder calculation
Lower = more responsive to regime changes (noisy)
Higher = more stable regime detection (laggy)
20 = works across most timeframes
Momentum Length (5-30, Default: 14):
Period for RSI/ROC calculations
14 = standard (RSI default)
Lower = more signals, less reliable
Higher = fewer signals, more reliable
Structure Length (20-100, Default: 50):
Lookback for support/resistance swing range
20 = short-term swings (day trading)
50 = medium-term structure (recommended)
100 = major structure (position trading)
Trend EMA Length (20-100, Default: 50):
EMA period for trend detection and direction bias
20 = short-term trend (responsive)
50 = medium-term trend (recommended)
100 = long-term trend (position trading)
ATR Period (5-30, Default: 14):
Period for volatility measurement
14 = standard ATR
Lower = more responsive to vol changes
Higher = smoother vol calculation
📊 Volatility Scaling (DVS) Settings
Enable DVS (Default: ON):
Dynamic volatility scaling for adaptive stop/target placement
Highly recommended to leave ON
OFF only for testing fixed-distance stops
DVS Method (Default: Ensemble):
ATR Ratio: Simple, fast, single-method (good for beginners)
Parkinson: High-low range based (good for intraday)
Garman-Klass: OHLC based (sophisticated, considers gaps)
Ensemble: Median of all three (RECOMMENDED - most robust)
DVS Memory (20-200, Default: 100):
Lookback for baseline volatility comparison
20 = very responsive to vol changes (can overreact)
100 = balanced adaptation (recommended)
200 = slow, stable baseline (minimizes false vol signals)
DVS Sensitivity (0.3-1.5, Default: 0.7):
How much volatility affects scaling (power-law exponent)
0.3 = Conservative, heavily dampens vol impact (cube root)
0.5 = Moderate dampening (square root)
0.7 = Balanced response (recommended)
1.0 = Linear, full 1:1 vol response
1.5 = Aggressive, amplified response (exponential)
🔬 Walk-Forward Optimization Settings
Enable WFO (Default: ON):
Out-of-sample validation to prevent overfitting
Highly recommended to leave ON
OFF only for testing or if you want unvalidated strategies
Training Window (100-500, Default: 250):
Bars for in-sample optimization
100 = fast validation, less data (risky)
250 = balanced (recommended) - about 1-2 months on daily, 1-2 weeks on 15min
500 = patient validation, more data (conservative)
Testing Window (30-200, Default: 75):
Bars for out-of-sample validation
Should be ~30% of training window
30 = minimal test (fast validation)
75 = balanced (recommended)
200 = extensive test (very conservative)
Min Trades for Validation (3-15, Default: 5):
Required trades in BOTH training AND testing periods
3 = minimal sample (risky, fast validation)
5 = balanced (recommended)
10+ = conservative (slow validation, high confidence)
WFO Efficiency Threshold (0.3-0.9, Default: 0.55):
Minimum test/train performance ratio required
0.30 = Very loose (test must be 30% as good as training)
0.55 = Balanced (recommended) - test must be 55% as good
0.70+ = Strict (test must closely match training)
Higher = fewer validated strategies, lower risk of overfitting
🎨 Premium Visuals Settings
Visual Theme:
Neon Genesis: Cyberpunk aesthetic (cyan/magenta/purple)
Carbon Fiber: Industrial look (blue/red/gray)
Quantum Blue: Quantum computing (blue/purple/pink)
Aurora: Northern lights (teal/orange/purple)
⚡ Gradient Probability Cloud (Default: ON):
Multi-layer gradient showing signal buildup
Turn OFF if chart lags or for cleaner look
Cloud Gradient Layers (3-15, Default: 7):
More layers = smoother gradient, more CPU intensive
Fewer layers = faster, blockier appearance
🎗️ Population Fitness Ribbon (Default: ON):
Histogram showing fitness distribution
Turn OFF for cleaner chart
Ribbon Layers (5-20, Default: 10):
More layers = finer fitness detail
Fewer layers = simpler histogram
⭕ Signal Confidence Halo (Default: ON):
Circular indicator around entry signals
Size/brightness scales with probability
Minimal performance cost
🔬 Evolution Event Markers (Default: ON):
Diamond (spawn) and X (cull) markers
Shows genetic algorithm activity
Minimal performance cost
🎯 Stop/Target Lines (Default: ON):
Shows shadow portfolio stop/target levels
Turn OFF for cleaner chart (recommended for screenshots/presentations)
📊 Enhanced Dashboard (Default: ON):
Comprehensive metrics panel
Should stay ON unless you want zero overlays
🔍 Diagnostics Panel (Default: OFF):
Detailed signal rejection tracking
Turn ON when optimizing settings
Turn OFF during normal use (slight performance cost)
📈 USAGE WORKFLOW - HOW TO USE THIS INDICATOR
Phase 1: Initial Setup & Learning
Add AGE to your chart
Recommended timeframes: 15min, 30min, 1H (best signal-to-noise ratio)
Works on: 5min (day trading), 4H (swing trading), Daily (position trading)
Load 1000+ bars for sufficient evolution history
Let the population evolve (100+ bars minimum)
First 50 bars: Random exploration, poor results expected
Bars 50-150: Population converging, fitness improving
Bars 150+: Stable performance, validated strategies emerging
Watch the dashboard metrics
Population should grow toward max capacity
Generation number should advance regularly
Validated strategies counter should increase
Best fitness should trend upward toward 0.50-0.70 range
Observe evolution markers
Diamond markers (cyan) = new strategies spawning
X markers (red) = weak strategies being culled
Frequent early activity = healthy evolution
Activity slowing = population stabilizing
Be patient. Evolution takes time. Don't judge performance before 150+ bars.
Phase 2: Signal Observation
Watch signals form
Gradient cloud builds up 2-3 bars before entry
Cloud brightness = probability strength
Cloud thickness = signal persistence
Check signal quality
Look at confidence halo size when entry marker appears
Large bright halo = elite setup (85%+)
Medium halo = strong setup (75-85%)
Small halo = good setup (65-75%)
Verify market conditions
Check trend EMA color (green = uptrend, red = downtrend, gray = choppy)
Check background tint (green = trending, red = volatile, clear = choppy)
Trending background + aligned signal = ideal conditions
Review dashboard signal status
Current Signal column shows:
Status (Long/Short/Forming/Waiting)
Confidence % (actual probability value)
Quality assessment (Elite/Strong/Good)
Confluence score (2/3 or 3/3 preferred)
Only signals meeting ALL quality gates appear on chart. If you're not seeing signals, population is either still learning or market conditions aren't suitable.
Phase 3: Manual Trading Execution
When Long Signal Fires:
Verify confidence level (dashboard or halo size)
Confirm trend alignment (EMA sloping up, green color)
Check regime (preferably trending or choppy, avoid volatile)
Enter long manually on your broker platform
Set stop loss at displayed stop line level (if lines enabled), or use your own risk management
Set take profit at displayed target line level, or trail manually
Monitor position - exit if X marker appears (signal reversal)
When Short Signal Fires:
Same verification process
Confirm downtrend (EMA sloping down, red color)
Enter short manually
Use displayed stop/target levels or your own
AGE tells you WHEN and HOW CONFIDENT. You decide WHETHER and HOW MUCH.
Phase 4: Set Up Alerts (Never Miss a Signal)
Right-click on indicator name in legend
Select "Add Alert"
Choose condition:
"AGE Long" = Long entry signal fired
"AGE Short" = Short entry signal fired
"AGE Exit" = Position reversal/exit signal
Set notification method:
Sound alert (popup on chart)
Email notification
Webhook to phone/trading platform
Mobile app push notification
Name the alert (e.g., "AGE BTCUSD 15min Long")
Save alert
Recommended: Set alerts for both long and short, enable mobile push notifications. You'll get alerted in real-time even if not watching charts.
Phase 5: Monitor Population Health
Weekly Review:
Check dashboard Population column:
Active count should be near max (6-8 of 8)
Validated count should be >50% of active
Generation should be advancing (1-2 per week typical)
Check dashboard Performance column:
Aggregate win rate should be >50% (target: 55-65%)
Total P&L should be positive (may fluctuate)
Best fitness should be >0.50 (target: 0.55-0.70)
MAS should be declining slowly (normal adaptation)
Check Active Strategy column:
Selected strategy should be validated (✓ VAL)
Personal fitness should match best fitness
Trade count should be accumulating
Win rate should be >50%
Warning Signs:
Zero validated strategies after 300+ bars = settings too strict or market unsuitable
Best fitness stuck <0.30 = population struggling, consider parameter adjustment
No spawning/culling for 200+ bars = evolution stalled (may be optimal or need reset)
Aggregate win rate <45% sustained = system not working on this instrument/timeframe
Health Check Pass:
50%+ strategies validated
Best fitness >0.50
Aggregate win rate >52%
Regular spawn/cull activity
Selected strategy validated
Phase 6: Optimization (If Needed)
Enable Diagnostics Panel (bottom-right) for data-driven tuning:
Problem: Too Few Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 8 (4%)
⨯ Probability: 140 (70%)
Solutions:
Lower min probability: 65% → 60% or 55%
Reduce min confluence: 2 → 1
Lower base persistence: 2 → 1
Increase mutation rate temporarily to explore new genes
Check if regime filter is blocking signals (⨯ Regime high?)
Problem: Too Many False Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 90 (45%)
Win rate: 42%
Solutions:
Raise min probability: 65% → 70% or 75%
Increase min confluence: 2 → 3
Raise base persistence: 2 → 3
Enable WFO if disabled (validates strategies before use)
Check if volume filter is being ignored (⨯ Volume low?)
Problem: Counter-Trend Losses
⨯ Trend: 5 (only 5% rejected)
Losses often occur against trend
Solutions:
System should already filter trend opposition
May need stronger trend requirement
Consider only taking signals aligned with higher timeframe trend
Use longer trend EMA (50 → 100)
Problem: Volatile Market Whipsaws
⨯ Regime: 100 (50% rejected by volatile regime)
Still getting stopped out frequently
Solutions:
System is correctly blocking volatile signals
Losses happening because vol filter isn't strict enough
Consider not trading during volatile periods (respect the regime)
Or disable regime filter and accept higher risk
Optimization Workflow:
Enable diagnostics
Run 200+ bars with current settings
Analyze rejection patterns and win rate
Make ONE change at a time (scientific method)
Re-run 200+ bars and compare results
Keep change if improvement, revert if worse
Disable diagnostics when satisfied
Never change multiple parameters at once - you won't know what worked.
Phase 7: Multi-Instrument Deployment
AGE learns independently on each chart:
Recommended Strategy:
Deploy AGE on 3-5 different instruments
Different asset classes ideal (e.g., ES futures, EURUSD, BTCUSD, SPY, Gold)
Each learns optimal strategies for that instrument's personality
Take signals from all 5 charts
Natural diversification reduces overall risk
Why This Works:
When one market is choppy, others may be trending
Different instruments respond to different news/catalysts
Portfolio-level win rate more stable than single-instrument
Evolution explores different parameter spaces on each chart
Setup:
Same settings across all charts (or customize if preferred)
Set alerts for all
Take every validated signal across all instruments
Position size based on total account (don't overleverage any single signal)
⚠️ REALISTIC EXPECTATIONS - CRITICAL READING
What AGE Can Do
✅ Generate probability-weighted signals using genetic algorithms
✅ Evolve strategies in real-time through natural selection
✅ Validate strategies on out-of-sample data (walk-forward optimization)
✅ Adapt to changing market conditions automatically over time
✅ Provide comprehensive metrics on population health and signal quality
✅ Work on any instrument, any timeframe, any broker
✅ Improve over time as weak strategies are culled and fit strategies breed
What AGE Cannot Do
❌ Win every trade (typical win rate: 55-65% at best)
❌ Predict the future with certainty (markets are probabilistic, not deterministic)
❌ Work perfectly from bar 1 (needs 100-150 bars to learn and stabilize)
❌ Guarantee profits under all market conditions
❌ Replace your trading discipline and risk management
❌ Execute trades automatically (this is an indicator, not a strategy)
❌ Prevent all losses (drawdowns are normal and expected)
❌ Adapt instantly to regime changes (re-learning takes 50-100 bars)
Performance Realities
Typical Performance After Evolution Stabilizes (150+ bars):
Win Rate: 55-65% (excellent for trend-following systems)
Profit Factor: 1.5-2.5 (realistic for validated strategies)
Signal Frequency: 5-15 signals per 100 bars (quality over quantity)
Drawdown Periods: 20-40% of time in equity retracement (normal trading reality)
Max Consecutive Losses: 5-8 losses possible even with 60% win rate (probability says this is normal)
Evolution Timeline:
Bars 0-50: Random exploration, learning phase - poor results expected, don't judge yet
Bars 50-150: Population converging, fitness climbing - results improving
Bars 150-300: Stable performance, most strategies validated - consistent results
Bars 300+: Mature population, optimal genes dominant - best results
Market Condition Dependency:
Trending Markets: AGE excels - clear directional moves, high-probability setups
Choppy Markets: AGE struggles - fewer signals generated, lower win rate
Volatile Markets: AGE cautious - higher rejection rate, wider stops, fewer trades
Market Regime Changes:
When market shifts from trending to choppy overnight
Validated strategies can become temporarily invalidated
AGE will adapt through evolution, but not instantly
Expect 50-100 bar re-learning period after major regime shifts
Fitness may temporarily drop then recover
This is NOT a holy grail. It's a sophisticated signal generator that learns and adapts using genetic algorithms. Your success depends on:
Patience during learning periods (don't abandon after 3 losses)
Proper position sizing (risk 0.5-2% per trade, not 10%)
Following signals consistently (cherry-picking defeats statistical edge)
Not abandoning system prematurely (give it 200+ bars minimum)
Understanding probability (60% win rate means 40% of trades WILL lose)
Respecting market conditions (trending = trade more, choppy = trade less)
Managing emotions (AGE is emotionless, you need to be too)
Expected Drawdowns:
Single-strategy max DD: 10-20% of equity (normal)
Portfolio across multiple instruments: 5-15% (diversification helps)
Losing streaks: 3-5 consecutive losses expected periodically
No indicator eliminates risk. AGE manages risk through:
Quality gates (rejecting low-probability signals)
Confluence requirements (multi-indicator confirmation)
Persistence requirements (no knee-jerk reactions)
Regime awareness (reduced trading in chaos)
Walk-forward validation (preventing overfitting)
But it cannot prevent all losses. That's inherent to trading.
🔧 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Platform: TradingView Pine Script v5
Indicator Type: Overlay indicator (plots on price chart)
Execution Type: Signals only - no automatic order placement
Computational Load:
Moderate to High (genetic algorithms + shadow portfolios)
8 strategies × shadow portfolio simulation = significant computation
Premium visuals add additional load (gradient cloud, fitness ribbon)
TradingView Resource Limits (Built-in Caps):
Max Bars Back: 500 (sufficient for WFO and evolution)
Max Labels: 100 (plenty for entry/exit markers)
Max Lines: 150 (adequate for stop/target lines)
Max Boxes: 50 (not heavily used)
Max Polylines: 100 (confidence halos)
Recommended Chart Settings:
Timeframe: 15min to 1H (optimal signal/noise balance)
5min: Works but noisier, more signals
4H/Daily: Works but fewer signals
Bars Loaded: 1000+ (ensures sufficient evolution history)
Replay Mode: Excellent for testing without risk
Performance Optimization Tips:
Disable gradient cloud if chart lags (most CPU intensive visual)
Disable fitness ribbon if still laggy
Reduce cloud layers from 7 to 3
Reduce ribbon layers from 10 to 5
Turn off diagnostics panel unless actively tuning
Close other heavy indicators to free resources
Browser/Platform Compatibility:
Works on all modern browsers (Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Edge)
Mobile app supported (full functionality on phone/tablet)
Desktop app supported (best performance)
Web version supported (may be slower on older computers)
Data Requirements:
Real-time or delayed data both work
No special data feeds required
Works with TradingView's standard data
Historical + live data seamlessly integrated
🎓 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS
AGE synthesizes advanced concepts from multiple disciplines:
Evolutionary Computation
Genetic Algorithms (Holland, 1975): Population-based optimization through natural selection metaphor
Tournament Selection: Fitness-based parent selection with diversity preservation
Crossover Operators: Fitness-weighted gene recombination from two parents
Mutation Operators: Random gene perturbation for exploration of new parameter space
Elitism: Preservation of top N performers to prevent loss of best solutions
Adaptive Parameters: Different mutation rates for historical vs. live phases
Technical Analysis
Support/Resistance: Price structure within swing ranges
Trend Following: EMA-based directional bias
Momentum Analysis: RSI, ROC, MACD composite indicators
Volatility Analysis: ATR-based risk scaling
Volume Confirmation: Trade activity validation
Information Theory
Shannon Entropy (1948): Quantification of market order vs. disorder
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Directional information vs. random walk
Information Content: How much "information" a price move contains
Statistics & Probability
Walk-Forward Analysis: Rolling in-sample/out-of-sample optimization
Out-of-Sample Validation: Testing on unseen data to prevent overfitting
Monte Carlo Principles: Shadow portfolio simulation with realistic execution
Expectancy Theory: Win rate × avg win - loss rate × avg loss
Probability Distributions: Signal confidence quantification
Risk Management
ATR-Based Stops: Volatility-normalized risk per trade
Volatility Regime Detection: Market state classification (trending/choppy/volatile)
Drawdown Control: Peak-to-trough equity measurement
R-Multiple Normalization: Performance measurement in risk units
Machine Learning Concepts
Online Learning: Continuous adaptation as new data arrives
Fitness Functions: Multi-objective optimization (win rate + expectancy + drawdown)
Exploration vs. Exploitation: Balance between trying new strategies and using proven ones
Overfitting Prevention: Walk-forward validation as regularization
Novel Contribution:
AGE is the first TradingView indicator to apply genetic algorithms to real-time indicator parameter optimization while maintaining strict anti-overfitting controls through walk-forward validation.
Most "adaptive" indicators simply recalibrate lookback periods or thresholds. AGE evolves entirely new strategies through competitive selection - it's not parameter tuning, it's Darwinian evolution of trading logic itself.
The combination of:
Genetic algorithm population management
Shadow portfolio simulation for realistic fitness evaluation
Walk-forward validation to prevent overfitting
Multi-indicator confluence for signal quality
Dynamic volatility scaling for adaptive risk
...creates a system that genuinely learns and improves over time while avoiding the curse of curve-fitting that plagues most optimization approaches.
🏗️ DEVELOPMENT NOTES
This project represents months of intensive development, facing significant technical challenges:
Challenge 1: Making Genetics Actually Work
Early versions spawned garbage strategies that polluted the gene pool:
Random gene combinations produced nonsensical parameter sets
Weak strategies survived too long, dragging down population
No clear convergence toward optimal solutions
Solution:
Comprehensive fitness scoring (4 factors: win rate, P&L, expectancy, drawdown)
Elite preservation (top 2 always protected)
Walk-forward validation (unproven strategies penalized 30%)
Tournament selection (fitness-weighted breeding)
Adaptive culling (MAS decay creates increasing selection pressure)
Challenge 2: Balancing Evolution Speed vs. Stability
Too fast = population chaos, no convergence. Too slow = can't adapt to regime changes.
Solution:
Dual-phase timing: Fast evolution during historical (30/60 bar intervals), slow during live (200/400 bar intervals)
Adaptive mutation rates: 20% historical, 8% live
Spawn/cull ratio: Always 2:1 to prevent population collapse
Challenge 3: Shadow Portfolio Accuracy
Needed realistic trade simulation without lookahead bias:
Can't peek at future bars for exits
Must track multiple portfolios simultaneously
Stop/target checks must use bar's high/low correctly
Solution:
Entry on close (realistic)
Exit checks on current bar's high/low (realistic)
Independent position tracking per strategy
Cooldown periods to prevent unrealistic rapid re-entry
ATR-normalized P&L (R-multiples) for fair comparison across volatility regimes
Challenge 4: Pine Script Compilation Limits
Hit TradingView's execution limits multiple times:
Too many array operations
Too many variables
Too complex conditional logic
Solution:
Optimized data structures (single DNA array instead of 8 separate arrays)
Minimal visual overlays (only essential plots)
Efficient fitness calculations (vectorized where possible)
Strategic use of barstate.islast to minimize dashboard updates
Challenge 5: Walk-Forward Implementation
Standard WFO is difficult in Pine Script:
Can't easily "roll forward" through historical data
Can't re-optimize strategies mid-stream
Must work in real-time streaming environment
Solution:
Age-based phase detection (first 250 bars = training, next 75 = testing)
Separate metric tracking for train vs. test
Efficiency calculation at fixed interval (after test period completes)
Validation flag persists for strategy lifetime
Challenge 6: Signal Quality Control
Early versions generated too many signals with poor win rates:
Single indicators produced excessive noise
No trend alignment
No regime awareness
Instant entries on single-bar spikes
Solution:
Three-layer confluence system (entropy + momentum + structure)
Minimum 2-of-3 agreement requirement
Trend alignment checks (penalty for counter-trend)
Regime-based probability adjustments
Persistence requirements (signals must hold multiple bars)
Volume confirmation
Quality gate (probability + confluence thresholds)
The Result
A system that:
Truly evolves (not just parameter sweeps)
Truly validates (out-of-sample testing)
Truly adapts (ongoing competition and breeding)
Stays within TradingView's platform constraints
Provides institutional-quality signals
Maintains transparency (full metrics dashboard)
Development time: 3+ months of iterative refinement
Lines of code: ~1500 (highly optimized)
Test instruments: ES, NQ, EURUSD, BTCUSD, SPY, AAPL
Test timeframes: 5min, 15min, 1H, Daily
🎯 FINAL WORDS
The Adaptive Genesis Engine is not just another indicator - it's a living system that learns, adapts, and improves through the same principles that drive biological evolution. Every bar it observes adds to its experience. Every strategy it spawns explores new parameter combinations. Every strategy it culls removes weakness from the gene pool.
This is evolution in action on your charts.
You're not getting a static formula locked in time. You're getting a system that thinks , that competes , that survives through natural selection. The strongest strategies rise to the top. The weakest die. The gene pool improves generation after generation.
AGE doesn't claim to predict the future - it adapts to whatever the future brings. When markets shift from trending to choppy, from calm to volatile, from bullish to bearish - AGE evolves new strategies suited to the new regime.
Use it on any instrument. Any timeframe. Any market condition. AGE will adapt.
This indicator gives you the pure signal intelligence. How you choose to act on it - position sizing, risk management, execution discipline - that's your responsibility. AGE tells you when and how confident . You decide whether and how much .
Trust the process. Respect the evolution. Let Darwin work.
"In markets, as in nature, it is not the strongest strategies that survive, nor the most intelligent - but those most responsive to change."
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
— Happy Holiday's
ATAI Volume analysis with price action V 1.00ATAI Volume Analysis with Price Action
1. Introduction
1.1 Overview
ATAI Volume Analysis with Price Action is a composite indicator designed for TradingView. It combines per‑side volume data —that is, how much buying and selling occurs during each bar—with standard price‑structure elements such as swings, trend lines and support/resistance. By blending these elements the script aims to help a trader understand which side is in control, whether a breakout is genuine, when markets are potentially exhausted and where liquidity providers might be active.
The indicator is built around TradingView’s up/down volume feed accessed via the TradingView/ta/10 library. The following excerpt from the script illustrates how this feed is configured:
import TradingView/ta/10 as tvta
// Determine lower timeframe string based on user choice and chart resolution
string lower_tf_breakout = use_custom_tf_input ? custom_tf_input :
timeframe.isseconds ? "1S" :
timeframe.isintraday ? "1" :
timeframe.isdaily ? "5" : "60"
// Request up/down volume (both positive)
= tvta.requestUpAndDownVolume(lower_tf_breakout)
Lower‑timeframe selection. If you do not specify a custom lower timeframe, the script chooses a default based on your chart resolution: 1 second for second charts, 1 minute for intraday charts, 5 minutes for daily charts and 60 minutes for anything longer. Smaller intervals provide a more precise view of buyer and seller flow but cover fewer bars. Larger intervals cover more history at the cost of granularity.
Tick vs. time bars. Many trading platforms offer a tick / intrabar calculation mode that updates an indicator on every trade rather than only on bar close. Turning on one‑tick calculation will give the most accurate split between buy and sell volume on the current bar, but it typically reduces the amount of historical data available. For the highest fidelity in live trading you can enable this mode; for studying longer histories you might prefer to disable it. When volume data is completely unavailable (some instruments and crypto pairs), all modules that rely on it will remain silent and only the price‑structure backbone will operate.
Figure caption, Each panel shows the indicator’s info table for a different volume sampling interval. In the left chart, the parentheses “(5)” beside the buy‑volume figure denote that the script is aggregating volume over five‑minute bars; the center chart uses “(1)” for one‑minute bars; and the right chart uses “(1T)” for a one‑tick interval. These notations tell you which lower timeframe is driving the volume calculations. Shorter intervals such as 1 minute or 1 tick provide finer detail on buyer and seller flow, but they cover fewer bars; longer intervals like five‑minute bars smooth the data and give more history.
Figure caption, The values in parentheses inside the info table come directly from the Breakout — Settings. The first row shows the custom lower-timeframe used for volume calculations (e.g., “(1)”, “(5)”, or “(1T)”)
2. Price‑Structure Backbone
Even without volume, the indicator draws structural features that underpin all other modules. These features are always on and serve as the reference levels for subsequent calculations.
2.1 What it draws
• Pivots: Swing highs and lows are detected using the pivot_left_input and pivot_right_input settings. A pivot high is identified when the high recorded pivot_right_input bars ago exceeds the highs of the preceding pivot_left_input bars and is also higher than (or equal to) the highs of the subsequent pivot_right_input bars; pivot lows follow the inverse logic. The indicator retains only a fixed number of such pivot points per side, as defined by point_count_input, discarding the oldest ones when the limit is exceeded.
• Trend lines: For each side, the indicator connects the earliest stored pivot and the most recent pivot (oldest high to newest high, and oldest low to newest low). When a new pivot is added or an old one drops out of the lookback window, the line’s endpoints—and therefore its slope—are recalculated accordingly.
• Horizontal support/resistance: The highest high and lowest low within the lookback window defined by length_input are plotted as horizontal dashed lines. These serve as short‑term support and resistance levels.
• Ranked labels: If showPivotLabels is enabled the indicator prints labels such as “HH1”, “HH2”, “LL1” and “LL2” near each pivot. The ranking is determined by comparing the price of each stored pivot: HH1 is the highest high, HH2 is the second highest, and so on; LL1 is the lowest low, LL2 is the second lowest. In the case of equal prices the newer pivot gets the better rank. Labels are offset from price using ½ × ATR × label_atr_multiplier, with the ATR length defined by label_atr_len_input. A dotted connector links each label to the candle’s wick.
2.2 Key settings
• length_input: Window length for finding the highest and lowest values and for determining trend line endpoints. A larger value considers more history and will generate longer trend lines and S/R levels.
• pivot_left_input, pivot_right_input: Strictness of swing confirmation. Higher values require more bars on either side to form a pivot; lower values create more pivots but may include minor swings.
• point_count_input: How many pivots are kept in memory on each side. When new pivots exceed this number the oldest ones are discarded.
• label_atr_len_input and label_atr_multiplier: Determine how far pivot labels are offset from the bar using ATR. Increasing the multiplier moves labels further away from price.
• Styling inputs for trend lines, horizontal lines and labels (color, width and line style).
Figure caption, The chart illustrates how the indicator’s price‑structure backbone operates. In this daily example, the script scans for bars where the high (or low) pivot_right_input bars back is higher (or lower) than the preceding pivot_left_input bars and higher or lower than the subsequent pivot_right_input bars; only those bars are marked as pivots.
These pivot points are stored and ranked: the highest high is labelled “HH1”, the second‑highest “HH2”, and so on, while lows are marked “LL1”, “LL2”, etc. Each label is offset from the price by half of an ATR‑based distance to keep the chart clear, and a dotted connector links the label to the actual candle.
The red diagonal line connects the earliest and latest stored high pivots, and the green line does the same for low pivots; when a new pivot is added or an old one drops out of the lookback window, the end‑points and slopes adjust accordingly. Dashed horizontal lines mark the highest high and lowest low within the current lookback window, providing visual support and resistance levels. Together, these elements form the structural backbone that other modules reference, even when volume data is unavailable.
3. Breakout Module
3.1 Concept
This module confirms that a price break beyond a recent high or low is supported by a genuine shift in buying or selling pressure. It requires price to clear the highest high (“HH1”) or lowest low (“LL1”) and, simultaneously, that the winning side shows a significant volume spike, dominance and ranking. Only when all volume and price conditions pass is a breakout labelled.
3.2 Inputs
• lookback_break_input : This controls the number of bars used to compute moving averages and percentiles for volume. A larger value smooths the averages and percentiles but makes the indicator respond more slowly.
• vol_mult_input : The “spike” multiplier; the current buy or sell volume must be at least this multiple of its moving average over the lookback window to qualify as a breakout.
• rank_threshold_input (0–100) : Defines a volume percentile cutoff: the current buyer/seller volume must be in the top (100−threshold)%(100−threshold)% of all volumes within the lookback window. For example, if set to 80, the current volume must be in the top 20 % of the lookback distribution.
• ratio_threshold_input (0–1) : Specifies the minimum share of total volume that the buyer (for a bullish breakout) or seller (for bearish) must hold on the current bar; the code also requires that the cumulative buyer volume over the lookback window exceeds the seller volume (and vice versa for bearish cases).
• use_custom_tf_input / custom_tf_input : When enabled, these inputs override the automatic choice of lower timeframe for up/down volume; otherwise the script selects a sensible default based on the chart’s timeframe.
• Label appearance settings : Separate options control the ATR-based offset length, offset multiplier, label size and colors for bullish and bearish breakout labels, as well as the connector style and width.
3.3 Detection logic
1. Data preparation : Retrieve per‑side volume from the lower timeframe and take absolute values. Build rolling arrays of the last lookback_break_input values to compute simple moving averages (SMAs), cumulative sums and percentile ranks for buy and sell volume.
2. Volume spike: A spike is flagged when the current buy (or, in the bearish case, sell) volume is at least vol_mult_input times its SMA over the lookback window.
3. Dominance test: The buyer’s (or seller’s) share of total volume on the current bar must meet or exceed ratio_threshold_input. In addition, the cumulative sum of buyer volume over the window must exceed the cumulative sum of seller volume for a bullish breakout (and vice versa for bearish). A separate requirement checks the sign of delta: for bullish breakouts delta_breakout must be non‑negative; for bearish breakouts it must be non‑positive.
4. Percentile rank: The current volume must fall within the top (100 – rank_threshold_input) percent of the lookback distribution—ensuring that the spike is unusually large relative to recent history.
5. Price test: For a bullish signal, the closing price must close above the highest pivot (HH1); for a bearish signal, the close must be below the lowest pivot (LL1).
6. Labeling: When all conditions above are satisfied, the indicator prints “Breakout ↑” above the bar (bullish) or “Breakout ↓” below the bar (bearish). Labels are offset using half of an ATR‑based distance and linked to the candle with a dotted connector.
Figure caption, (Breakout ↑ example) , On this daily chart, price pushes above the red trendline and the highest prior pivot (HH1). The indicator recognizes this as a valid breakout because the buyer‑side volume on the lower timeframe spikes above its recent moving average and buyers dominate the volume statistics over the lookback period; when combined with a close above HH1, this satisfies the breakout conditions. The “Breakout ↑” label appears above the candle, and the info table highlights that up‑volume is elevated relative to its 11‑bar average, buyer share exceeds the dominance threshold and money‑flow metrics support the move.
Figure caption, In this daily example, price breaks below the lowest pivot (LL1) and the lower green trendline. The indicator identifies this as a bearish breakout because sell‑side volume is sharply elevated—about twice its 11‑bar average—and sellers dominate both the bar and the lookback window. With the close falling below LL1, the script triggers a Breakout ↓ label and marks the corresponding row in the info table, which shows strong down volume, negative delta and a seller share comfortably above the dominance threshold.
4. Market Phase Module (Volume Only)
4.1 Concept
Not all markets trend; many cycle between periods of accumulation (buying pressure building up), distribution (selling pressure dominating) and neutral behavior. This module classifies the current bar into one of these phases without using ATR , relying solely on buyer and seller volume statistics. It looks at net flows, ratio changes and an OBV‑like cumulative line with dual‑reference (1‑ and 2‑bar) trends. The result is displayed both as on‑chart labels and in a dedicated row of the info table.
4.2 Inputs
• phase_period_len: Number of bars over which to compute sums and ratios for phase detection.
• phase_ratio_thresh : Minimum buyer share (for accumulation) or minimum seller share (for distribution, derived as 1 − phase_ratio_thresh) of the total volume.
• strict_mode: When enabled, both the 1‑bar and 2‑bar changes in each statistic must agree on the direction (strict confirmation); when disabled, only one of the two references needs to agree (looser confirmation).
• Color customisation for info table cells and label styling for accumulation and distribution phases, including ATR length, multiplier, label size, colors and connector styles.
• show_phase_module: Toggles the entire phase detection subsystem.
• show_phase_labels: Controls whether on‑chart labels are drawn when accumulation or distribution is detected.
4.3 Detection logic
The module computes three families of statistics over the volume window defined by phase_period_len:
1. Net sum (buyers minus sellers): net_sum_phase = Σ(buy) − Σ(sell). A positive value indicates a predominance of buyers. The code also computes the differences between the current value and the values 1 and 2 bars ago (d_net_1, d_net_2) to derive up/down trends.
2. Buyer ratio: The instantaneous ratio TF_buy_breakout / TF_tot_breakout and the window ratio Σ(buy) / Σ(total). The current ratio must exceed phase_ratio_thresh for accumulation or fall below 1 − phase_ratio_thresh for distribution. The first and second differences of the window ratio (d_ratio_1, d_ratio_2) determine trend direction.
3. OBV‑like cumulative net flow: An on‑balance volume analogue obv_net_phase increments by TF_buy_breakout − TF_sell_breakout each bar. Its differences over the last 1 and 2 bars (d_obv_1, d_obv_2) provide trend clues.
The algorithm then combines these signals:
• For strict mode , accumulation requires: (a) current ratio ≥ threshold, (b) cumulative ratio ≥ threshold, (c) both ratio differences ≥ 0, (d) net sum differences ≥ 0, and (e) OBV differences ≥ 0. Distribution is the mirror case.
• For loose mode , it relaxes the directional tests: either the 1‑ or the 2‑bar difference needs to agree in each category.
If all conditions for accumulation are satisfied, the phase is labelled “Accumulation” ; if all conditions for distribution are satisfied, it’s labelled “Distribution” ; otherwise the phase is “Neutral” .
4.4 Outputs
• Info table row : Row 8 displays “Market Phase (Vol)” on the left and the detected phase (Accumulation, Distribution or Neutral) on the right. The text colour of both cells matches a user‑selectable palette (typically green for accumulation, red for distribution and grey for neutral).
• On‑chart labels : When show_phase_labels is enabled and a phase persists for at least one bar, the module prints a label above the bar ( “Accum” ) or below the bar ( “Dist” ) with a dashed or dotted connector. The label is offset using ATR based on phase_label_atr_len_input and phase_label_multiplier and is styled according to user preferences.
Figure caption, The chart displays a red “Dist” label above a particular bar, indicating that the accumulation/distribution module identified a distribution phase at that point. The detection is based on seller dominance: during that bar, the net buyer-minus-seller flow and the OBV‑style cumulative flow were trending down, and the buyer ratio had dropped below the preset threshold. These conditions satisfy the distribution criteria in strict mode. The label is placed above the bar using an ATR‑based offset and a dashed connector. By the time of the current bar in the screenshot, the phase indicator shows “Neutral” in the info table—signaling that neither accumulation nor distribution conditions are currently met—yet the historical “Dist” label remains to mark where the prior distribution phase began.
Figure caption, In this example the market phase module has signaled an Accumulation phase. Three bars before the current candle, the algorithm detected a shift toward buyers: up‑volume exceeded its moving average, down‑volume was below average, and the buyer share of total volume climbed above the threshold while the on‑balance net flow and cumulative ratios were trending upwards. The blue “Accum” label anchored below that bar marks the start of the phase; it remains on the chart because successive bars continue to satisfy the accumulation conditions. The info table confirms this: the “Market Phase (Vol)” row still reads Accumulation, and the ratio and sum rows show buyers dominating both on the current bar and across the lookback window.
5. OB/OS Spike Module
5.1 What overbought/oversold means here
In many markets, a rapid extension up or down is often followed by a period of consolidation or reversal. The indicator interprets overbought (OB) conditions as abnormally strong selling risk at or after a price rally and oversold (OS) conditions as unusually strong buying risk after a decline. Importantly, these are not direct trade signals; rather they flag areas where caution or contrarian setups may be appropriate.
5.2 Inputs
• minHits_obos (1–7): Minimum number of oscillators that must agree on an overbought or oversold condition for a label to print.
• syncWin_obos: Length of a small sliding window over which oscillator votes are smoothed by taking the maximum count observed. This helps filter out choppy signals.
• Volume spike criteria: kVolRatio_obos (ratio of current volume to its SMA) and zVolThr_obos (Z‑score threshold) across volLen_obos. Either threshold can trigger a spike.
• Oscillator toggles and periods: Each of RSI, Stochastic (K and D), Williams %R, CCI, MFI, DeMarker and Stochastic RSI can be independently enabled; their periods are adjustable.
• Label appearance: ATR‑based offset, size, colors for OB and OS labels, plus connector style and width.
5.3 Detection logic
1. Directional volume spikes: Volume spikes are computed separately for buyer and seller volumes. A sell volume spike (sellVolSpike) flags a potential OverBought bar, while a buy volume spike (buyVolSpike) flags a potential OverSold bar. A spike occurs when the respective volume exceeds kVolRatio_obos times its simple moving average over the window or when its Z‑score exceeds zVolThr_obos.
2. Oscillator votes: For each enabled oscillator, calculate its overbought and oversold state using standard thresholds (e.g., RSI ≥ 70 for OB and ≤ 30 for OS; Stochastic %K/%D ≥ 80 for OB and ≤ 20 for OS; etc.). Count how many oscillators vote for OB and how many vote for OS.
3. Minimum hits: Apply the smoothing window syncWin_obos to the vote counts using a maximum‑of‑last‑N approach. A candidate bar is only considered if the smoothed OB hit count ≥ minHits_obos (for OverBought) or the smoothed OS hit count ≥ minHits_obos (for OverSold).
4. Tie‑breaking: If both OverBought and OverSold spike conditions are present on the same bar, compare the smoothed hit counts: the side with the higher count is selected; ties default to OverBought.
5. Label printing: When conditions are met, the bar is labelled as “OverBought X/7” above the candle or “OverSold X/7” below it. “X” is the number of oscillators confirming, and the bracket lists the abbreviations of contributing oscillators. Labels are offset from price using half of an ATR‑scaled distance and can optionally include a dotted or dashed connector line.
Figure caption, In this chart the overbought/oversold module has flagged an OverSold signal. A sell‑off from the prior highs brought price down to the lower trend‑line, where the bar marked “OverSold 3/7 DeM” appears. This label indicates that on that bar the module detected a buy‑side volume spike and that at least three of the seven enabled oscillators—in this case including the DeMarker—were in oversold territory. The label is printed below the candle with a dotted connector, signaling that the market may be temporarily exhausted on the downside. After this oversold print, price begins to rebound towards the upper red trend‑line and higher pivot levels.
Figure caption, This example shows the overbought/oversold module in action. In the left‑hand panel you can see the OB/OS settings where each oscillator (RSI, Stochastic, Williams %R, CCI, MFI, DeMarker and Stochastic RSI) can be enabled or disabled, and the ATR length and label offset multiplier adjusted. On the chart itself, price has pushed up to the descending red trendline and triggered an “OverBought 3/7” label. That means the sell‑side volume spiked relative to its average and three out of the seven enabled oscillators were in overbought territory. The label is offset above the candle by half of an ATR and connected with a dashed line, signaling that upside momentum may be overextended and a pause or pullback could follow.
6. Buyer/Seller Trap Module
6.1 Concept
A bull trap occurs when price appears to break above resistance, attracting buyers, but fails to sustain the move and quickly reverses, leaving a long upper wick and trapping late entrants. A bear trap is the opposite: price breaks below support, lures in sellers, then snaps back, leaving a long lower wick and trapping shorts. This module detects such traps by looking for price structure sweeps, order‑flow mismatches and dominance reversals. It uses a scoring system to differentiate risk from confirmed traps.
6.2 Inputs
• trap_lookback_len: Window length used to rank extremes and detect sweeps.
• trap_wick_threshold: Minimum proportion of a bar’s range that must be wick (upper for bull traps, lower for bear traps) to qualify as a sweep.
• trap_score_risk: Minimum aggregated score required to flag a trap risk. (The code defines a trap_score_confirm input, but confirmation is actually based on price reversal rather than a separate score threshold.)
• trap_confirm_bars: Maximum number of bars allowed for price to reverse and confirm the trap. If price does not reverse in this window, the risk label will expire or remain unconfirmed.
• Label settings: ATR length and multiplier for offsetting, size, colours for risk and confirmed labels, and connector style and width. Separate settings exist for bull and bear traps.
• Toggle inputs: show_trap_module and show_trap_labels enable the module and control whether labels are drawn on the chart.
6.3 Scoring logic
The module assigns points to several conditions and sums them to determine whether a trap risk is present. For bull traps, the score is built from the following (bear traps mirror the logic with highs and lows swapped):
1. Sweep (2 points): Price trades above the high pivot (HH1) but fails to close above it and leaves a long upper wick at least trap_wick_threshold × range. For bear traps, price dips below the low pivot (LL1), fails to close below and leaves a long lower wick.
2. Close break (1 point): Price closes beyond HH1 or LL1 without leaving a long wick.
3. Candle/delta mismatch (2 points): The candle closes bullish yet the order flow delta is negative or the seller ratio exceeds 50%, indicating hidden supply. Conversely, a bearish close with positive delta or buyer dominance suggests hidden demand.
4. Dominance inversion (2 points): The current bar’s buyer volume has the highest rank in the lookback window while cumulative sums favor sellers, or vice versa.
5. Low‑volume break (1 point): Price crosses the pivot but total volume is below its moving average.
The total score for each side is compared to trap_score_risk. If the score is high enough, a “Bull Trap Risk” or “Bear Trap Risk” label is drawn, offset from the candle by half of an ATR‑scaled distance using a dashed outline. If, within trap_confirm_bars, price reverses beyond the opposite level—drops back below the high pivot for bull traps or rises above the low pivot for bear traps—the label is upgraded to a solid “Bull Trap” or “Bear Trap” . In this version of the code, there is no separate score threshold for confirmation: the variable trap_score_confirm is unused; confirmation depends solely on a successful price reversal within the specified number of bars.
Figure caption, In this example the trap module has flagged a Bear Trap Risk. Price initially breaks below the most recent low pivot (LL1), but the bar closes back above that level and leaves a long lower wick, suggesting a failed push lower. Combined with a mismatch between the candle direction and the order flow (buyers regain control) and a reversal in volume dominance, the aggregate score exceeds the risk threshold, so a dashed “Bear Trap Risk” label prints beneath the bar. The green and red trend lines mark the current low and high pivot trajectories, while the horizontal dashed lines show the highest and lowest values in the lookback window. If, within the next few bars, price closes decisively above the support, the risk label would upgrade to a solid “Bear Trap” label.
Figure caption, In this example the trap module has identified both ends of a price range. Near the highs, price briefly pushes above the descending red trendline and the recent pivot high, but fails to close there and leaves a noticeable upper wick. That combination of a sweep above resistance and order‑flow mismatch generates a Bull Trap Risk label with a dashed outline, warning that the upside break may not hold. At the opposite extreme, price later dips below the green trendline and the labelled low pivot, then quickly snaps back and closes higher. The long lower wick and subsequent price reversal upgrade the previous bear‑trap risk into a confirmed Bear Trap (solid label), indicating that sellers were caught on a false breakdown. Horizontal dashed lines mark the highest high and lowest low of the lookback window, while the red and green diagonals connect the earliest and latest pivot highs and lows to visualize the range.
7. Sharp Move Module
7.1 Concept
Markets sometimes display absorption or climax behavior—periods when one side steadily gains the upper hand before price breaks out with a sharp move. This module evaluates several order‑flow and volume conditions to anticipate such moves. Users can choose how many conditions must be met to flag a risk and how many (plus a price break) are required for confirmation.
7.2 Inputs
• sharp Lookback: Number of bars in the window used to compute moving averages, sums, percentile ranks and reference levels.
• sharpPercentile: Minimum percentile rank for the current side’s volume; the current buy (or sell) volume must be greater than or equal to this percentile of historical volumes over the lookback window.
• sharpVolMult: Multiplier used in the volume climax check. The current side’s volume must exceed this multiple of its average to count as a climax.
• sharpRatioThr: Minimum dominance ratio (current side’s volume relative to the opposite side) used in both the instant and cumulative dominance checks.
• sharpChurnThr: Maximum ratio of a bar’s range to its ATR for absorption/churn detection; lower values indicate more absorption (large volume in a small range).
• sharpScoreRisk: Minimum number of conditions that must be true to print a risk label.
• sharpScoreConfirm: Minimum number of conditions plus a price break required for confirmation.
• sharpCvdThr: Threshold for cumulative delta divergence versus price change (positive for bullish accumulation, negative for bearish distribution).
• Label settings: ATR length (sharpATRlen) and multiplier (sharpLabelMult) for positioning labels, label size, colors and connector styles for bullish and bearish sharp moves.
• Toggles: enableSharp activates the module; show_sharp_labels controls whether labels are drawn.
7.3 Conditions (six per side)
For each side, the indicator computes six boolean conditions and sums them to form a score:
1. Dominance (instant and cumulative):
– Instant dominance: current buy volume ≥ sharpRatioThr × current sell volume.
– Cumulative dominance: sum of buy volumes over the window ≥ sharpRatioThr × sum of sell volumes (and vice versa for bearish checks).
2. Accumulation/Distribution divergence: Over the lookback window, cumulative delta rises by at least sharpCvdThr while price fails to rise (bullish), or cumulative delta falls by at least sharpCvdThr while price fails to fall (bearish).
3. Volume climax: The current side’s volume is ≥ sharpVolMult × its average and the product of volume and bar range is the highest in the lookback window.
4. Absorption/Churn: The current side’s volume divided by the bar’s range equals the highest value in the window and the bar’s range divided by ATR ≤ sharpChurnThr (indicating large volume within a small range).
5. Percentile rank: The current side’s volume percentile rank is ≥ sharp Percentile.
6. Mirror logic for sellers: The above checks are repeated with buyer and seller roles swapped and the price break levels reversed.
Each condition that passes contributes one point to the corresponding side’s score (0 or 1). Risk and confirmation thresholds are then applied to these scores.
7.4 Scoring and labels
• Risk: If scoreBull ≥ sharpScoreRisk, a “Sharp ↑ Risk” label is drawn above the bar. If scoreBear ≥ sharpScoreRisk, a “Sharp ↓ Risk” label is drawn below the bar.
• Confirmation: A risk label is upgraded to “Sharp ↑” when scoreBull ≥ sharpScoreConfirm and the bar closes above the highest recent pivot (HH1); for bearish cases, confirmation requires scoreBear ≥ sharpScoreConfirm and a close below the lowest pivot (LL1).
• Label positioning: Labels are offset from the candle by ATR × sharpLabelMult (full ATR times multiplier), not half, and may include a dashed or dotted connector line if enabled.
Figure caption, In this chart both bullish and bearish sharp‑move setups have been flagged. Earlier in the range, a “Sharp ↓ Risk” label appears beneath a candle: the sell‑side score met the risk threshold, signaling that the combination of strong sell volume, dominance and absorption within a narrow range suggested a potential sharp decline. The price did not close below the lower pivot, so this label remains a “risk” and no confirmation occurred. Later, as the market recovered and volume shifted back to the buy side, a “Sharp ↑ Risk” label prints above a candle near the top of the channel. Here, buy‑side dominance, cumulative delta divergence and a volume climax aligned, but price has not yet closed above the upper pivot (HH1), so the alert is still a risk rather than a confirmed sharp‑up move.
Figure caption, In this chart a Sharp ↑ label is displayed above a candle, indicating that the sharp move module has confirmed a bullish breakout. Prior bars satisfied the risk threshold — showing buy‑side dominance, positive cumulative delta divergence, a volume climax and strong absorption in a narrow range — and this candle closes above the highest recent pivot, upgrading the earlier “Sharp ↑ Risk” alert to a full Sharp ↑ signal. The green label is offset from the candle with a dashed connector, while the red and green trend lines trace the high and low pivot trajectories and the dashed horizontals mark the highest and lowest values of the lookback window.
8. Market‑Maker / Spread‑Capture Module
8.1 Concept
Liquidity providers often “capture the spread” by buying and selling in almost equal amounts within a very narrow price range. These bars can signal temporary congestion before a move or reflect algorithmic activity. This module flags bars where both buyer and seller volumes are high, the price range is only a few ticks and the buy/sell split remains close to 50%. It helps traders spot potential liquidity pockets.
8.2 Inputs
• scalpLookback: Window length used to compute volume averages.
• scalpVolMult: Multiplier applied to each side’s average volume; both buy and sell volumes must exceed this multiple.
• scalpTickCount: Maximum allowed number of ticks in a bar’s range (calculated as (high − low) / minTick). A value of 1 or 2 captures ultra‑small bars; increasing it relaxes the range requirement.
• scalpDeltaRatio: Maximum deviation from a perfect 50/50 split. For example, 0.05 means the buyer share must be between 45% and 55%.
• Label settings: ATR length, multiplier, size, colors, connector style and width.
• Toggles : show_scalp_module and show_scalp_labels to enable the module and its labels.
8.3 Signal
When, on the current bar, both TF_buy_breakout and TF_sell_breakout exceed scalpVolMult times their respective averages and (high − low)/minTick ≤ scalpTickCount and the buyer share is within scalpDeltaRatio of 50%, the module prints a “Spread ↔” label above the bar. The label uses the same ATR offset logic as other modules and draws a connector if enabled.
Figure caption, In this chart the spread‑capture module has identified a potential liquidity pocket. Buyer and seller volumes both spiked above their recent averages, yet the candle’s range measured only a couple of ticks and the buy/sell split stayed close to 50 %. This combination met the module’s criteria, so it printed a grey “Spread ↔” label above the bar. The red and green trend lines link the earliest and latest high and low pivots, and the dashed horizontals mark the highest high and lowest low within the current lookback window.
9. Money Flow Module
9.1 Concept
To translate volume into a monetary measure, this module multiplies each side’s volume by the closing price. It tracks buying and selling system money default currency on a per-bar basis and sums them over a chosen period. The difference between buy and sell currencies (Δ$) shows net inflow or outflow.
9.2 Inputs
• mf_period_len_mf: Number of bars used for summing buy and sell dollars.
• Label appearance settings: ATR length, multiplier, size, colors for up/down labels, and connector style and width.
• Toggles: Use enableMoneyFlowLabel_mf and showMFLabels to control whether the module and its labels are displayed.
9.3 Calculations
• Per-bar money: Buy $ = TF_buy_breakout × close; Sell $ = TF_sell_breakout × close. Their difference is Δ$ = Buy $ − Sell $.
• Summations: Over mf_period_len_mf bars, compute Σ Buy $, Σ Sell $ and ΣΔ$ using math.sum().
• Info table entries: Rows 9–13 display these values as texts like “↑ USD 1234 (1M)” or “ΣΔ USD −5678 (14)”, with colors reflecting whether buyers or sellers dominate.
• Money flow status: If Δ$ is positive the bar is marked “Money flow in” ; if negative, “Money flow out” ; if zero, “Neutral”. The cumulative status is similarly derived from ΣΔ.Labels print at the bar that changes the sign of ΣΔ, offset using ATR × label multiplier and styled per user preferences.
Figure caption, The chart illustrates a steady rise toward the highest recent pivot (HH1) with price riding between a rising green trend‑line and a red trend‑line drawn through earlier pivot highs. A green Money flow in label appears above the bar near the top of the channel, signaling that net dollar flow turned positive on this bar: buy‑side dollar volume exceeded sell‑side dollar volume, pushing the cumulative sum ΣΔ$ above zero. In the info table, the “Money flow (bar)” and “Money flow Σ” rows both read In, confirming that the indicator’s money‑flow module has detected an inflow at both bar and aggregate levels, while other modules (pivots, trend lines and support/resistance) remain active to provide structural context.
In this example the Money Flow module signals a net outflow. Price has been trending downward: successive high pivots form a falling red trend‑line and the low pivots form a descending green support line. When the latest bar broke below the previous low pivot (LL1), both the bar‑level and cumulative net dollar flow turned negative—selling volume at the close exceeded buying volume and pushed the cumulative Δ$ below zero. The module reacts by printing a red “Money flow out” label beneath the candle; the info table confirms that the “Money flow (bar)” and “Money flow Σ” rows both show Out, indicating sustained dominance of sellers in this period.
10. Info Table
10.1 Purpose
When enabled, the Info Table appears in the lower right of your chart. It summarises key values computed by the indicator—such as buy and sell volume, delta, total volume, breakout status, market phase, and money flow—so you can see at a glance which side is dominant and which signals are active.
10.2 Symbols
• ↑ / ↓ — Up (↑) denotes buy volume or money; down (↓) denotes sell volume or money.
• MA — Moving average. In the table it shows the average value of a series over the lookback period.
• Σ (Sigma) — Cumulative sum over the chosen lookback period.
• Δ (Delta) — Difference between buy and sell values.
• B / S — Buyer and seller share of total volume, expressed as percentages.
• Ref. Price — Reference price for breakout calculations, based on the latest pivot.
• Status — Indicates whether a breakout condition is currently active (True) or has failed.
10.3 Row definitions
1. Up volume / MA up volume – Displays current buy volume on the lower timeframe and its moving average over the lookback period.
2. Down volume / MA down volume – Shows current sell volume and its moving average; sell values are formatted in red for clarity.
3. Δ / ΣΔ – Lists the difference between buy and sell volume for the current bar and the cumulative delta volume over the lookback period.
4. Σ / MA Σ (Vol/MA) – Total volume (buy + sell) for the bar, with the ratio of this volume to its moving average; the right cell shows the average total volume.
5. B/S ratio – Buy and sell share of the total volume: current bar percentages and the average percentages across the lookback period.
6. Buyer Rank / Seller Rank – Ranks the bar’s buy and sell volumes among the last (n) bars; lower rank numbers indicate higher relative volume.
7. Σ Buy / Σ Sell – Sum of buy and sell volumes over the lookback window, indicating which side has traded more.
8. Breakout UP / DOWN – Shows the breakout thresholds (Ref. Price) and whether the breakout condition is active (True) or has failed.
9. Market Phase (Vol) – Reports the current volume‑only phase: Accumulation, Distribution or Neutral.
10. Money Flow – The final rows display dollar amounts and status:
– ↑ USD / Σ↑ USD – Buy dollars for the current bar and the cumulative sum over the money‑flow period.
– ↓ USD / Σ↓ USD – Sell dollars and their cumulative sum.
– Δ USD / ΣΔ USD – Net dollar difference (buy minus sell) for the bar and cumulatively.
– Money flow (bar) – Indicates whether the bar’s net dollar flow is positive (In), negative (Out) or neutral.
– Money flow Σ – Shows whether the cumulative net dollar flow across the chosen period is positive, negative or neutral.
The chart above shows a sequence of different signals from the indicator. A Bull Trap Risk appears after price briefly pushes above resistance but fails to hold, then a green Accum label identifies an accumulation phase. An upward breakout follows, confirmed by a Money flow in print. Later, a Sharp ↓ Risk warns of a possible sharp downturn; after price dips below support but quickly recovers, a Bear Trap label marks a false breakdown. The highlighted info table in the center summarizes key metrics at that moment, including current and average buy/sell volumes, net delta, total volume versus its moving average, breakout status (up and down), market phase (volume), and bar‑level and cumulative money flow (In/Out).
11. Conclusion & Final Remarks
This indicator was developed as a holistic study of market structure and order flow. It brings together several well‑known concepts from technical analysis—breakouts, accumulation and distribution phases, overbought and oversold extremes, bull and bear traps, sharp directional moves, market‑maker spread bars and money flow—into a single Pine Script tool. Each module is based on widely recognized trading ideas and was implemented after consulting reference materials and example strategies, so you can see in real time how these concepts interact on your chart.
A distinctive feature of this indicator is its reliance on per‑side volume: instead of tallying only total volume, it separately measures buy and sell transactions on a lower time frame. This approach gives a clearer view of who is in control—buyers or sellers—and helps filter breakouts, detect phases of accumulation or distribution, recognize potential traps, anticipate sharp moves and gauge whether liquidity providers are active. The money‑flow module extends this analysis by converting volume into currency values and tracking net inflow or outflow across a chosen window.
Although comprehensive, this indicator is intended solely as a guide. It highlights conditions and statistics that many traders find useful, but it does not generate trading signals or guarantee results. Ultimately, you remain responsible for your positions. Use the information presented here to inform your analysis, combine it with other tools and risk‑management techniques, and always make your own decisions when trading.
ValueAtTime█ OVERVIEW
This library is a Pine Script® programming tool for accessing historical values in a time series using UNIX timestamps . Its data structure and functions index values by time, allowing scripts to retrieve past values based on absolute timestamps or relative time offsets instead of relying on bar index offsets.
█ CONCEPTS
UNIX timestamps
In Pine Script®, a UNIX timestamp is an integer representing the number of milliseconds elapsed since January 1, 1970, at 00:00:00 UTC (the UNIX Epoch ). The timestamp is a unique, absolute representation of a specific point in time. Unlike a calendar date and time, a UNIX timestamp's meaning does not change relative to any time zone .
This library's functions process series values and corresponding UNIX timestamps in pairs , offering a simplified way to identify values that occur at or near distinct points in time instead of on specific bars.
Storing and retrieving time-value pairs
This library's `Data` type defines the structure for collecting time and value information in pairs. Objects of the `Data` type contain the following two fields:
• `times` – An array of "int" UNIX timestamps for each recorded value.
• `values` – An array of "float" values for each saved timestamp.
Each index in both arrays refers to a specific time-value pair. For instance, the `times` and `values` elements at index 0 represent the first saved timestamp and corresponding value. The library functions that maintain `Data` objects queue up to one time-value pair per bar into the object's arrays, where the saved timestamp represents the bar's opening time .
Because the `times` array contains a distinct UNIX timestamp for each item in the `values` array, it serves as a custom mapping for retrieving saved values. All the library functions that return information from a `Data` object use this simple two-step process to identify a value based on time:
1. Perform a binary search on the `times` array to find the earliest saved timestamp closest to the specified time or offset and get the element's index.
2. Access the element from the `values` array at the retrieved index, returning the stored value corresponding to the found timestamp.
Value search methods
There are several techniques programmers can use to identify historical values from corresponding timestamps. This library's functions include three different search methods to locate and retrieve values based on absolute times or relative time offsets:
Timestamp search
Find the value with the earliest saved timestamp closest to a specified timestamp.
Millisecond offset search
Find the value with the earliest saved timestamp closest to a specified number of milliseconds behind the current bar's opening time. This search method provides a time-based alternative to retrieving historical values at specific bar offsets.
Period offset search
Locate the value with the earliest saved timestamp closest to a defined period offset behind the current bar's opening time. The function calculates the span of the offset based on a period string . The "string" must contain one of the following unit tokens:
• "D" for days
• "W" for weeks
• "M" for months
• "Y" for years
• "YTD" for year-to-date, meaning the time elapsed since the beginning of the bar's opening year in the exchange time zone.
The period string can include a multiplier prefix for all supported units except "YTD" (e.g., "2W" for two weeks).
Note that the precise span covered by the "M", "Y", and "YTD" units varies across time. The "1M" period can cover 28, 29, 30, or 31 days, depending on the bar's opening month and year in the exchange time zone. The "1Y" period covers 365 or 366 days, depending on leap years. The "YTD" period's span changes with each new bar, because it always measures the time from the start of the current bar's opening year.
█ CALCULATIONS AND USE
This library's functions offer a flexible, structured approach to retrieving historical values at or near specific timestamps, millisecond offsets, or period offsets for different analytical needs.
See below for explanations of the exported functions and how to use them.
Retrieving single values
The library includes three functions that retrieve a single stored value using timestamp, millisecond offset, or period offset search methods:
• `valueAtTime()` – Locates the saved value with the earliest timestamp closest to a specified timestamp.
• `valueAtTimeOffset()` – Finds the saved value with the earliest timestamp closest to the specified number of milliseconds behind the current bar's opening time.
• `valueAtPeriodOffset()` – Finds the saved value with the earliest timestamp closest to the period-based offset behind the current bar's opening time.
Each function has two overloads for advanced and simple use cases. The first overload searches for a value in a user-specified `Data` object created by the `collectData()` function (see below). It returns a tuple containing the found value and the corresponding timestamp.
The second overload maintains a `Data` object internally to store and retrieve values for a specified `source` series. This overload returns a tuple containing the historical `source` value, the corresponding timestamp, and the current bar's `source` value, making it helpful for comparing past and present values from requested contexts.
Retrieving multiple values
The library includes the following functions to retrieve values from multiple historical points in time, facilitating calculations and comparisons with values retrieved across several intervals:
• `getDataAtTimes()` – Locates a past `source` value for each item in a `timestamps` array. Each retrieved value's timestamp represents the earliest time closest to one of the specified timestamps.
• `getDataAtTimeOffsets()` – Finds a past `source` value for each item in a `timeOffsets` array. Each retrieved value's timestamp represents the earliest time closest to one of the specified millisecond offsets behind the current bar's opening time.
• `getDataAtPeriodOffsets()` – Finds a past value for each item in a `periods` array. Each retrieved value's timestamp represents the earliest time closest to one of the specified period offsets behind the current bar's opening time.
Each function returns a tuple with arrays containing the found `source` values and their corresponding timestamps. In addition, the tuple includes the current `source` value and the symbol's description, which also makes these functions helpful for multi-interval comparisons using data from requested contexts.
Processing period inputs
When writing scripts that retrieve historical values based on several user-specified period offsets, the most concise approach is to create a single text input that allows users to list each period, then process the "string" list into an array for use in the `getDataAtPeriodOffsets()` function.
This library includes a `getArrayFromString()` function to provide a simple way to process strings containing comma-separated lists of periods. The function splits the specified `str` by its commas and returns an array containing every non-empty item in the list with surrounding whitespaces removed. View the example code to see how we use this function to process the value of a text area input .
Calculating period offset times
Because the exact amount of time covered by a specified period offset can vary, it is often helpful to verify the resulting times when using the `valueAtPeriodOffset()` or `getDataAtPeriodOffsets()` functions to ensure the calculations work as intended for your use case.
The library's `periodToTimestamp()` function calculates an offset timestamp from a given period and reference time. With this function, programmers can verify the time offsets in a period-based data search and use the calculated offset times in additional operations.
For periods with "D" or "W" units, the function calculates the time offset based on the absolute number of milliseconds the period covers (e.g., `86400000` for "1D"). For periods with "M", "Y", or "YTD" units, the function calculates an offset time based on the reference time's calendar date in the exchange time zone.
Collecting data
All the `getDataAt*()` functions, and the second overloads of the `valueAt*()` functions, collect and maintain data internally, meaning scripts do not require a separate `Data` object when using them. However, the first overloads of the `valueAt*()` functions do not collect data, because they retrieve values from a user-specified `Data` object.
For cases where a script requires a separate `Data` object for use with these overloads or other custom routines, this library exports the `collectData()` function. This function queues each bar's `source` value and opening timestamp into a `Data` object and returns the object's ID.
This function is particularly useful when searching for values from a specific series more than once. For instance, instead of using multiple calls to the second overloads of `valueAt*()` functions with the same `source` argument, programmers can call `collectData()` to store each bar's `source` and opening timestamp, then use the returned `Data` object's ID in calls to the first `valueAt*()` overloads to reduce memory usage.
The `collectData()` function and all the functions that collect data internally include two optional parameters for limiting the saved time-value pairs to a sliding window: `timeOffsetLimit` and `timeframeLimit`. When either has a non-na argument, the function restricts the collected data to the maximum number of recent bars covered by the specified millisecond- and timeframe-based intervals.
NOTE : All calls to the functions that collect data for a `source` series can execute up to once per bar or realtime tick, because each stored value requires a unique corresponding timestamp. Therefore, scripts cannot call these functions iteratively within a loop . If a call to these functions executes more than once inside a loop's scope, it causes a runtime error.
█ EXAMPLE CODE
The example code at the end of the script demonstrates one possible use case for this library's functions. The code retrieves historical price data at user-specified period offsets, calculates price returns for each period from the retrieved data, and then populates a table with the results.
The example code's process is as follows:
1. Input a list of periods – The user specifies a comma-separated list of period strings in the script's "Period list" input (e.g., "1W, 1M, 3M, 1Y, YTD"). Each item in the input list represents a period offset from the latest bar's opening time.
2. Process the period list – The example calls `getArrayFromString()` on the first bar to split the input list by its commas and construct an array of period strings.
3. Request historical data – The code uses a call to `getDataAtPeriodOffsets()` as the `expression` argument in a request.security() call to retrieve the closing prices of "1D" bars for each period included in the processed `periods` array.
4. Display information in a table – On the latest bar, the code uses the retrieved data to calculate price returns over each specified period, then populates a two-row table with the results. The cells for each return percentage are color-coded based on the magnitude and direction of the price change. The cells also include tooltips showing the compared daily bar's opening date in the exchange time zone.
█ NOTES
• This library's architecture relies on a user-defined type (UDT) for its data storage format. UDTs are blueprints from which scripts create objects , i.e., composite structures with fields containing independent values or references of any supported type.
• The library functions search through a `Data` object's `times` array using the array.binary_search_leftmost() function, which is more efficient than looping through collected data to identify matching timestamps. Note that this built-in works only for arrays with elements sorted in ascending order .
• Each function that collects data from a `source` series updates the values and times stored in a local `Data` object's arrays. If a single call to these functions were to execute in a loop , it would store multiple values with an identical timestamp, which can cause erroneous search behavior. To prevent looped calls to these functions, the library uses the `checkCall()` helper function in their scopes. This function maintains a counter that increases by one each time it executes on a confirmed bar. If the count exceeds the total number of bars, indicating the call executes more than once in a loop, it raises a runtime error .
• Typically, when requesting higher-timeframe data with request.security() while using barmerge.lookahead_on as the `lookahead` argument, the `expression` argument should be offset with the history-referencing operator to prevent lookahead bias on historical bars. However, the call in this script's example code enables lookahead without offsetting the `expression` because the script displays results only on the last historical bar and all realtime bars, where there is no future data to leak into the past. This call ensures the displayed results use the latest data available from the context on realtime bars.
Look first. Then leap.
█ EXPORTED TYPES
Data
A structure for storing successive timestamps and corresponding values from a dataset.
Fields:
times (array) : An "int" array containing a UNIX timestamp for each value in the `values` array.
values (array) : A "float" array containing values corresponding to the timestamps in the `times` array.
█ EXPORTED FUNCTIONS
getArrayFromString(str)
Splits a "string" into an array of substrings using the comma (`,`) as the delimiter. The function trims surrounding whitespace characters from each substring, and it excludes empty substrings from the result.
Parameters:
str (series string) : The "string" to split into an array based on its commas.
Returns: (array) An array of trimmed substrings from the specified `str`.
periodToTimestamp(period, referenceTime)
Calculates a UNIX timestamp representing the point offset behind a reference time by the amount of time within the specified `period`.
Parameters:
period (series string) : The period string, which determines the time offset of the returned timestamp. The specified argument must contain a unit and an optional multiplier (e.g., "1Y", "3M", "2W", "YTD"). Supported units are:
- "Y" for years.
- "M" for months.
- "W" for weeks.
- "D" for days.
- "YTD" (Year-to-date) for the span from the start of the `referenceTime` value's year in the exchange time zone. An argument with this unit cannot contain a multiplier.
referenceTime (series int) : The millisecond UNIX timestamp from which to calculate the offset time.
Returns: (int) A millisecond UNIX timestamp representing the offset time point behind the `referenceTime`.
collectData(source, timeOffsetLimit, timeframeLimit)
Collects `source` and `time` data successively across bars. The function stores the information within a `Data` object for use in other exported functions/methods, such as `valueAtTimeOffset()` and `valueAtPeriodOffset()`. Any call to this function cannot execute more than once per bar or realtime tick.
Parameters:
source (series float) : The source series to collect. The function stores each value in the series with an associated timestamp representing its corresponding bar's opening time.
timeOffsetLimit (simple int) : Optional. A time offset (range) in milliseconds. If specified, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the range, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-empty `timeframeLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
timeframeLimit (simple string) : Optional. A valid timeframe string. If specified and not empty, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the timeframe, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-na `timeOffsetLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
Returns: (Data) A `Data` object containing collected `source` values and corresponding timestamps over the allowed time range.
method valueAtTime(data, timestamp)
(Overload 1 of 2) Retrieves value and time data from a `Data` object's fields at the index of the earliest timestamp closest to the specified `timestamp`. Callable as a method or a function.
Parameters:
data (series Data) : The `Data` object containing the collected time and value data.
timestamp (series int) : The millisecond UNIX timestamp to search. The function returns data for the earliest saved timestamp that is closest to the value.
Returns: ( ) A tuple containing the following data from the `Data` object:
- The stored value corresponding to the identified timestamp ("float").
- The earliest saved timestamp that is closest to the specified `timestamp` ("int").
valueAtTime(source, timestamp, timeOffsetLimit, timeframeLimit)
(Overload 2 of 2) Retrieves `source` and time information for the earliest bar whose opening timestamp is closest to the specified `timestamp`. Any call to this function cannot execute more than once per bar or realtime tick.
Parameters:
source (series float) : The source series to analyze. The function stores each value in the series with an associated timestamp representing its corresponding bar's opening time.
timestamp (series int) : The millisecond UNIX timestamp to search. The function returns data for the earliest bar whose timestamp is closest to the value.
timeOffsetLimit (simple int) : Optional. A time offset (range) in milliseconds. If specified, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the range, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-empty `timeframeLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
timeframeLimit (simple string) : (simple string) Optional. A valid timeframe string. If specified and not empty, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the timeframe, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-na `timeOffsetLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
Returns: ( ) A tuple containing the following data:
- The `source` value corresponding to the identified timestamp ("float").
- The earliest bar's timestamp that is closest to the specified `timestamp` ("int").
- The current bar's `source` value ("float").
method valueAtTimeOffset(data, timeOffset)
(Overload 1 of 2) Retrieves value and time data from a `Data` object's fields at the index of the earliest saved timestamp closest to `timeOffset` milliseconds behind the current bar's opening time. Callable as a method or a function.
Parameters:
data (series Data) : The `Data` object containing the collected time and value data.
timeOffset (series int) : The millisecond offset behind the bar's opening time. The function returns data for the earliest saved timestamp that is closest to the calculated offset time.
Returns: ( ) A tuple containing the following data from the `Data` object:
- The stored value corresponding to the identified timestamp ("float").
- The earliest saved timestamp that is closest to `timeOffset` milliseconds before the current bar's opening time ("int").
valueAtTimeOffset(source, timeOffset, timeOffsetLimit, timeframeLimit)
(Overload 2 of 2) Retrieves `source` and time information for the earliest bar whose opening timestamp is closest to `timeOffset` milliseconds behind the current bar's opening time. Any call to this function cannot execute more than once per bar or realtime tick.
Parameters:
source (series float) : The source series to analyze. The function stores each value in the series with an associated timestamp representing its corresponding bar's opening time.
timeOffset (series int) : The millisecond offset behind the bar's opening time. The function returns data for the earliest bar's timestamp that is closest to the calculated offset time.
timeOffsetLimit (simple int) : Optional. A time offset (range) in milliseconds. If specified, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the range, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-empty `timeframeLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
timeframeLimit (simple string) : Optional. A valid timeframe string. If specified and not empty, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the timeframe, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-na `timeOffsetLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
Returns: ( ) A tuple containing the following data:
- The `source` value corresponding to the identified timestamp ("float").
- The earliest bar's timestamp that is closest to `timeOffset` milliseconds before the current bar's opening time ("int").
- The current bar's `source` value ("float").
method valueAtPeriodOffset(data, period)
(Overload 1 of 2) Retrieves value and time data from a `Data` object's fields at the index of the earliest timestamp closest to a calculated offset behind the current bar's opening time. The calculated offset represents the amount of time covered by the specified `period`. Callable as a method or a function.
Parameters:
data (series Data) : The `Data` object containing the collected time and value data.
period (series string) : The period string, which determines the calculated time offset. The specified argument must contain a unit and an optional multiplier (e.g., "1Y", "3M", "2W", "YTD"). Supported units are:
- "Y" for years.
- "M" for months.
- "W" for weeks.
- "D" for days.
- "YTD" (Year-to-date) for the span from the start of the current bar's year in the exchange time zone. An argument with this unit cannot contain a multiplier.
Returns: ( ) A tuple containing the following data from the `Data` object:
- The stored value corresponding to the identified timestamp ("float").
- The earliest saved timestamp that is closest to the calculated offset behind the bar's opening time ("int").
valueAtPeriodOffset(source, period, timeOffsetLimit, timeframeLimit)
(Overload 2 of 2) Retrieves `source` and time information for the earliest bar whose opening timestamp is closest to a calculated offset behind the current bar's opening time. The calculated offset represents the amount of time covered by the specified `period`. Any call to this function cannot execute more than once per bar or realtime tick.
Parameters:
source (series float) : The source series to analyze. The function stores each value in the series with an associated timestamp representing its corresponding bar's opening time.
period (series string) : The period string, which determines the calculated time offset. The specified argument must contain a unit and an optional multiplier (e.g., "1Y", "3M", "2W", "YTD"). Supported units are:
- "Y" for years.
- "M" for months.
- "W" for weeks.
- "D" for days.
- "YTD" (Year-to-date) for the span from the start of the current bar's year in the exchange time zone. An argument with this unit cannot contain a multiplier.
timeOffsetLimit (simple int) : Optional. A time offset (range) in milliseconds. If specified, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the range, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-empty `timeframeLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
timeframeLimit (simple string) : Optional. A valid timeframe string. If specified and not empty, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the timeframe, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-na `timeOffsetLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
Returns: ( ) A tuple containing the following data:
- The `source` value corresponding to the identified timestamp ("float").
- The earliest bar's timestamp that is closest to the calculated offset behind the current bar's opening time ("int").
- The current bar's `source` value ("float").
getDataAtTimes(timestamps, source, timeOffsetLimit, timeframeLimit)
Retrieves `source` and time information for each bar whose opening timestamp is the earliest one closest to one of the UNIX timestamps specified in the `timestamps` array. Any call to this function cannot execute more than once per bar or realtime tick.
Parameters:
timestamps (array) : An array of "int" values representing UNIX timestamps. The function retrieves `source` and time data for each element in this array.
source (series float) : The source series to analyze. The function stores each value in the series with an associated timestamp representing its corresponding bar's opening time.
timeOffsetLimit (simple int) : Optional. A time offset (range) in milliseconds. If specified, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the range, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-empty `timeframeLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
timeframeLimit (simple string) : Optional. A valid timeframe string. If specified and not empty, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the timeframe, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-na `timeOffsetLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
Returns: ( ) A tuple of the following data:
- An array containing a `source` value for each identified timestamp (array).
- An array containing an identified timestamp for each item in the `timestamps` array (array).
- The current bar's `source` value ("float").
- The symbol's description from `syminfo.description` ("string").
getDataAtTimeOffsets(timeOffsets, source, timeOffsetLimit, timeframeLimit)
Retrieves `source` and time information for each bar whose opening timestamp is the earliest one closest to one of the time offsets specified in the `timeOffsets` array. Each offset in the array represents the absolute number of milliseconds behind the current bar's opening time. Any call to this function cannot execute more than once per bar or realtime tick.
Parameters:
timeOffsets (array) : An array of "int" values representing the millisecond time offsets used in the search. The function retrieves `source` and time data for each element in this array. For example, the array ` ` specifies that the function returns data for the timestamps closest to one day and one week behind the current bar's opening time.
source (float) : (series float) The source series to analyze. The function stores each value in the series with an associated timestamp representing its corresponding bar's opening time.
timeOffsetLimit (simple int) : Optional. A time offset (range) in milliseconds. If specified, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the range, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-empty `timeframeLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
timeframeLimit (simple string) : Optional. A valid timeframe string. If specified and not empty, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the timeframe, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-na `timeOffsetLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
Returns: ( ) A tuple of the following data:
- An array containing a `source` value for each identified timestamp (array).
- An array containing an identified timestamp for each offset specified in the `timeOffsets` array (array).
- The current bar's `source` value ("float").
- The symbol's description from `syminfo.description` ("string").
getDataAtPeriodOffsets(periods, source, timeOffsetLimit, timeframeLimit)
Retrieves `source` and time information for each bar whose opening timestamp is the earliest one closest to a calculated offset behind the current bar's opening time. Each calculated offset represents the amount of time covered by a period specified in the `periods` array. Any call to this function cannot execute more than once per bar or realtime tick.
Parameters:
periods (array) : An array of period strings, which determines the time offsets used in the search. The function retrieves `source` and time data for each element in this array. For example, the array ` ` specifies that the function returns data for the timestamps closest to one day, week, and month behind the current bar's opening time. Each "string" in the array must contain a unit and an optional multiplier. Supported units are:
- "Y" for years.
- "M" for months.
- "W" for weeks.
- "D" for days.
- "YTD" (Year-to-date) for the span from the start of the current bar's year in the exchange time zone. An argument with this unit cannot contain a multiplier.
source (float) : (series float) The source series to analyze. The function stores each value in the series with an associated timestamp representing its corresponding bar's opening time.
timeOffsetLimit (simple int) : Optional. A time offset (range) in milliseconds. If specified, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the range, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-empty `timeframeLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
timeframeLimit (simple string) : Optional. A valid timeframe string. If specified and not empty, the function limits the collected data to the maximum number of bars covered by the timeframe, with a minimum of one bar. If the call includes a non-na `timeOffsetLimit` value, the function limits the data using the largest number of bars covered by the two ranges. The default is `na`.
Returns: ( ) A tuple of the following data:
- An array containing a `source` value for each identified timestamp (array).
- An array containing an identified timestamp for each period specified in the `periods` array (array).
- The current bar's `source` value ("float").
- The symbol's description from `syminfo.description` ("string").
VMDM - Volume, Momentum & Divergence Master [BullByte]VMDM - Volume, Momentum and Divergence Master
Educational Multi-Layer Market Structure Analysis System
Multi-factor divergence engine that scores RSI momentum, volume pressure, and institutional footprints into one non-repainting confluence rating (0-100).
WHAT THIS INDICATOR IS
VMDM is an educational indicator designed to teach traders how to recognize high-probability reversal and continuation patterns by analyzing four independent market dimensions simultaneously. Instead of relying on a single indicator that may produce frequent false signals, VMDM creates a confluence-based scoring system that weights multiple confirmation factors, helping you understand which setups have stronger technical backing and which are lower quality.
This is NOT a trading system or signal generator. It is a learning tool that visualizes complex market structure concepts in an accessible format for both coders and non-coders.
THE PROBLEM IT SOLVES
Most traders face these common challenges:
Challenge 1 - Indicator Overload: Running RSI, volume analysis, and divergence detection separately creates chart clutter and conflicting signals. You waste time cross-referencing multiple windows trying to determine if all factors align.
Challenge 2 - False Divergences: Standard divergence indicators trigger on every minor pivot, creating noise. Many divergences fail because they lack supporting evidence from volume or market structure.
Challenge 3 - Missed Context: A bullish RSI divergence means nothing if it occurs during weak volume or in the middle of strong distribution. Context determines quality.
Challenge 4 - Repainting Confusion: Many divergence scripts repaint, showing perfect historical signals that never actually triggered in real-time, leading to false confidence.
Challenge 5 - Institutional Pattern Recognition: Absorption zones, stop hunts, and exhaustion patterns are taught in trading education but difficult to identify systematically without manual analysis.
VMDM addresses all five challenges by combining complementary analytical layers into one transparent, non-repainting, confluence-weighted system with visual clarity.
WHY THIS SPECIFIC COMBINATION - MASHUP JUSTIFICATION
This indicator is NOT a random mashup of popular indicators. Each of the four layers serves a specific analytical purpose and together they create a complete market structure assessment framework.
THE FOUR ANALYTICAL LAYERS
LAYER 1 - RSI MOMENTUM DIVERGENCE (Trend Exhaustion Detection)
Purpose: Identifies when price momentum is weakening before price itself reverses.
Why RSI: The Relative Strength Index measures momentum on a bounded 0-100 scale, making divergence detection mathematically consistent across all assets and timeframes. Unlike raw price oscillators, RSI normalizes momentum regardless of volatility regime.
How It Contributes: Divergence between price pivots and RSI pivots reveals early momentum exhaustion. A lower price low with a higher RSI low (bullish regular divergence) signals sellers are losing strength even as price makes new lows. This is the PRIMARY signal generator in VMDM.
Limitation If Used Alone: RSI divergence by itself produces many false signals because momentum can remain weak during continued trends. It needs confirmation from volume and structural evidence.
LAYER 2 - VOLUME PRESSURE ANALYSIS (Buying vs Selling Intensity)
Purpose: Quantifies whether the current bar's volume reflects buying pressure or selling pressure based on where price closed within the bar's range.
Methodology: Instead of just measuring volume size, VMDM calculates WHERE in the bar range the close occurred. A close near the high on high volume indicates strong buying absorption. A close near the low indicates selling pressure. The calculation accounts for wick size (wicks reduce pressure quality) and uses percentile ranking over a lookback period to normalize pressure strength on a 0-100 scale.
Formula Concept:
Buy Pressure = Volume × (Close - Low) / (High - Low) × Wick Quality Factor
Sell Pressure = Volume × (High - Close) / (High - Low) × Wick Quality Factor
Net Pressure = Buy Pressure - Sell Pressure
Pressure Strength = Percentile Rank of Net Pressure over lookback period
Why Percentile Ranking: Absolute volume varies by asset and session. Percentile ranking makes 85th percentile pressure on low-volume crypto comparable to 85th percentile pressure on high-volume forex.
How It Contributes: When a bullish divergence occurs at a pivot low AND pressure strength is above 60 (strong buying), this adds 25 confluence points. It confirms that the divergence is occurring during actual accumulation, not just weak selling.
Limitation If Used Alone: Pressure analysis shows current bar intensity but cannot identify trend exhaustion or reversal timing. High buying pressure can exist during a strong uptrend with no reversal imminent.
LAYER 3 - BEHAVIORAL FOOTPRINT PATTERNS (Volume Anomaly Detection)
CRITICAL DISCLAIMER: The terms "institutional footprint," "absorption," "stop hunt," and "exhaustion" used in this indicator are EDUCATIONAL LABELS for specific price and volume behavioral patterns. These patterns are detected through technical analysis of publicly available price, volume, and bar structure data. This indicator does NOT have access to actual institutional order flow, market maker data, broker stop-loss locations, or any non-public data source. These pattern names are used because they are common terminology in trading education to describe these technical behaviors. The analysis is interpretive and based on observable price action, not privileged information.
Purpose: Detect volume anomalies and price patterns that historically correlate with potential reversal zones or trend continuation failure.
Pattern Type 1 - Absorption (Labeled as "ACCUMULATION" or "DISTRIBUTION")
Detection Criteria: Volume is more than 2x the moving average AND bar range is less than 50 percent of the average bar range.
Interpretation: High volume compressed into a tight range suggests large participants are absorbing supply (accumulation) or distribution (distribution) without allowing price to move significantly. This often precedes directional moves once absorption completes.
Visual: Colored box zone highlighting the absorption area.
Pattern Type 2 - Stop Hunt (Labeled as "BULL HUNT" or "BEAR HUNT")
Detection Criteria: Price penetrates a recent 10-bar high or low by a small margin (0.2 percent), then closes back inside the range on above-average volume (1.5x+).
Interpretation: Price briefly spikes beyond recent structure (likely triggering stop losses placed just beyond obvious levels) then reverses. This is a classic false breakout pattern often seen before reversals.
Visual: Label at the wick extreme showing hunt direction.
Pattern Type 3 - Exhaustion (Labeled as "SELL EXHAUST" or "BUY EXHAUST")
Detection Criteria: Lower wick is more than 2.5x the body size with volume above 1.8x average and RSI below 35 (sell exhaustion), OR upper wick more than 2.5x body size with volume above 1.8x average and RSI above 65 (buy exhaustion).
Interpretation: Large wicks with high volume and extreme RSI suggest aggressive buying or selling was met with equally aggressive rejection. This exhaustion often marks short-term extremes.
Visual: Label showing exhaustion type.
How These Contribute: When a divergence forms at a pivot AND one of these behavioral patterns is active, the confluence score increases by 20 points. This confirms the divergence is occurring during structural anomaly activity, not just normal price flow.
Limitation If Used Alone: These patterns can occur mid-trend and do not indicate direction without momentum context. Absorption in a strong uptrend may just be continuation accumulation.
LAYER 4 - CONFLUENCE SCORING MATRIX (Quality Weighting System)
Purpose: Translate all detected conditions into a single 0-100 quality score so you can objectively compare setups.
Scoring Breakdown:
Divergence Present: +30 points (primary signal)
Pressure Confirmation: +25 points (volume supports direction)
Behavioral Footprint Active: +20 points (structural anomaly present)
RSI Extreme: +15 points (RSI below 30 or above 70 at pivot)
Volume Spike: +10 points (current volume above 1.5x average)
Maximum Possible Score: 100 points
Why These Weights: The weights reflect reliability hierarchy based on backtesting observation. Divergence is the core signal (30 points), but without volume confirmation (25 points) many fail. Behavioral patterns add meaningful context (20 points). RSI extremes and volume spikes are secondary confirmations (15 and 10 points).
Quality Tiers:
90-100: TEXTBOOK (all factors aligned)
75-89: HIGH QUALITY (strong confluence)
60-74: VALID (meets minimum threshold)
Below 60: DEVELOPING (not displayed unless threshold lowered)
How It Contributes: The confluence score allows you to filter noise. You can set your minimum quality threshold in settings. Higher thresholds (75+) show fewer but higher-quality patterns. Lower thresholds (50-60) show more patterns but include lower-confidence setups. This teaches you to distinguish strong setups from weak ones.
Limitation: Confluence scoring is historical observation-based, not predictive guarantee. A 95-point setup can still fail. The score represents technical alignment, not future certainty.
WHY THIS COMBINATION WORKS TOGETHER
Each layer addresses a limitation in the others:
RSI Divergence identifies WHEN momentum is exhausting (timing)
Volume Pressure confirms WHETHER the exhaustion is accompanied by opposite-side accumulation (confirmation)
Behavioral Footprint shows IF structural anomalies support the reversal hypothesis (context)
Confluence Scoring weights ALL factors into an objective quality metric (filtering)
Using only RSI divergence gives you timing without confirmation. Using only volume pressure gives you intensity without directional context. Using only pattern detection gives you anomalies without trend exhaustion context. Using all four together creates a complete analytical framework where each layer compensates for the others' weaknesses.
This is not a mashup for the sake of combining indicators. It is a structured analytical system where each component has a defined role in a multi-dimensional market assessment process.
HOW TO READ THE INDICATOR - VISUAL ELEMENTS GUIDE
VMDM displays up to five visual layer types. You can enable or disable each layer independently in settings under "Visual Layers."
VISUAL LAYER 1 - MARKET STRUCTURE (Pivot Points and Lines)
What You See:
Small labels at swing highs and lows marked "PH" (Pivot High) and "PL" (Pivot Low) with horizontal dashed lines extending right from each pivot.
What It Means:
These are CONFIRMED pivots, not real-time. A pivot low appears AFTER the required right-side confirmation bars pass (default 3 bars). This creates a delay but prevents repainting. The pivot only appears once it is mathematically confirmed.
The horizontal lines represent support (from pivot lows) and resistance (from pivot highs) levels where price previously found significant rejection.
Color Coding:
Green label and line: Pivot Low (potential support)
Red label and line: Pivot High (potential resistance)
How To Use:
These pivots are the foundation for divergence detection. Divergence is only calculated between confirmed pivots, ensuring all signals are non-repainting. The lines help you see historical structure levels.
VISUAL LAYER 2 - PRESSURE ZONES (Background Color)
What You See:
Subtle background color shading on bars - light green or light red tint.
What It Means:
This visualizes volume pressure strength in real-time.
Color Coding:
Light Green Background: Pressure Strength above 70 (strong buying pressure - price closing near highs on volume)
Light Red Background: Pressure Strength below 30 (strong selling pressure - price closing near lows on volume)
No Color: Neutral pressure (pressure between 30-70)
How To Use:
When a bullish divergence pattern appears during green pressure zones, it suggests the divergence is forming during accumulation. When a bearish divergence appears during red zones, distribution is occurring. Pressure zones help you filter divergences - those forming in supportive pressure environments have higher probability.
VISUAL LAYER 3 - DIVERGENCE LINES (Dotted Connectors)
What You See:
Dotted lines connecting two pivot points (either two pivot lows or two pivot highs).
What It Means:
A divergence has been detected between those two pivots. The line connects the price pivots where RSI showed opposite behavior.
Color Coding:
Bright Green Line: Bullish divergence (regular or hidden)
Bright Red Line: Bearish divergence (regular or hidden)
How To Use:
The divergence line appears ONLY after the second pivot is confirmed (delayed by right-side confirmation bars). This is intentional to prevent repainting. When you see the line appear, it means:
For Bullish Regular Divergence:
Price made a lower low (second pivot lower than first)
RSI made a higher low (RSI at second pivot higher than first)
Interpretation: Downtrend losing momentum
For Bullish Hidden Divergence:
Price made a higher low (second pivot higher than first)
RSI made a lower low (RSI at second pivot lower than first)
Interpretation: Uptrend continuation likely (pullback within uptrend)
For Bearish Regular Divergence:
Price made a higher high (second pivot higher than first)
RSI made a lower high (RSI at second pivot lower than first)
Interpretation: Uptrend losing momentum
For Bearish Hidden Divergence:
Price made a lower high (second pivot lower than first)
RSI made a higher high (RSI at second pivot higher than first)
Interpretation: Downtrend continuation likely (bounce within downtrend)
If "Show Consolidated Analysis Label" is disabled, a small label will appear on the divergence line showing the divergence type abbreviation.
VISUAL LAYER 4 - BEHAVIORAL FOOTPRINT MARKERS
What You See:
Boxes, labels, and markers at specific bars showing pattern detection.
ABSORPTION ZONES (Boxes):
Colored rectangular boxes spanning one or more bars.
Purple Box: Accumulation absorption zone (high volume, tight range, bullish close)
Red Box: Distribution absorption zone (high volume, tight range, bearish close)
If absorption continues for multiple consecutive bars, the box extends and a counter appears in the label showing how many bars the absorption lasted.
What It Means: Large volume is being absorbed without significant price movement. This often precedes directional breakouts once the absorption phase completes.
STOP HUNT MARKERS (Labels):
Small labels below or above wicks labeled "BULL HUNT" or "BEAR HUNT" (may show bar count if consecutive).
What It Means:
BULL HUNT : Price spiked below recent lows then reversed back up on volume - likely triggered sell stops before reversing
BEAR HUNT : Price spiked above recent highs then reversed back down on volume - likely triggered buy stops before reversing
EXHAUSTION MARKERS (Labels):
Labels showing "SELL EXHAUST" or "BUY EXHAUST."
What It Means:
SELL EXHAUST : Large lower wick with high volume and low RSI - aggressive selling met with strong rejection
BUY EXHAUST : Large upper wick with high volume and high RSI - aggressive buying met with strong rejection
How To Use:
These markers help you identify WHERE structural anomalies occurred. When a divergence signal appears AT THE SAME TIME as one of these patterns, the confluence score increases. You are looking for alignment - divergence + behavioral pattern + pressure confirmation = high-quality setup.
VISUAL LAYER 5 - CONSOLIDATED ANALYSIS LABEL (Main Pattern Signal)
What You See:
A large label appearing at pivot points (or in real-time mode, at current bar) containing full pattern analysis.
Label Appearance:
Depending on your "Use Compact Label Format" setting:
COMPACT MODE (Single Line):
Example: "BULLISH REGULAR | Q:HIGH QUALITY C:82"
Breakdown:
BULLISH REGULAR: Divergence type detected
Q:HIGH QUALITY: Pattern quality tier
C:82: Confluence score (82 out of 100)
FULL MODE (Multi-Line Detailed):
Example:
PATTERN DETECTED
-------------------
BULLISH REGULAR
Quality: HIGH QUALITY
Price: Lower Low
Momentum: Higher Low
Signal: Weakening Downtrend
CONFLUENCE: 82/100
-------------------
Divergence: 30
Pressure: 25
Institutional: 20
RSI Extreme: 0
Volume: 10
Breakdown:
Top section: Pattern type and quality
Middle section: Divergence explanation (what price did vs what RSI did)
Bottom section: Confluence score with itemized breakdown showing which factors contributed
Label Position:
In Confirmed modes: Label appears AT the pivot point (delayed by confirmation bars)
In Real-time mode: Label appears at current bar as conditions develop
Label Color:
Gold: Textbook quality (90+ confluence)
Green: High quality (75-89 confluence)
Blue: Valid quality (60-74 confluence)
How To Use:
This is your primary decision-making label. When it appears:
Check the divergence type (regular divergences are reversal signals, hidden divergences are continuation signals)
Review the quality tier (textbook and high quality have better historical win rates)
Examine the confluence breakdown to see which factors are present and which are missing
Look at the chart context (trend, support/resistance, timeframe)
Use this information to assess whether the setup aligns with your strategy
The label does NOT tell you to buy or sell. It tells you a technical pattern has formed and provides the quality assessment. Your trading decision must incorporate risk management, market context, and your strategy rules.
UNDERSTANDING THE THREE DETECTION MODES
VMDM offers three signal detection modes in settings to accommodate different trading styles and learning objectives.
MODE 1: "Confluence Only (Real-Time)"
How It Works: Displays signals AS THEY DEVELOP on the current bar without waiting for pivot confirmation. The system calculates confluence score from pressure, volume, RSI extremes, and behavioral patterns. Divergence signals are NOT required in this mode.
Delay: ZERO - signals appear immediately.
Use Case: Real-time scanning for high-confluence zones without divergence requirement. Useful for intraday traders who want immediate alerts when multiple factors align.
Tradeoff: More frequent signals but includes setups without confirmed divergence. Higher false signal rate. Signals can change as the bar develops (not repainting in historical bars, but current bar updates).
Visual Behavior: Labels appear at the current bar. No divergence lines unless divergence happens to be present.
MODE 2: "Divergence + Confluence (Confirmed)" - DEFAULT RECOMMENDED
How It Works: Full system engagement. Signals appear ONLY when:
A pivot is confirmed (requires right-side confirmation bars to pass)
Divergence is detected between current pivot and previous pivot
Total confluence score meets or exceeds your minimum threshold
Delay: Equal to your "Pivot Right Bars" setting (default 3 bars). This means signals appear 3 bars AFTER the actual pivot formed.
Use Case: Highest-quality, non-repainting signals for swing traders and learners who want to study confirmed pattern completion.
Tradeoff: Delayed signals. You will not receive the signal until confirmation occurs. In fast-moving markets, price may have already moved significantly by the time the signal appears.
Visual Behavior: Labels appear at the historical pivot location (in the past). Divergence lines connect the two pivots. This is the most educational mode because it shows completed, confirmed patterns.
Non-Repainting Guarantee: Yes. Once a signal appears, it never disappears or changes.
MODE 3: "Divergence + Confluence (Relaxed)"
How It Works: Same as Confirmed mode but with adaptive thresholds. If confluence is very high (10 points above threshold), the signal may appear even if some factors are weak. If divergence is present but confluence is slightly below threshold (within 10 points), it may still appear.
Delay: Same as Confirmed mode (right-side confirmation bars).
Use Case: Slightly more signals than Confirmed mode for traders willing to accept near-threshold setups.
Tradeoff: More signals but lower average quality than Confirmed mode.
Visual Behavior: Same as Confirmed mode.
DASHBOARD GUIDE - READING THE METRICS
The dashboard appears in the corner of your chart (position selectable in settings) and provides real-time market state analysis.
You can choose between four dashboard detail levels in settings: Off, Compact, Optimized (default), Full.
DASHBOARD ROW EXPLANATIONS
ROW 1 - Header Information
Left: Current symbol and timeframe
Center: "VMDM "
Right: Version number
ROW 2 - Mode and Delay
Shows which detection mode you are using and the signal delay.
Example: "CONFIRMED | Delay: 3 bars"
This reminds you that signals in confirmed mode appear 3 bars after the pivot forms.
ROW 3 - Market Regime
Format: "TREND UP HV" or "RANGING NV"
First Part - Trend State:
TREND UP: 20 EMA above 50 EMA with strong separation
TREND DOWN: 20 EMA below 50 EMA with strong separation
RANGING: EMAs close together, low trend strength
TRANSITION: Between trending and ranging states
Second Part - Volatility State:
HV: High Volatility (current ATR more than 1.3x the 50-bar average ATR)
NV: Normal Volatility (current ATR between 0.7x and 1.3x average)
LV: Low Volatility (current ATR less than 0.7x average)
Third Column: Volatility ratio (example: "1.45x" means current ATR is 1.45 times normal)
How To Use: Regime context helps you interpret signals. Reversal divergences are more reliable in ranging or transitional regimes. Continuation divergences (hidden) are more reliable in trending regimes. High volatility means wider stops may be needed.
ROW 4 - Pressure
Shows current volume pressure state.
Format: "BUYING | ██████████░░░░░░░░░"
States:
BUYING : Pressure strength above 60 (closes near highs)
SELLING : Pressure strength below 40 (closes near lows)
NEUTRAL : Pressure strength between 40-60
Bar Visualization: Each block represents 10 percentile points. A full bar (10 filled blocks) = 100th percentile pressure.
Color: Green for buying, red for selling, gray for neutral.
How To Use: When pressure aligns with divergence direction (bullish divergence during buying pressure), confluence is stronger.
ROW 5 - Volume and RSI
Format: "1.8x | RSI 68 | OB"
First Value: Current volume ratio (1.8x = volume is 1.8 times the moving average)
Second Value: Current RSI reading
Third Value: RSI state
OB: Overbought (RSI above 70)
OS: Oversold (RSI below 30)
Blank: Neutral RSI
How To Use: Volume spikes (above 1.5x) during divergence formation add confluence. RSI extremes at pivots add confluence.
ROW 6 - Behavioral Footprint
Format: "BULL HUNT | 2 bars"
Shows the most recent behavioral pattern detected and how long ago.
States:
ACCUMULATION / DISTRIBUTION: Absorption detected
BULL HUNT / BEAR HUNT: Stop hunt detected
SELL EXHAUST / BUY EXHAUST: Exhaustion detected
SCANNING: No recent pattern
NOW: Pattern is active on current bar
How To Use: When footprint activity is recent (within 50 bars) or active now, it adds context to divergence signals forming in that area.
ROW 7 - Current Pattern
Shows the divergence type currently detected (if any).
Examples: "BULLISH REGULAR", "BEARISH HIDDEN", "Scanning..."
Quality: Shows pattern quality (TEXTBOOK, HIGH QUALITY, VALID)
How To Use: This tells you what type of signal is active. Regular divergences are reversal setups. Hidden divergences are continuation setups.
ROW 8 - Session Summary
Format: "14 events | A3 H8 E3"
First Value: Total institutional events this session
Breakdown:
A: Absorption events
H: Stop hunt events
E: Exhaustion events
How To Use: High event counts suggest an active, volatile session with frequent structural anomalies. Low counts suggest quiet, orderly price action.
ROW 9 - Confluence Score (Optimized/Full mode only)
Format: "78/100 | ████████░░"
Shows current real-time confluence score even if no pattern is confirmed yet.
How To Use: Watch this in real-time to see how close you are to pattern formation. When it exceeds your threshold and divergence forms, a signal will appear (after confirmation delay).
ROW 10 - Patterns Studied (Optimized/Full mode only)
Format: "47 patterns | 12 bars ago"
First Value: Total confirmed patterns detected since chart loaded
Second Value: How many bars since the last confirmed pattern appeared
How To Use: Helps you understand pattern frequency on your selected symbol and timeframe. If many bars have passed since last pattern, market may be trending without reversal opportunities.
ROW 11 - Bull/Bear Ratio (Optimized/Full mode only)
Format: "28:19 | BULL"
Shows count of bullish vs bearish patterns detected.
Balance:
BULL: More bullish patterns detected (suggests market has had more bullish reversals/continuations)
BEAR: More bearish patterns detected
BAL: Equal counts
How To Use: Extreme imbalances can indicate directional bias in the studied period. A heavily bullish ratio in a downtrend might suggest frequent failed rallies (bearish continuation). Context matters.
ROW 12 - Volume Ratio Detail (Optimized/Full mode only)
Shows current volume vs average volume in absolute terms.
Example: "1.4x | 45230 / 32300"
How To Use: Confirms whether current activity is above or below normal.
ROW 13 - Last Institutional Event (Full mode only)
Shows the most recent institutional pattern type and how many bars ago it occurred.
Example: "DISTRIBUTION | 23 bars"
How To Use: Tracks recency of last anomaly for context.
SETTINGS GUIDE - EVERY PARAMETER EXPLAINED
PERFORMANCE SECTION
Enable All Visuals (Master Toggle)
Default: ON
What It Does: Master kill switch for ALL visual elements (labels, lines, boxes, background colors, dashboard). When OFF, only plot outputs remain (invisible unless you open data window).
When To Change: Turn OFF on mobile devices, 1-second charts, or slow computers to improve performance. You can still receive alerts even with visuals disabled.
Impact: Dramatic performance improvement when OFF, but you lose all visual feedback.
Maximum Object History
Default: 50 | Range: 10-100
What It Does: Limits how many of each object type (labels, lines, boxes) are kept in memory. Older objects beyond this limit are deleted.
When To Change: Lower to 20-30 on fast timeframes (1-minute charts) to prevent slowdown. Increase to 100 on daily charts if you want more historical pattern visibility.
Impact: Lower values = better performance but less historical visibility. Higher values = more history visible but potential slowdown on fast timeframes.
Alert Cooldown (Bars)
Default: 5 | Range: 1-50
What It Does: Minimum number of bars that must pass before another alert of the same type can fire. Prevents alert spam when multiple patterns form in quick succession.
When To Change: Increase to 20+ on 1-minute charts to reduce noise. Decrease to 1-2 on daily charts if you want every pattern alerted.
Impact: Higher cooldown = fewer alerts. Lower cooldown = more alerts.
USER EXPERIENCE SECTION
Show Enhanced Tooltips
Default: ON
What It Does: Enables detailed hover-over tooltips on labels and visual elements.
When To Change: Turn OFF if you encounter Pine Script compilation errors related to tooltip arguments (rare, platform-specific issue).
Impact: Minimal. Just adds helpful hover text.
MARKET STRUCTURE DETECTION SECTION
Pivot Left Bars
Default: 3 | Range: 2-10
What It Does: Number of bars to the LEFT of the center bar that must be higher (for pivot low) or lower (for pivot high) than the center bar for a pivot to be valid.
Example: With value 3, a pivot low requires the center bar's low to be lower than the 3 bars to its left.
When To Change:
Increase to 5-7 on noisy timeframes (1-minute charts) to filter insignificant pivots
Decrease to 2 on slow timeframes (daily charts) to catch more pivots
Impact: Higher values = fewer, more significant pivots = fewer signals. Lower values = more frequent pivots = more signals but more noise.
Pivot Right Bars
Default: 3 | Range: 2-10
What It Does: Number of bars to the RIGHT of the center bar that must pass for confirmation. This creates the non-repainting delay.
Example: With value 3, a pivot is confirmed 3 bars AFTER it forms.
When To Change:
Increase to 5-7 for slower, more confirmed signals (better for swing trading)
Decrease to 2 for faster signals (better for intraday, but still non-repainting)
Impact: Higher values = longer delay but more reliable confirmation. Lower values = faster signals but less confirmation. This setting directly controls your signal delay in Confirmed and Relaxed modes.
Minimum Confluence Score
Default: 60 | Range: 40-95
What It Does: The threshold score required for a pattern to be displayed. Patterns with confluence scores below this threshold are not shown.
When To Change:
Increase to 75+ if you only want high-quality textbook setups (fewer signals)
Decrease to 50-55 if you want to see more developing patterns (more signals, lower average quality)
Impact: This is your primary signal filter. Higher threshold = fewer, higher-quality signals. Lower threshold = more signals but includes weaker setups. Recommended starting point is 60-65.
TECHNICAL PERIODS SECTION
RSI Period
Default: 14 | Range: 5-50
What It Does: Lookback period for RSI calculation.
When To Change:
Decrease to 9-10 for faster, more sensitive RSI that detects shorter-term momentum changes
Increase to 21-28 for slower, smoother RSI that filters noise
Impact: Lower values make RSI more volatile (more frequent extremes and divergences). Higher values make RSI smoother (fewer but more significant divergences). 14 is industry standard.
Volume Moving Average Period
Default: 20 | Range: 10-200
What It Does: Lookback period for calculating average volume. Current volume is compared to this average to determine volume ratio.
When To Change:
Decrease to 10-14 for shorter-term volume comparison (more sensitive to recent volume changes)
Increase to 50-100 for longer-term volume comparison (smoother, less sensitive)
Impact: Lower values make volume ratio more volatile. Higher values make it more stable. 20 is standard.
ATR Period
Default: 14 | Range: 5-100
What It Does: Lookback period for Average True Range calculation used for volatility measurement and label positioning.
When To Change: Rarely needs adjustment. Use 7-10 for faster volatility response, 21-28 for slower.
Impact: Affects volatility ratio calculation and visual label spacing. Minimal impact on signals.
Pressure Percentile Lookback
Default: 50 | Range: 10-300
What It Does: Lookback period for calculating volume pressure percentile ranking. Your current pressure is ranked against the pressure of the last X bars.
When To Change:
Decrease to 20-30 for shorter-term pressure context (more responsive to recent changes)
Increase to 100-200 for longer-term pressure context (smoother rankings)
Impact: Lower values make pressure strength more sensitive to recent bars. Higher values provide more stable, long-term pressure assessment. Capped at 300 for performance reasons.
SIGNAL DETECTION SECTION
Signal Detection Mode
Default: "Divergence + Confluence (Confirmed)"
Options:
Confluence Only (Real-time)
Divergence + Confluence (Confirmed)
Divergence + Confluence (Relaxed)
What It Does: Selects which detection logic mode to use (see "Understanding The Three Detection Modes" section above).
When To Change: Use Confirmed for learning and non-repainting signals. Use Real-time for live scanning without divergence requirement. Use Relaxed for slightly more signals than Confirmed.
Impact: Fundamentally changes when and how signals appear.
VISUAL LAYERS SECTION
All toggles default to ON. Each controls visibility of one visual layer:
Show Market Structure: Pivot markers and support/resistance lines
Show Pressure Zones: Background color shading
Show Divergence Lines: Dotted lines connecting pivots
Show Institutional Footprint Markers: Absorption boxes, hunt labels, exhaustion labels
Show Consolidated Analysis Label: Main pattern detection label
Use Compact Label Format
Default: OFF
What It Does: Switches consolidated label between single-line compact format and multi-line detailed format.
When To Change: Turn ON if you find full labels too large or distracting.
Impact: Visual clarity vs. information density tradeoff.
DASHBOARD SECTION
Dashboard Mode
Default: "Optimized"
Options: Off, Compact, Optimized, Full
What It Does: Controls how much information the dashboard displays.
Off: No dashboard
Compact: 8 rows (essential metrics only)
Optimized: 12 rows (recommended balance)
Full: 13 rows (every available metric)
Dashboard Position
Default: "Top Right"
Options: Top Right, Top Left, Bottom Right, Bottom Left
What It Does: Screen corner where dashboard appears.
HOW TO USE VMDM - PRACTICAL WORKFLOW
STEP 1 - INITIAL SETUP
Add VMDM to your chart
Select your detection mode (Confirmed recommended for learning)
Set your minimum confluence score (start with 60-65)
Adjust pivot parameters if needed (default 3/3 is good for most timeframes)
Enable the visual layers you want to see
STEP 2 - CHART ANALYSIS
Let the indicator load and analyze historical data
Review the patterns that appear historically
Examine the confluence scores - notice which patterns had higher scores
Observe which patterns occurred during supportive pressure zones
Notice the divergence line connections - understand what price vs RSI did
STEP 3 - PATTERN RECOGNITION LEARNING
When a consolidated analysis label appears:
Read the divergence type (regular or hidden, bullish or bearish)
Check the quality tier (textbook, high quality, or valid)
Review the confluence breakdown - which factors contributed
Look at the chart context - where is price relative to structure, trend, etc.
Observe the behavioral footprint markers nearby - do they support the pattern
STEP 4 - REAL-TIME MONITORING
Watch the dashboard for real-time regime and pressure state
Monitor the current confluence score in the dashboard
When it approaches your threshold, be alert for potential pattern formation
When a new pattern appears (after confirmation delay), evaluate it using the workflow above
Use your trading strategy rules to decide if the setup aligns with your criteria
STEP 5 - POST-PATTERN OBSERVATION
After a pattern appears:
Mark the level on your chart
Observe what price does after the pattern completes
Did price respect the reversal/continuation signal
What was the confluence score of patterns that worked vs. those that failed
Learn which quality tiers and confluence levels produce better results on your specific symbol and timeframe
RECOMMENDED TIMEFRAMES AND ASSET CLASSES
VMDM is timeframe-agnostic and works on any asset with volume data. However, optimal performance varies:
BEST TIMEFRAMES
15-Minute to 1-Hour: Ideal balance of signal frequency and reliability. Pivot confirmation delay is acceptable. Sufficient volume data for pressure analysis.
4-Hour to Daily: Excellent for swing trading. Very high-quality signals. Lower frequency but higher significance. Recommended for learning because patterns are clearer.
1-Minute to 5-Minute: Works but requires adjustment. Increase pivot bars to 5-7 for filtering. Decrease max object history to 30 for performance. Expect more noise.
Weekly/Monthly: Works but very infrequent signals. Increase confluence threshold to 70+ to ensure only major patterns appear.
BEST ASSET CLASSES
Forex Majors: Excellent volume data and clear trends. Pressure analysis works well.
Crypto (Major Pairs): Good volume data. High volatility makes divergences more pronounced. Works very well.
Stock Indices (SPY, QQQ, etc.): Excellent. Clean price action and reliable volume.
Individual Stocks: Works well on high-volume stocks. Low-volume stocks may produce unreliable pressure readings.
Commodities (Gold, Oil, etc.): Works well. Clear trends and reactions.
WHAT THIS INDICATOR CANNOT DO - LIMITATIONS
LIMITATION 1 - It Does Not Predict The Future
VMDM identifies when technical conditions align historically associated with potential reversals or continuations. It does not predict what will happen next. A textbook 95-confluence pattern can still fail if fundamental events, news, or larger timeframe structure override the setup.
LIMITATION 2 - Confirmation Delay Means You Miss Early Entry
In Confirmed and Relaxed modes, the non-repainting design means you receive signals AFTER the pivot is confirmed. Price may have already moved significantly by the time you receive the signal. This is the tradeoff for non-repainting reliability. You can use Real-time mode for faster signals but sacrifice divergence confirmation.
LIMITATION 3 - It Does Not Tell You Position Sizing or Risk Management
VMDM provides technical pattern analysis. It does not calculate stop loss levels, take profit targets, or position sizing. You must apply your own risk management rules. Never risk more than you can afford to lose based on a technical signal.
LIMITATION 4 - Volume Pressure Analysis Requires Reliable Volume Data
On assets with thin volume or unreliable volume reporting, pressure analysis may be inaccurate. Stick to major liquid assets with consistent volume data.
LIMITATION 5 - It Cannot Detect Fundamental Events
VMDM is purely technical. It cannot predict earnings reports, central bank decisions, geopolitical events, or other fundamental catalysts that can override technical patterns.
LIMITATION 6 - Divergence Requires Two Pivots
The indicator cannot detect divergence until at least two pivots of the same type have formed. In strong trends without pullbacks, you may go long periods without signals.
LIMITATION 7 - Institutional Pattern Names Are Interpretive
The behavioral footprint patterns are named using common trading education terminology, but they are detected through technical analysis, not actual institutional data access. The patterns are interpretations based on price and volume behavior.
CONCEPT FOUNDATION - WHY THIS APPROACH WORKS
MARKET PRINCIPLE 1 - Momentum Divergence Precedes Price Reversal
Price is the final output of market forces, but momentum (the rate of change in those forces) shifts first. When price makes a new low but the momentum behind that move is weaker (higher RSI low), it signals that sellers are losing strength even though they temporarily pushed price lower. This precedes reversal. This is a fundamental principle in technical analysis taught by Charles Dow, widely observed in market behavior.
MARKET PRINCIPLE 2 - Volume Reveals Conviction
Price can move on low volume (low conviction) or high volume (high conviction). When price makes a new low on declining volume while RSI shows improving momentum, it suggests the new low is not confirmed by participant conviction. Adding volume pressure analysis to momentum divergence adds a confirmation layer that filters false divergences.
MARKET PRINCIPLE 3 - Anomalies Mark Structural Extremes
When volume spikes significantly but range contracts (absorption), or when price spikes beyond structure then reverses (stop hunt), or when aggressive moves are met with large-wick rejection (exhaustion), these anomalies often mark short-term extremes. Combining these structural observations with momentum analysis creates context.
MARKET PRINCIPLE 4 - Confluence Improves Probability
No single technical factor is reliable in isolation. RSI divergence alone fails frequently. Volume analysis alone cannot time entries. Combining multiple independent factors into a weighted system increases the probability that observed patterns have structural significance rather than random noise.
THE EDUCATIONAL VALUE
By visualizing all four layers simultaneously and breaking down the confluence scoring transparently, VMDM teaches you to think in terms of multi-dimensional analysis rather than single-indicator reliance. Over time, you will learn to recognize these patterns manually and understand which combinations produce better results on your traded assets.
INSTITUTIONAL TERMINOLOGY - IMPORTANT CLARIFICATION
This indicator uses the following terms that are common in trading education:
Institutional Footprint
Absorption (Accumulation / Distribution)
Stop Hunt
Exhaustion
CRITICAL DISCLAIMER:
These terms are EDUCATIONAL LABELS for specific price action and volume behavior patterns detected through technical analysis of publicly available chart data (open, high, low, close, volume). This indicator does NOT have access to:
Actual institutional order flow or order book data
Market maker positions or intentions
Broker stop-loss databases
Non-public trading data
Proprietary institutional information
The patterns labeled as "institutional footprint" are interpretations based on observable price and volume behavior that educational trading literature often associates with potential large-participant activity. The detection is algorithmic pattern recognition, not privileged data access.
When this indicator identifies "absorption," it means it detected high volume within a small range - a condition that MAY indicate large orders being filled but is not confirmation of actual institutional participation.
When it identifies a "stop hunt," it means price briefly penetrated a structural level then reversed - a pattern that MAY have triggered stop losses but is not confirmation that stops were specifically targeted.
When it identifies "exhaustion," it means high volume with large rejection wicks - a pattern that MAY indicate aggressive participation meeting strong opposition but is not confirmation of institutional involvement.
These are technical analysis interpretations, not factual statements about market participant identity or intent.
DISCLAIMER AND RISK WARNING
EDUCATIONAL PURPOSE ONLY
This indicator is designed as an educational tool to help traders learn to recognize technical patterns, understand multi-factor analysis, and practice systematic market observation. It is NOT a trading system, signal service, or financial advice.
NO PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
Past pattern behavior does not guarantee future results. A pattern that historically preceded price movement in one direction may fail in the future due to changing market conditions, fundamental events, or random variance. Confluence scores reflect historical technical alignment, not future certainty.
TRADING INVOLVES SUBSTANTIAL RISK
Trading financial instruments involves substantial risk of loss. You can lose more than your initial investment. Never trade with money you cannot afford to lose. Always use proper risk management including stop losses, position sizing, and portfolio diversification.
NO PREDICTIVE CLAIMS
This indicator does NOT predict future price movement. It identifies when technical conditions align in patterns that historically have been associated with potential reversals or continuations. Market behavior is probabilistic, not deterministic.
BACKTESTING LIMITATIONS
If you backtest trading strategies using this indicator, ensure you account for:
Realistic commission costs
Realistic slippage (difference between signal price and actual fill price)
Sufficient sample size (minimum 100 trades for statistical relevance)
Reasonable position sizing (risking no more than 1-2 percent of account per trade)
The confirmation delay inherent in the indicator (you cannot enter at the exact pivot in Confirmed mode)
Backtests that do not account for these factors will produce unrealistic results.
AUTHOR LIABILITY
The author (BullByte) is not responsible for any trading losses incurred using this indicator. By using this indicator, you acknowledge that all trading decisions are your sole responsibility and that you understand the risks involved.
NOT FINANCIAL ADVICE
Nothing in this indicator, its code, its description, or its visual outputs constitutes financial, investment, or trading advice. Consult a licensed financial advisor before making investment decisions.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q: Why do signals appear in the past, not at the current bar
A: In Confirmed and Relaxed modes, signals appear at confirmed pivots, which requires waiting for right-side confirmation bars (default 3). This creates a delay but prevents repainting. Use Real-time mode if you want current-bar signals without pivot confirmation.
Q: Can I use this for automated trading
A: You can create alert-based automation, but understand that Confirmed mode signals appear AFTER the pivot with delay, so your entry will not be at the pivot price. Real-time mode signals can change as the current bar develops. Automation requires careful consideration of these factors.
Q: How do I know which confluence score to use
A: Start with 60. Observe which patterns work on your symbol/timeframe. If too many false signals, increase to 70-75. If too few signals, decrease to 55. Quality vs. quantity tradeoff.
Q: Do regular divergences mean I should enter a reversal trade immediately
A: No. Regular divergences indicate momentum exhaustion, which is a WARNING sign that trend may reverse, not a confirmation that it will. Use confluence score, market context, support/resistance, and your strategy rules to make entry decisions. Many divergences fail.
Q: What's the difference between regular and hidden divergence
A: Regular divergence = price and momentum move in opposite directions at extremes = potential reversal signal. Hidden divergence = price and momentum move in opposite directions during pullbacks = potential continuation signal. Hidden divergence suggests the pullback is just a correction within the larger trend.
Q: Why does the pressure zone color sometimes conflict with the divergence direction
A: Pressure is real-time current bar analysis. Divergence is confirmed pivot analysis from the past. They measure different things at different times. A bullish divergence confirmed 3 bars ago might appear during current selling pressure. This is normal.
Q: Can I use this on stocks without volume data
A: No. Volume is required for pressure analysis and behavioral pattern detection. Use only on assets with reliable volume reporting.
Q: How often should I expect signals
A: Depends on timeframe and settings. Daily charts might produce 5-10 signals per month. 1-hour charts might produce 20-30. 15-minute charts might produce 50-100. Adjust confluence threshold to control frequency.
Q: Can I modify the code
A: Yes, this is open source. You can modify for personal use. If you publish a modified version, please credit the original and ensure your publication meets TradingView guidelines.
Q: What if I disagree with a pattern's confluence score
A: The scoring weights are based on general observations and may not suit your specific strategy or asset. You can modify the code to adjust weights if you have data-driven reasons to do so.
Final Notes
VMDM - Volume, Momentum and Divergence Master is an educational multi-layer market analysis system designed to teach systematic pattern recognition through transparent, confluence-weighted signal detection. By combining RSI momentum divergence, volume pressure quantification, behavioral footprint pattern recognition, and quality scoring into a unified framework, it provides a comprehensive learning environment for understanding market structure.
Use this tool to develop your analytical skills, understand how multiple technical factors interact, and learn to distinguish high-quality setups from noise. Remember that technical analysis is probabilistic, not predictive. No indicator replaces proper education, risk management, and trading discipline.
Trade responsibly. Learn continuously. Risk only what you can afford to lose.
-BullByte
Bifurcation Zone - CAEBifurcation Zone — Cognitive Adversarial Engine (BZ-CAE)
Bifurcation Zone — CAE (BZ-CAE) is a next-generation divergence detection system enhanced by a Cognitive Adversarial Engine that evaluates both sides of every potential trade before presenting signals. Unlike traditional divergence indicators that show every price-oscillator disagreement regardless of context, BZ-CAE applies comprehensive market-state intelligence to identify only the divergences that occur in favorable conditions with genuine probability edges.
The system identifies structural bifurcation points — critical junctures where price and momentum disagree, signaling potential reversals or continuations — then validates these opportunities through five interconnected intelligence layers: Trend Conviction Scoring , Directional Momentum Alignment , Multi-Factor Exhaustion Modeling , Adversarial Validation , and Confidence Scoring . The result is a selective, context-aware signal system that filters noise and highlights high-probability setups.
This is not a "buy the arrow" indicator. It's a decision support framework that teaches you how to read market state, evaluate divergence quality, and make informed trading decisions based on quantified intelligence rather than hope.
What Sets BZ-CAE Apart: Technical Architecture
The Problem With Traditional Divergence Indicators
Most divergence indicators operate on a simple rule: if price makes a higher high and RSI makes a lower high, show a bearish signal. If price makes a lower low and RSI makes a higher low, show a bullish signal. This creates several critical problems:
Context Blindness : They show counter-trend signals in powerful trends that rarely reverse, leading to repeated losses as you fade momentum.
Signal Spam : Every minor price-oscillator disagreement generates an alert, overwhelming you with low-quality setups and creating analysis paralysis.
No Quality Ranking : All signals are treated identically. A marginal divergence in choppy conditions receives the same visual treatment as a high-conviction setup at a major exhaustion point.
Single-Sided Evaluation : They ask "Is this a good long?" without checking if the short case is overwhelmingly stronger, leading you into obvious bad trades.
Static Configuration : You manually choose RSI 14 or Stochastic 14 and hope it works, with no systematic way to validate if that's optimal for your instrument.
BZ-CAE's Solution: Cognitive Adversarial Intelligence
BZ-CAE solves these problems through an integrated five-layer intelligence architecture:
1. Trend Conviction Score (TCS) — 0 to 1 Scale
Most indicators check if ADX is above 25 to determine "trending" conditions. This binary approach misses nuance. TCS is a weighted composite metric:
Formula : 0.35 × normalize(ADX, 10, 35) + 0.35 × structural_strength + 0.30 × htf_alignment
Structural Strength : 10-bar SMA of consecutive directional bars. Captures persistence — are bulls or bears consistently winning?
HTF Alignment : Multi-timeframe EMA stacking (20/50/100/200). When all EMAs align in the same direction, you're in institutional trend territory.
Purpose : Quantifies how "locked in" the trend is. When TCS exceeds your threshold (default 0.80), the system knows to avoid counter-trend trades unless other factors override.
Interpretation :
TCS > 0.85: Very strong trend — counter-trading is extremely high risk
TCS 0.70-0.85: Strong trend — favor continuation, require exhaustion for reversals
TCS 0.50-0.70: Moderate trend — context matters, both directions viable
TCS < 0.50: Weak/choppy — reversals more viable, range-bound conditions
2. Directional Momentum Alignment (DMA) — ATR-Normalized
Formula : (EMA21 - EMA55) / ATR14
This isn't just "price above EMA" — it's a regime-aware momentum gauge. The same $100 price movement reads completely differently in high-volatility crypto versus low-volatility forex. By normalizing with ATR, DMA adapts its interpretation to current market conditions.
Purpose : Quantifies the directional "force" behind current price action. Positive = bullish push, negative = bearish push. Magnitude = strength.
Interpretation :
DMA > 0.7: Strong bullish momentum — bearish divergences risky
DMA 0.3 to 0.7: Moderate bullish bias
DMA -0.3 to 0.3: Balanced/choppy conditions
DMA -0.7 to -0.3: Moderate bearish bias
DMA < -0.7: Strong bearish momentum — bullish divergences risky
3. Multi-Factor Exhaustion Modeling — 0 to 1 Probability
Single-metric exhaustion detection (like "RSI > 80") misses complex market states. BZ-CAE aggregates five independent exhaustion signals:
Volume Spikes : Current volume versus 50-bar average
2.5x average: 0.25 weight
2.0x average: 0.15 weight
1.5x average: 0.10 weight
Divergence Present : The fact that a divergence exists contributes 0.30 weight — structural momentum disagreement is itself an exhaustion signal.
RSI Extremes : Captures oscillator climax zones
RSI > 80 or < 20: 0.25 weight
RSI > 75 or < 25: 0.15 weight
Pin Bar Detection : Identifies rejection candles (2:1 wick-to-body ratio, indicating failed breakout attempts): 0.15 weight
Extended Runs : Consecutive bars above/below EMA20 without pullback
30+ bars: 0.15 weight (market hasn't paused to consolidate)
Total exhaustion score is the sum of all applicable weights, capped at 1.0.
Purpose : Detects when strong trends become vulnerable to reversal. High exhaustion can override trend filters, allowing counter-trend trades at genuine turning points that basic indicators would miss.
Interpretation :
Exhaustion > 0.75: High probability of climax — yellow background shading alerts you visually
Exhaustion 0.50-0.75: Moderate overextension — watch for confirmation
Exhaustion < 0.50: Fresh move — trend can continue, counter-trend trades higher risk
4. Adversarial Validation — Game Theory Applied to Trading
This is BZ-CAE's signature innovation. Before approving any signal, the engine quantifies BOTH sides of the trade simultaneously:
For Bullish Divergences , it calculates:
Bull Case Score (0-1+) :
Distance below EMA20 (pullback quality): up to 0.25
Bullish EMA alignment (close > EMA20 > EMA50): 0.25
Oversold RSI (< 40): 0.25
Volume confirmation (> 1.2x average): 0.25
Bear Case Score (0-1+) :
Price below EMA50 (structural weakness): 0.30
Very oversold RSI (< 30, indicating knife-catching): 0.20
Differential = Bull Case - Bear Case
If differential < -0.10 (default threshold), the bear case is dominating — signal is BLOCKED or ANNOTATED.
For Bearish Divergences , the logic inverts (Bear Case vs Bull Case).
Purpose : Prevents trades where you're fighting obvious strength in the opposite direction. This is institutional-grade risk management — don't just evaluate your trade, evaluate the counter-trade simultaneously.
Why This Matters : You might see a bullish divergence at a local low, but if price is deeply below major support EMAs with strong bearish momentum, you're catching a falling knife. The adversarial check catches this and blocks the signal.
5. Confidence Scoring — 0 to 1 Quality Assessment
Every signal that passes initial filters receives a comprehensive quality score:
Formula :
0.30 × normalize(TCS) // Trend context
+ 0.25 × normalize(|DMA|) // Momentum magnitude
+ 0.20 × pullback_quality // Entry distance from EMA20
+ 0.15 × state_quality // ADX + alignment + structure
+ 0.10 × divergence_strength // Slope separation magnitude
+ adversarial_bonus (0-0.30) // Your side's advantage
Purpose : Ranks setup quality for filtering and position sizing decisions. You can set a minimum confidence threshold (default 0.35) to ensure only quality setups reach your chart.
Interpretation :
Confidence > 0.70: Premium setup — consider increased position size
Confidence 0.50-0.70: Good quality — standard size
Confidence 0.35-0.50: Acceptable — reduced size or skip if conservative
Confidence < 0.35: Marginal — blocked in Filtering mode, annotated in Advisory mode
CAE Operating Modes: Learning vs Enforcement
Off : Disables all CAE logic. Raw divergence pipeline only. Use for baseline comparison.
Advisory : Shows ALL signals regardless of CAE evaluation, but annotates signals that WOULD be blocked with specific warnings (e.g., "Bull: strong downtrend (TCS=0.87)" or "Adversarial bearish"). This is your learning mode — see CAE's decision logic in action without missing educational opportunities.
Filtering : Actively blocks low-quality signals. Only setups that pass all enabled gates (Trend Filter, Adversarial Validation, Confidence Gating) reach your chart. This is your live trading mode — trust the system to enforce discipline.
CAE Filter Gates: Three-Layer Protection
When CAE is enabled, signals must pass through three independent gates (each can be toggled on/off):
Gate 1: Strong Trend Filter
If TCS ≥ tcs_threshold (default 0.80)
And signal is counter-trend (bullish in downtrend or bearish in uptrend)
And exhaustion < exhaustion_required (default 0.50)
Then: BLOCK signal
Logic: Don't fade strong trends unless the move is clearly overextended
Gate 2: Adversarial Validation
Calculate both bull case and bear case scores
If opposing case dominates by more than adv_threshold (default 0.10)
Then: BLOCK signal
Logic: Avoid trades where you're fighting obvious strength in the opposite direction
Gate 3: Confidence Gating
Calculate composite confidence score (0-1)
If confidence < min_confidence (default 0.35)
Then: In Filtering mode, BLOCK signal; in Advisory mode, ANNOTATE with warning
Logic: Only take setups with minimum quality threshold
All three gates work together. A signal must pass ALL enabled gates to fire.
Visual Intelligence System
Bifurcation Zones (Supply/Demand Blocks)
When a divergence signal fires, BZ-CAE draws a semi-transparent box extending 15 bars forward from the signal pivot:
Demand Zones (Bullish) : Theme-colored box (cyan in Cyberpunk, blue in Professional, etc.) labeled "Demand" — marks where smart money likely placed buy orders as price diverged at the low.
Supply Zones (Bearish) : Theme-colored box (magenta in Cyberpunk, orange in Professional) labeled "Supply" — marks where smart money likely placed sell orders as price diverged at the high.
Theory : Divergences represent institutional disagreement with the crowd. The crowd pushed price to an extreme (new high or low), but momentum (oscillator) is waning, indicating smart money is taking the opposite side. These zones mark order placement areas that become future support/resistance.
Use Cases :
Exit targets: Take profit when price returns to opposite-side zone
Re-entry levels: If price returns to your entry zone, consider adding
Stop placement: Place stops just beyond your zone (below demand, above supply)
Auto-Cleanup : System keeps the last 20 zones to prevent chart clutter.
Adversarial Bar Coloring — Real-Time Market Debate Heatmap
Each bar is colored based on the Bull Case vs Bear Case differential:
Strong Bull Advantage (diff > 0.3): Full theme bull color (e.g., cyan)
Moderate Bull Advantage (diff > 0.1): 50% transparency bull
Neutral (diff -0.1 to 0.1): Gray/neutral theme
Moderate Bear Advantage (diff < -0.1): 50% transparency bear
Strong Bear Advantage (diff < -0.3): Full theme bear color (e.g., magenta)
This creates a real-time visual heatmap showing which side is "winning" the market debate. When bars flip from cyan to magenta (or vice versa), you're witnessing a shift in adversarial advantage — a leading indicator of potential momentum changes.
Exhaustion Shading
When exhaustion score exceeds 0.75, the chart background displays a semi-transparent yellow highlight. This immediate visual warning alerts you that the current move is at high risk of reversal, even if trend indicators remain strong.
Visual Themes — Six Aesthetic Options
Cyberpunk : Cyan/Magenta/Yellow — High contrast, neon aesthetic, excellent for dark-themed trading environments
Professional : Blue/Orange/Green — Corporate color palette, suitable for presentations and professional documentation
Ocean : Teal/Red/Cyan — Aquatic palette, calming for extended monitoring sessions
Fire : Orange/Red/Coral — Warm aggressive colors, high energy
Matrix : Green/Red/Lime — Code aesthetic, homage to classic hacker visuals
Monochrome : White/Gray — Minimal distraction, maximum focus on price action
All visual elements (signal markers, zones, bar colors, dashboard) adapt to your selected theme.
Divergence Engine — Core Detection System
What Are Divergences?
Divergences occur when price action and momentum indicators disagree, creating structural tension that often resolves in a change of direction:
Regular Divergence (Reversal Signal) :
Bearish Regular : Price makes higher high, oscillator makes lower high → Potential trend reversal down
Bullish Regular : Price makes lower low, oscillator makes higher low → Potential trend reversal up
Hidden Divergence (Continuation Signal) :
Bearish Hidden : Price makes lower high, oscillator makes higher high → Downtrend continuation
Bullish Hidden : Price makes higher low, oscillator makes lower low → Uptrend continuation
Both types can be enabled/disabled independently in settings.
Pivot Detection Methods
BZ-CAE uses symmetric pivot detection with separate lookback and lookforward periods (default 5/5):
Pivot High : Bar where high > all highs within lookback range AND high > all highs within lookforward range
Pivot Low : Bar where low < all lows within lookback range AND low < all lows within lookforward range
This ensures structural validity — the pivot must be a clear local extreme, not just a minor wiggle.
Divergence Validation Requirements
For a divergence to be confirmed, it must satisfy:
Slope Disagreement : Price slope and oscillator slope must move in opposite directions (for regular divs) or same direction with inverted highs/lows (for hidden divs)
Minimum Slope Change : |osc_slope| > min_slope_change / 100 (default 1.0) — filters weak, marginal divergences
Maximum Lookback Range : Pivots must be within max_lookback bars (default 60) — prevents ancient, irrelevant divergences
ATR-Normalized Strength : Divergence strength = min(|price_slope| × |osc_slope| × 10, 1.0) — quantifies the magnitude of disagreement in volatility context
Regular divergences receive 1.0× weight; hidden divergences receive 0.8× weight (slightly less reliable historically).
Oscillator Options — Five Professional Indicators
RSI (Relative Strength Index) : Classic overbought/oversold momentum indicator. Best for: General purpose divergence detection across all instruments.
Stochastic : Range-bound %K momentum comparing close to high-low range. Best for: Mean reversion strategies and range-bound markets.
CCI (Commodity Channel Index) : Measures deviation from statistical mean, auto-normalized to 0-100 scale. Best for: Cyclical instruments and commodities.
MFI (Money Flow Index) : Volume-weighted RSI incorporating money flow. Best for: Volume-driven markets like stocks and crypto.
Williams %R : Inverse stochastic looking back over period, auto-adjusted to 0-100. Best for: Reversal detection at extremes.
Each oscillator has adjustable length (2-200, default 14) and smoothing (1-20, default 1). You also set overbought (50-100, default 70) and oversold (0-50, default 30) thresholds.
Signal Timing Modes — Understanding Repainting
BZ-CAE offers two timing policies with complete transparency about repainting behavior:
Realtime (1-bar, peak-anchored)
How It Works :
Detects peaks 1 bar ago using pattern: high > high AND high > high
Signal prints on the NEXT bar after peak detection (bar_index)
Visual marker anchors to the actual PEAK bar (bar_index - 1, offset -1)
Signal locks in when bar CONFIRMS (closes)
Repainting Behavior :
On the FORMING bar (before close), the peak condition may change as new prices arrive
Once bar CLOSES (barstate.isconfirmed), signal is locked permanently
This is preview/early warning behavior by design
Best For :
Active monitoring and immediate alerts
Learning the system (seeing signals develop in real-time)
Responsive entry if you're watching the chart live
Confirmed (lookforward)
How It Works :
Uses Pine Script's built-in ta.pivothigh() and ta.pivotlow() functions
Requires full pivot validation period (lookback + lookforward bars)
Signal prints pivot_lookforward bars after the actual peak (default 5-bar delay)
Visual marker anchors to the actual peak bar (offset -pivot_lookforward)
No Repainting Behavior
Best For :
Backtesting and historical analysis
Conservative entries requiring full confirmation
Automated trading systems
Swing trading with larger timeframes
Tradeoff :
Delayed entry by pivot_lookforward bars (typically 5 bars)
On a 5-minute chart, this is a 25-minute delay
On a 4-hour chart, this is a 20-hour delay
Recommendation : Use Confirmed for backtesting to verify system performance honestly. Use Realtime for live monitoring only if you're actively watching the chart and understand pre-confirmation repainting behavior.
Signal Spacing System — Anti-Spam Architecture
Even after CAE filtering, raw divergences can cluster. The spacing system enforces separation:
Three Independent Filters
1. Min Bars Between ANY Signals (default 12):
Prevents rapid-fire clustering across both directions
If last signal (bull or bear) was within N bars, block new signal
Ensures breathing room between all setups
2. Min Bars Between SAME-SIDE Signals (default 24, optional enforcement):
Prevents bull-bull or bear-bear spam
Separate tracking for bullish and bearish signal timelines
Toggle enforcement on/off
3. Min ATR Distance From Last Signal (default 0, optional):
Requires price to move N × ATR from last signal location
Ensures meaningful price movement between setups
0 = disabled, 0.5-2.0 = typical range for enabled
All three filters work independently. A signal must pass ALL enabled filters to proceed.
Practical Guidance :
Scalping (1-5m) : Any 6-10, Same-side 12-20, ATR 0-0.5
Day Trading (15m-1H) : Any 12, Same-side 24, ATR 0-1.0
Swing Trading (4H-D) : Any 20-30, Same-side 40-60, ATR 1.0-2.0
Dashboard — Real-Time Control Center
The dashboard (toggleable, four corner positions, three sizes) provides comprehensive system intelligence:
Oscillator Section
Current oscillator type and value
State: OVERBOUGHT / OVERSOLD / NEUTRAL (color-coded)
Length parameter
Cognitive Engine Section
TCS (Trend Conviction Score) :
Current value with emoji state indicator
🔥 = Strong trend (>0.75)
📊 = Moderate trend (0.50-0.75)
〰️ = Weak/choppy (<0.50)
Color: Red if above threshold (trend filter active), yellow if moderate, green if weak
DMA (Directional Momentum Alignment) :
Current value with emoji direction indicator
🐂 = Bullish momentum (>0.5)
⚖️ = Balanced (-0.5 to 0.5)
🐻 = Bearish momentum (<-0.5)
Color: Green if bullish, red if bearish
Exhaustion :
Current value with emoji warning indicator
⚠️ = High exhaustion (>0.75)
🟡 = Moderate (0.50-0.75)
✓ = Low (<0.50)
Color: Red if high, yellow if moderate, green if low
Pullback :
Quality of current distance from EMA20
Values >0.6 are ideal entry zones (not too close, not too far)
Bull Case / Bear Case (if Adversarial enabled):
Current scores for both sides of the market debate
Differential with emoji indicator:
📈 = Bull advantage (>0.2)
➡️ = Balanced (-0.2 to 0.2)
📉 = Bear advantage (<-0.2)
Last Signal Metrics Section (New Feature)
When a signal fires, this section captures and displays:
Signal type (BULL or BEAR)
Bars elapsed since signal
Confidence % at time of signal
TCS value at signal time
DMA value at signal time
Purpose : Provides a historical reference for learning. You can see what the market state looked like when the last signal fired, helping you correlate outcomes with conditions.
Statistics Section
Total Signals : Lifetime count across session
Blocked Signals : Count and percentage (filter effectiveness metric)
Bull Signals : Total bullish divergences
Bear Signals : Total bearish divergences
Purpose : System health monitoring. If blocked % is very high (>60%), filters may be too strict. If very low (<10%), filters may be too loose.
Advisory Annotations
When CAE Mode = Advisory, this section displays warnings for signals that would be blocked in Filtering mode:
Examples:
"Bull spacing: wait 8 bars"
"Bear: strong uptrend (TCS=0.87)"
"Adversarial bearish"
"Low confidence 32%"
Multiple warnings can stack, separated by " | ". This teaches you CAE's decision logic transparently.
How to Use BZ-CAE — Complete Workflow
Phase 1: Initial Setup (First Session)
Apply BZ-CAE to your chart
Select your preferred Visual Theme (Cyberpunk recommended for visibility)
Set Signal Timing to "Confirmed (lookforward)" for learning
Choose your Oscillator Type (RSI recommended for general use, length 14)
Set Overbought/Oversold to 70/30 (standard)
Enable both Regular Divergence and Hidden Divergence
Set Pivot Lookback/Lookforward to 5/5 (balanced structure)
Enable CAE Intelligence
Set CAE Mode to "Advisory" (learning mode)
Enable all three CAE filters: Strong Trend Filter , Adversarial Validation , Confidence Gating
Enable Show Dashboard , position Top Right, size Normal
Enable Draw Bifurcation Zones and Adversarial Bar Coloring
Phase 2: Learning Period (Weeks 1-2)
Goal : Understand how CAE evaluates market state and filters signals.
Activities :
Watch the dashboard during signals :
Note TCS values when counter-trend signals fail — this teaches you the trend strength threshold for your instrument
Observe exhaustion patterns at actual turning points — learn when overextension truly matters
Study adversarial differential at signal times — see when opposing cases dominate
Review blocked signals (orange X-crosses):
In Advisory mode, you see everything — signals that would pass AND signals that would be blocked
Check the advisory annotations to understand why CAE would block
Track outcomes: Were the blocks correct? Did those signals fail?
Use Last Signal Metrics :
After each signal, check the dashboard capture of confidence, TCS, and DMA
Journal these values alongside trade outcomes
Identify patterns: Do confidence >0.70 signals work better? Does your instrument respect TCS >0.85?
Understand your instrument's "personality" :
Trending instruments (indices, major forex) may need TCS threshold 0.85-0.90
Choppy instruments (low-cap stocks, exotic pairs) may work best with TCS 0.70-0.75
High-volatility instruments (crypto) may need wider spacing
Low-volatility instruments may need tighter spacing
Phase 3: Calibration (Weeks 3-4)
Goal : Optimize settings for your specific instrument, timeframe, and style.
Calibration Checklist :
Min Confidence Threshold :
Review confidence distribution in your signal journal
Identify the confidence level below which signals consistently fail
Set min_confidence slightly above that level
Day trading : 0.35-0.45
Swing trading : 0.40-0.55
Scalping : 0.30-0.40
TCS Threshold :
Find the TCS level where counter-trend signals consistently get stopped out
Set tcs_threshold at or slightly below that level
Trending instruments : 0.85-0.90
Mixed instruments : 0.80-0.85
Choppy instruments : 0.75-0.80
Exhaustion Override Level :
Identify exhaustion readings that marked genuine reversals
Set exhaustion_required just below the average
Typical range : 0.45-0.55
Adversarial Threshold :
Default 0.10 works for most instruments
If you find CAE is too conservative (blocking good trades), raise to 0.15-0.20
If signals are still getting caught in opposing momentum, lower to 0.07-0.09
Spacing Parameters :
Count bars between quality signals in your journal
Set min bars ANY to ~60% of that average
Set min bars SAME-SIDE to ~120% of that average
Scalping : Any 6-10, Same 12-20
Day trading : Any 12, Same 24
Swing : Any 20-30, Same 40-60
Oscillator Selection :
Try different oscillators for 1-2 weeks each
Track win rate and average winner/loser by oscillator type
RSI : Best for general use, clear OB/OS
Stochastic : Best for range-bound, mean reversion
MFI : Best for volume-driven markets
CCI : Best for cyclical instruments
Williams %R : Best for reversal detection
Phase 4: Live Deployment
Goal : Disciplined execution with proven, calibrated system.
Settings Changes :
Switch CAE Mode from Advisory to Filtering
System now actively blocks low-quality signals
Only setups passing all gates reach your chart
Keep Signal Timing on Confirmed for conservative entries
OR switch to Realtime if you're actively monitoring and want faster entries (accept pre-confirmation repaint risk)
Use your calibrated thresholds from Phase 3
Enable high-confidence alerts: "⭐ High Confidence Bullish/Bearish" (>0.70)
Trading Discipline Rules :
Respect Blocked Signals :
If CAE blocks a trade you wanted to take, TRUST THE SYSTEM
Don't manually override — if you consistently disagree, return to Phase 2/3 calibration
The block exists because market state failed intelligence checks
Confidence-Based Position Sizing :
Confidence >0.70: Standard or increased size (e.g., 1.5-2.0% risk)
Confidence 0.50-0.70: Standard size (e.g., 1.0% risk)
Confidence 0.35-0.50: Reduced size (e.g., 0.5% risk) or skip if conservative
TCS-Based Management :
High TCS + counter-trend signal: Use tight stops, quick exits (you're fading momentum)
Low TCS + reversal signal: Use wider stops, trail aggressively (genuine reversal potential)
Exhaustion Awareness :
Exhaustion >0.75 (yellow shading): Market is overextended, reversal risk is elevated — consider early exit or tighter trailing stops even on winning trades
Exhaustion <0.30: Continuation bias — hold for larger move, wide trailing stops
Adversarial Context :
Strong differential against you (e.g., bullish signal with bear diff <-0.2): Use very tight stops, consider skipping
Strong differential with you (e.g., bullish signal with bull diff >0.2): Trail aggressively, this is your tailwind
Practical Settings by Timeframe & Style
Scalping (1-5 Minute Charts)
Objective : High frequency, tight stops, quick reversals in fast-moving markets.
Oscillator :
Type: RSI or Stochastic (fast response to quick moves)
Length: 9-11 (more responsive than standard 14)
Smoothing: 1 (no lag)
OB/OS: 65/35 (looser thresholds ensure frequent crossings in fast conditions)
Divergence :
Pivot Lookback/Lookforward: 3/3 (tight structure, catch small swings)
Max Lookback: 40-50 bars (recent structure only)
Min Slope Change: 0.8-1.0 (don't be overly strict)
CAE :
Mode: Advisory first (learn), then Filtering
Min Confidence: 0.30-0.35 (lower bar for speed, accept more signals)
TCS Threshold: 0.70-0.75 (allow more counter-trend opportunities)
Exhaustion Required: 0.45-0.50 (moderate override)
Strong Trend Filter: ON (still respect major intraday trends)
Adversarial: ON (critical for scalping protection — catches bad entries quickly)
Spacing :
Min Bars ANY: 6-10 (fast pace, many setups)
Min Bars SAME-SIDE: 12-20 (prevent clustering)
Min ATR Distance: 0 or 0.5 (loose)
Timing : Realtime (speed over precision, but understand repaint risk)
Visuals :
Signal Size: Tiny (chart clarity in busy conditions)
Show Zones: Optional (can clutter on low timeframes)
Bar Coloring: ON (helps read momentum shifts quickly)
Dashboard: Small size (corner reference, not main focus)
Key Consideration : Scalping generates noise. Even with CAE, expect lower win rate (45-55%) but aim for favorable R:R (2:1 or better). Size conservatively.
Day Trading (15-Minute to 1-Hour Charts)
Objective : Balance quality and frequency. Standard divergence trading approach.
Oscillator :
Type: RSI or MFI (proven reliability, volume confirmation with MFI)
Length: 14 (industry standard, well-studied)
Smoothing: 1-2
OB/OS: 70/30 (classic levels)
Divergence :
Pivot Lookback/Lookforward: 5/5 (balanced structure)
Max Lookback: 60 bars
Min Slope Change: 1.0 (standard strictness)
CAE :
Mode: Filtering (enforce discipline from the start after brief Advisory learning)
Min Confidence: 0.35-0.45 (quality filter without being too restrictive)
TCS Threshold: 0.80-0.85 (respect strong trends)
Exhaustion Required: 0.50 (balanced override threshold)
Strong Trend Filter: ON
Adversarial: ON
Confidence Gating: ON (all three filters active)
Spacing :
Min Bars ANY: 12 (breathing room between all setups)
Min Bars SAME-SIDE: 24 (prevent bull/bear clusters)
Min ATR Distance: 0-1.0 (optional refinement, typically 0.5-1.0)
Timing : Confirmed (1-bar delay for reliability, no repainting)
Visuals :
Signal Size: Tiny or Small
Show Zones: ON (useful reference for exits/re-entries)
Bar Coloring: ON (context awareness)
Dashboard: Normal size (full visibility)
Key Consideration : This is the "sweet spot" timeframe for BZ-CAE. Market structure is clear, CAE has sufficient data, and signal frequency is manageable. Expect 55-65% win rate with proper execution.
Swing Trading (4-Hour to Daily Charts)
Objective : Quality over quantity. High conviction only. Larger stops and targets.
Oscillator :
Type: RSI or CCI (robust on higher timeframes, smooth longer waves)
Length: 14-21 (capture larger momentum swings)
Smoothing: 1-3
OB/OS: 70/30 or 75/25 (strict extremes)
Divergence :
Pivot Lookback/Lookforward: 5/5 or 7/7 (structural purity, major swings only)
Max Lookback: 80-100 bars (broader historical context)
Min Slope Change: 1.2-1.5 (require strong, undeniable divergence)
CAE :
Mode: Filtering (strict enforcement, premium setups only)
Min Confidence: 0.40-0.55 (high bar for entry)
TCS Threshold: 0.85-0.95 (very strong trend protection — don't fade established HTF trends)
Exhaustion Required: 0.50-0.60 (higher bar for override — only extreme exhaustion justifies counter-trend)
Strong Trend Filter: ON (critical on HTF)
Adversarial: ON (avoid obvious bad trades)
Confidence Gating: ON (quality gate essential)
Spacing :
Min Bars ANY: 20-30 (substantial separation)
Min Bars SAME-SIDE: 40-60 (significant breathing room)
Min ATR Distance: 1.0-2.0 (require meaningful price movement)
Timing : Confirmed (purity over speed, zero repaint for swing accuracy)
Visuals :
Signal Size: Small or Normal (clear markers on zoomed-out view)
Show Zones: ON (important HTF levels)
Bar Coloring: ON (long-term trend awareness)
Dashboard: Normal or Large (comprehensive analysis)
Key Consideration : Swing signals are rare but powerful. Expect 2-5 signals per month per instrument. Win rate should be 60-70%+ due to stringent filtering. Position size can be larger given confidence.
Dashboard Interpretation Reference
TCS (Trend Conviction Score) States
0.00-0.50: Weak/Choppy
Emoji: 〰️
Color: Green/cyan
Meaning: No established trend. Range-bound or consolidating. Both reversal and continuation signals viable.
Action: Reversals (regular divs) are safer. Use wider profit targets (market has room to move). Consider mean reversion strategies.
0.50-0.75: Moderate Trend
Emoji: 📊
Color: Yellow/neutral
Meaning: Developing trend but not locked in. Context matters significantly.
Action: Check DMA and exhaustion. If DMA confirms trend and exhaustion is low, favor continuation (hidden divs). If exhaustion is high, reversals are viable.
0.75-0.85: Strong Trend
Emoji: 🔥
Color: Orange/warning
Meaning: Well-established trend with persistence. Counter-trend is high risk.
Action: Require exhaustion >0.50 for counter-trend entries. Favor continuation signals. Use tight stops on counter-trend attempts.
0.85-1.00: Very Strong Trend
Emoji: 🔥🔥
Color: Red/danger (if counter-trading)
Meaning: Locked-in institutional trend. Extremely high risk to fade.
Action: Avoid counter-trend unless exhaustion >0.75 (yellow shading). Focus exclusively on continuation opportunities. Momentum is king here.
DMA (Directional Momentum Alignment) Zones
-2.0 to -1.0: Strong Bearish Momentum
Emoji: 🐻🐻
Color: Dark red
Meaning: Powerful downside force. Sellers are in control.
Action: Bullish divergences are counter-momentum (high risk). Bearish divergences are with-momentum (lower risk). Size down on longs.
-0.5 to 0.5: Neutral/Balanced
Emoji: ⚖️
Color: Gray/neutral
Meaning: No strong directional bias. Choppy or consolidating.
Action: Both directions have similar probability. Focus on confidence score and adversarial differential for edge.
1.0 to 2.0: Strong Bullish Momentum
Emoji: 🐂🐂
Color: Bright green/cyan
Meaning: Powerful upside force. Buyers are in control.
Action: Bearish divergences are counter-momentum (high risk). Bullish divergences are with-momentum (lower risk). Size down on shorts.
Exhaustion States
0.00-0.50: Fresh Move
Emoji: ✓
Color: Green
Meaning: Trend is healthy, not overextended. Room to run.
Action: Counter-trend trades are premature. Favor continuation. Hold winners for larger moves. Avoid early exits.
0.50-0.75: Mature Move
Emoji: 🟡
Color: Yellow
Meaning: Move is aging. Watch for signs of climax.
Action: Tighten trailing stops on winning trades. Be ready for reversals. Don't add to positions aggressively.
0.75-0.85: High Exhaustion
Emoji: ⚠️
Color: Orange
Background: Yellow shading appears
Meaning: Move is overextended. Reversal risk elevated significantly.
Action: Counter-trend reversals are higher probability. Consider early exits on with-trend positions. Size up on reversal divergences (if CAE allows).
0.85-1.00: Critical Exhaustion
Emoji: ⚠️⚠️
Color: Red
Background: Yellow shading intensifies
Meaning: Climax conditions. Reversal imminent or underway.
Action: Aggressive reversal trades justified. Exit all with-trend positions. This is where major turns occur.
Confidence Score Tiers
0.00-0.30: Low Quality
Color: Red
Status: Blocked in Filtering mode
Action: Skip entirely. Setup lacks fundamental quality across multiple factors.
0.30-0.50: Moderate Quality
Color: Yellow/orange
Status: Marginal — passes in Filtering only if >min_confidence
Action: Reduced position size (0.5-0.75% risk). Tight stops. Conservative profit targets. Skip if you're selective.
0.50-0.70: High Quality
Color: Green/cyan
Status: Good setup across most quality factors
Action: Standard position size (1.0-1.5% risk). Normal stops and targets. This is your bread-and-butter trade.
0.70-1.00: Premium Quality
Color: Bright green/gold
Status: Exceptional setup — all factors aligned
Visual: Double confidence ring appears
Action: Consider increased position size (1.5-2.0% risk, maximum). Wider stops. Larger targets. High probability of success. These are rare — capitalize when they appear.
Adversarial Differential Interpretation
Bull Differential > 0.3 :
Visual: Strong cyan/green bar colors
Meaning: Bull case strongly dominates. Buyers have clear advantage.
Action: Bullish divergences favored (with-advantage). Bearish divergences face headwind (reduce size or skip). Momentum is bullish.
Bull Differential 0.1 to 0.3 :
Visual: Moderate cyan/green transparency
Meaning: Moderate bull advantage. Buyers have edge but not overwhelming.
Action: Both directions viable. Slight bias toward longs.
Differential -0.1 to 0.1 :
Visual: Gray/neutral bars
Meaning: Balanced debate. No clear advantage either side.
Action: Rely on other factors (confidence, TCS, exhaustion) for direction. Adversarial is neutral.
Bear Differential -0.3 to -0.1 :
Visual: Moderate red/magenta transparency
Meaning: Moderate bear advantage. Sellers have edge but not overwhelming.
Action: Both directions viable. Slight bias toward shorts.
Bear Differential < -0.3 :
Visual: Strong red/magenta bar colors
Meaning: Bear case strongly dominates. Sellers have clear advantage.
Action: Bearish divergences favored (with-advantage). Bullish divergences face headwind (reduce size or skip). Momentum is bearish.
Last Signal Metrics — Post-Trade Analysis
After a signal fires, dashboard captures:
Type : BULL or BEAR
Bars Ago : How long since signal (updates every bar)
Confidence : What was the quality score at signal time
TCS : What was trend conviction at signal time
DMA : What was momentum alignment at signal time
Use Case : Post-trade journaling and learning.
Example: "BULL signal 12 bars ago. Confidence: 68%, TCS: 0.42, DMA: -0.85"
Analysis : This was a bullish reversal (regular div) with good confidence, weak trend (TCS), but strong bearish momentum (DMA). The bet was that momentum would reverse — a counter-momentum play requiring exhaustion confirmation. Check if exhaustion was high at that time to justify the entry.
Track patterns:
Do your best trades have confidence >0.65?
Do low-TCS signals (<0.50) work better for you?
Are you more successful with-momentum (DMA aligned with signal) or counter-momentum?
Troubleshooting Guide
Problem: No Signals Appearing
Symptoms : Chart loads, dashboard shows metrics, but no divergence signals fire.
Diagnosis Checklist :
Check dashboard oscillator value : Is it crossing OB/OS levels (70/30)? If oscillator stays in 40-60 range constantly, it can't reach extremes needed for divergence detection.
Are pivots forming? : Look for local swing highs/lows on your chart. If price is in tight consolidation, pivots may not meet lookback/lookforward requirements.
Is spacing too tight? : Check "Last Signal" metrics — how many bars since last signal? If <12 and your min_bars_ANY is 12, spacing filter is blocking.
Is CAE blocking everything? : Check dashboard Statistics section — what's the blocked signal count? High blocks indicate overly strict filters.
Solutions :
Loosen OB/OS Temporarily :
Try 65/35 to verify divergence detection works
If signals appear, the issue was threshold strictness
Gradually tighten back to 67/33, then 70/30 as appropriate
Lower Min Confidence :
Try 0.25-0.30 (diagnostic level)
If signals appear, filter was too strict
Raise gradually to find sweet spot (0.35-0.45 typical)
Disable Strong Trend Filter Temporarily :
Turn off in CAE settings
If signals appear, TCS threshold was blocking everything
Re-enable and lower TCS_threshold to 0.70-0.75
Reduce Min Slope Change :
Try 0.7-0.8 (from default 1.0)
Allows weaker divergences through
Helpful on low-volatility instruments
Widen Spacing :
Set min_bars_ANY to 6-8
Set min_bars_SAME_SIDE to 12-16
Reduces time between allowed signals
Check Timing Mode :
If using Confirmed, remember there's a pivot_lookforward delay (5+ bars)
Switch to Realtime temporarily to verify system is working
Realtime has no delay but repaints
Verify Oscillator Settings :
Length 14 is standard but might not fit all instruments
Try length 9-11 for faster response
Try length 18-21 for slower, smoother response
Problem: Too Many Signals (Signal Spam)
Symptoms : Dashboard shows 50+ signals in Statistics, confidence scores mostly <0.40, signals clustering close together.
Solutions :
Raise Min Confidence :
Try 0.40-0.50 (quality filter)
Blocks bottom-tier setups
Targets top 50-60% of divergences only
Tighten OB/OS :
Use 70/30 or 75/25
Requires more extreme oscillator readings
Reduces false divergences in mid-range
Increase Min Slope Change :
Try 1.2-1.5 (from default 1.0)
Requires stronger, more obvious divergences
Filters marginal slope disagreements
Raise TCS Threshold :
Try 0.85-0.90 (from default 0.80)
Stricter trend filter blocks more counter-trend attempts
Favors only strongest trend alignment
Enable ALL CAE Gates :
Turn on Trend Filter + Adversarial + Confidence
Triple-layer protection
Blocks aggressively — expect 20-40% reduction in signals
Widen Spacing :
min_bars_ANY: 15-20 (from 12)
min_bars_SAME_SIDE: 30-40 (from 24)
Creates substantial breathing room
Switch to Confirmed Timing :
Removes realtime preview noise
Ensures full pivot validation
5-bar delay filters many false starts
Problem: Signals in Strong Trends Get Stopped Out
Symptoms : You take a bullish divergence in a downtrend (or bearish in uptrend), and it immediately fails. Dashboard showed high TCS at the time.
Analysis : This is INTENDED behavior — CAE is protecting you from low-probability counter-trend trades.
Understanding :
Check Last Signal Metrics in dashboard — what was TCS when signal fired?
If TCS was >0.85 and signal was counter-trend, CAE correctly identified it as high risk
Strong trends rarely reverse cleanly without major exhaustion
Your losses here are the system working as designed (blocking bad odds)
If You Want to Override (Not Recommended) :
Lower TCS_threshold to 0.70-0.75 (allows more counter-trend)
Lower exhaustion_required to 0.40 (easier override)
Disable Strong Trend Filter entirely (very risky)
Better Approach :
TRUST THE FILTER — it's preventing costly mistakes
Wait for exhaustion >0.75 (yellow shading) before counter-trending strong TCS
Focus on continuation signals (hidden divs) in high-TCS environments
Use Advisory mode to see what CAE is blocking and learn from outcomes
Problem: Adversarial Blocking Seems Wrong
Symptoms : You see a divergence that "looks good" visually, but CAE blocks with "Adversarial bearish/bullish" warning.
Diagnosis :
Check dashboard Bull Case and Bear Case scores at that moment
Look at Differential value
Check adversarial bar colors — was there strong coloring against your intended direction?
Understanding :
Adversarial catches "obvious" opposing momentum that's easy to miss
Example: Bullish divergence at a local low, BUT price is deeply below EMA50, bearish momentum is strong, and RSI shows knife-catching conditions
Bull Case might be 0.20 while Bear Case is 0.55
Differential = -0.35, far beyond threshold
Block is CORRECT — you'd be fighting overwhelming opposing flow
If You Disagree Consistently
Review blocked signals on chart — scroll back and check outcomes
Did those blocked signals actually work, or did they fail as adversarial predicted?
Raise adv_threshold to 0.15-0.20 (more permissive, allows closer battles)
Disable Adversarial Validation temporarily (diagnostic) to isolate its effect
Use Advisory mode to learn adversarial patterns over 50-100 signals
Remember : Adversarial is conservative BY DESIGN. It prevents "obvious" bad trades where you're fighting strong strength the other way.
Problem: Dashboard Not Showing or Incomplete
Solutions :
Toggle "Show Dashboard" to ON in settings
Try different dashboard sizes (Small/Normal/Large)
Try different positions (Top Left/Right, Bottom Left/Right) — might be off-screen
Some sections require CAE Enable = ON (Cognitive Engine section won't appear if CAE is disabled)
Statistics section requires at least 1 lifetime signal to populate
Check that visual theme is set (dashboard colors adapt to theme)
Problem: Performance Lag, Chart Freezing
Symptoms : Chart loading is slow, indicator calculations cause delays, pinch-to-zoom lags.
Diagnosis : Visual features are computationally expensive, especially adversarial bar coloring (recalculates every bar).
Solutions (In Order of Impact) :
Disable Adversarial Bar Coloring (MOST EXPENSIVE):
Turn OFF "Adversarial Bar Coloring" in settings
This is the single biggest performance drain
Immediate improvement
Reduce Vertical Lines :
Lower "Keep last N vertical lines" to 20-30
Or set to 0 to disable entirely
Moderate improvement
Disable Bifurcation Zones :
Turn OFF "Draw Bifurcation Zones"
Reduces box drawing calculations
Moderate improvement
Set Dashboard Size to Small :
Smaller dashboard = fewer cells = less rendering
Minor improvement
Use Shorter Max Lookback :
Reduce max_lookback to 40-50 (from 60+)
Fewer bars to scan for divergences
Minor improvement
Disable Exhaustion Shading :
Turn OFF "Show Market State"
Removes background coloring calculations
Minor improvement
Extreme Performance Mode :
Disable ALL visual enhancements
Keep only triangle markers
Dashboard Small or OFF
Use Minimal theme if available
Problem: Realtime Signals Repainting
Symptoms : You see a signal appear, but on next bar it disappears or moves.
Explanation :
Realtime mode detects peaks 1 bar ago: high > high AND high > high
On the FORMING bar (before close), this condition can change as new prices arrive
Example: At 10:05, high (10:04 bar) was 100, current high is 99 → peak detected
At 10:05:30, new high of 101 arrives → peak condition breaks → signal disappears
At 10:06 (bar close), final high is 101 → no peak at 10:04 anymore → signal gone permanently
This is expected behavior for realtime responsiveness. You get preview/early warning, but it's not locked until bar confirms.
Solutions :
Use Confirmed Timing :
Switch to "Confirmed (lookforward)" mode
ZERO repainting — pivot must be fully validated
5-bar delay (pivot_lookforward)
What you see in history is exactly what would have appeared live
Accept Realtime Repaint as Tradeoff :
Keep Realtime mode for speed and alerts
Understand that pre-confirmation signals may vanish
Only trade signals that CONFIRM at bar close (check barstate.isconfirmed)
Use for live monitoring, NOT for backtesting
Trade Only After Confirmation :
In Realtime mode, wait 1 full bar after signal appears before entering
If signal survives that bar close, it's locked
This adds 1-bar delay but removes repaint risk
Recommendation : Use Confirmed for backtesting and conservative trading. Use Realtime only for active monitoring with full understanding of preview behavior.
Risk Management Integration
BZ-CAE is a signal generation system, not a complete trading strategy. You must integrate proper risk management:
Position Sizing by Confidence
Confidence 0.70-1.00 (Premium) :
Risk: 1.5-2.0% of account (MAXIMUM)
Reasoning: High-quality setup across all factors
Still cap at 2% — even premium setups can fail
Confidence 0.50-0.70 (High Quality) :
Risk: 1.0-1.5% of account
Reasoning: Standard good setup
Your bread-and-butter risk level
Confidence 0.35-0.50 (Moderate Quality) :
Risk: 0.5-1.0% of account
Reasoning: Marginal setup, passes minimum threshold
Reduce size or skip if you're selective
Confidence <0.35 (Low Quality) :
Risk: 0% (blocked in Filtering mode)
Reasoning: Insufficient quality factors
System protects you by not showing these
Stop Placement Strategies
For Reversal Signals (Regular Divergences) :
Place stop beyond the divergence pivot plus buffer
Bullish : Stop below the divergence low - 1.0-1.5 × ATR
Bearish : Stop above the divergence high + 1.0-1.5 × ATR
Reasoning: If price breaks the pivot, divergence structure is invalidated
For Continuation Signals (Hidden Divergences) :
Place stop beyond recent swing in opposite direction
Bullish continuation : Stop below recent swing low (not the divergence pivot itself)
Bearish continuation : Stop above recent swing high
Reasoning: You're trading with trend, allow more breathing room
ATR-Based Stops :
1.5-2.0 × ATR is standard
Scale by timeframe:
Scalping (1-5m): 1.0-1.5 × ATR (tight)
Day trading (15m-1H): 1.5-2.0 × ATR (balanced)
Swing (4H-D): 2.0-3.0 × ATR (wide)
Never Use Fixed Dollar/Pip Stops :
Markets have different volatility
50-pip stop on EUR/USD ≠ 50-pip stop on GBP/JPY
Always normalize by ATR or pivot structure
Profit Targets and Scaling
Primary Target :
2-3 × ATR from entry (minimum 2:1 reward-risk)
Example : Entry at 100, ATR = 2, stop at 97 (1.5 × ATR) → target at 106 (3 × ATR) = 2:1 R:R
Scaling Out Strategy :
Take 50% off at 1.5 × ATR (secure partial profit)
Move stop to breakeven
Trail remaining 50% with 1.0 × ATR trailing stop
Let winners run if trend persists
Targets by Confidence :
High Confidence (>0.70) : Aggressive targets (3-4 × ATR), trail wider (1.5 × ATR)
Standard Confidence (0.50-0.70) : Normal targets (2-3 × ATR), standard trail (1.0 × ATR)
Low Confidence (0.35-0.50) : Conservative targets (1.5-2 × ATR), tight trail (0.75 × ATR)
Use Bifurcation Zones :
If opposite-side zone is visible on chart (from previous signal), use it as target
Example : Bullish signal at 100, prior supply zone at 110 → use 110 as target
Zones mark institutional resistance/support
Exhaustion-Based Exits :
If you're in a trade and exhaustion >0.75 develops (yellow shading), consider early exit
Market is overextended — reversal risk is high
Take profit even if target not reached
Trade Management by TCS
High TCS + Counter-Trend Trade (Risky) :
Use very tight stops (1.0-1.5 × ATR)
Conservative targets (1.5-2 × ATR)
Quick exit if trade doesn't work immediately
You're fading momentum — respect it
Low TCS + Reversal Trade (Safer) :
Use wider stops (2.0-2.5 × ATR)
Aggressive targets (3-4 × ATR)
Trail with patience
Genuine reversal potential in weak trend
High TCS + Continuation Trade (Safest) :
Standard stops (1.5-2.0 × ATR)
Very aggressive targets (4-5 × ATR)
Trail wide (1.5-2.0 × ATR)
You're with institutional momentum — let it run
Educational Value — Learning Machine Intelligence
BZ-CAE is designed as a learning platform, not just a tool:
Advisory Mode as Teacher
Most indicators are binary: signal or no signal. You don't learn WHY certain setups are better.
BZ-CAE's Advisory mode shows you EVERY potential divergence, then annotates the ones that would be blocked in Filtering mode with specific reasons:
"Bull: strong downtrend (TCS=0.87)" teaches you that TCS >0.85 makes counter-trend very risky
"Adversarial bearish" teaches you that the opposing case was dominating
"Low confidence 32%" teaches you that the setup lacked quality across multiple factors
"Bull spacing: wait 8 bars" teaches you that signals need breathing room
After 50-100 signals in Advisory mode, you internalize the CAE's decision logic. You start seeing these factors yourself BEFORE the indicator does.
Dashboard Transparency
Most "intelligent" indicators are black boxes — you don't know how they make decisions.
BZ-CAE shows you ALL metrics in real-time:
TCS tells you trend strength
DMA tells you momentum alignment
Exhaustion tells you overextension
Adversarial shows both sides of the debate
Confidence shows composite quality
You learn to interpret market state holistically, a skill applicable to ANY trading system beyond this indicator.
Divergence Quality Education
Not all divergences are equal. BZ-CAE teaches you which conditions produce high-probability setups:
Quality divergence : Regular bullish div at a low, TCS <0.50 (weak trend), exhaustion >0.75 (overextended), positive adversarial differential, confidence >0.70
Low-quality divergence : Regular bearish div at a high, TCS >0.85 (strong uptrend), exhaustion <0.30 (not overextended), negative adversarial differential, confidence <0.40
After using the system, you can evaluate divergences manually with similar intelligence.
Risk Management Discipline
Confidence-based position sizing teaches you to adjust risk based on setup quality, not emotions:
Beginners often size all trades identically
Or worse, size UP on marginal setups to "make up" for losses
BZ-CAE forces systematic sizing: premium setups get larger size, marginal setups get smaller size
This creates a probabilistic approach where your edge compounds over time.
What This Indicator Is NOT
Complete transparency about limitations and positioning:
Not a Prediction System
BZ-CAE does not predict future prices. It identifies structural divergences (price-momentum disagreements) and assesses current market state (trend, exhaustion, adversarial conditions). It tells you WHEN conditions favor a potential reversal or continuation, not WHAT WILL HAPPEN.
Markets are probabilistic. Even premium-confidence setups fail ~30-40% of the time. The system improves your probability distribution over many trades — it doesn't eliminate risk.
Not Fully Automated
This is a decision support tool, not a trading robot. You must:
Execute trades manually based on signals
Manage positions (stops, targets, trailing)
Apply discretionary judgment (news events, liquidity, context)
Integrate with your broader strategy and risk rules
The confidence scores guide position sizing, but YOU determine final risk allocation based on your account size, risk tolerance, and portfolio context.
Not Beginner-Friendly
BZ-CAE requires understanding of:
Divergence trading concepts (regular vs hidden, reversal vs continuation)
Market state interpretation (trend vs range, momentum, exhaustion)
Basic technical analysis (pivots, support/resistance, EMAs)
Risk management fundamentals (position sizing, stops, R:R)
This is designed for intermediate to advanced traders willing to invest time learning the system. If you want "buy the arrow" simplicity, this isn't the tool.
Not a Holy Grail
There is no perfect indicator. BZ-CAE filters noise and improves signal quality significantly, but:
Losing trades are inevitable (even at 70% win rate, 30% still fail)
Market conditions change rapidly (yesterday's strong trend becomes today's chop)
Black swan events occur (fundamentals override technicals)
Execution matters (slippage, fees, emotional discipline)
The system provides an EDGE, not a guarantee. Your job is to execute that edge consistently with proper risk management over hundreds of trades.
Not Financial Advice
BZ-CAE is an educational and analytical tool. All trading decisions are your responsibility. Past performance (backtested or live) does not guarantee future results. Only risk capital you can afford to lose. Consult a licensed financial advisor for investment advice specific to your situation.
Ideal Market Conditions
Best Performance Characteristics
Liquid Instruments :
Major forex pairs (EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY)
Large-cap stocks and index ETFs (SPY, QQQ, AAPL, MSFT)
High-volume crypto (BTC, ETH)
Major commodities (Gold, Oil, Natural Gas)
Reasoning: Clean price structure, clear pivots, meaningful oscillator behavior
Trending with Consolidations :
Markets that trend for 20-40 bars, then consolidate 10-20 bars, repeat
Creates divergences at consolidation boundaries (reversals) and within trends (continuations)
Both regular and hidden divs find opportunities
5-Minute to Daily Timeframes :
Below 5m: too much noise, false pivots, CAE metrics unstable
Above daily: too few signals, edge diminishes (fundamentals dominate)
Sweet spot: 15m to 4H for most traders
Consistent Volume and Participation :
Regular trading sessions (not holidays or thin markets)
Predictable volatility patterns
Avoid instruments with sudden gaps or circuit breakers
Challenging Conditions
Extremely Low Liquidity :
Penny stocks, exotic forex pairs, low-volume crypto
Erratic pivots, unreliable oscillator readings
CAE metrics can't assess market state properly
Very Low Timeframes (1-Minute or Below) :
Dominated by market microstructure noise
Divergences are everywhere but meaningless
CAE filtering helps but still unreliable
Extended Sideways Consolidation :
100+ bars of tight range with no clear pivots
Oscillator hugs midpoint (45-55 range)
No divergences to detect
Fundamentally-Driven Gap Markets :
Earnings releases, economic data, geopolitical events
Price gaps over stops and targets
Technical structure breaks down
Recommendation: Disable trading around known events
Calculation Methodology — Technical Depth
For users who want to understand the math:
Oscillator Computation
Each oscillator type calculates differently, but all normalize to 0-100:
RSI : ta.rsi(close, length) — Standard Relative Strength Index
Stochastic : ta.stoch(high, low, close, length) — %K calculation
CCI : (ta.cci(hlc3, length) + 100) / 2 — Normalized from -100/+100 to 0-100
MFI : ta.mfi(hlc3, length) — Volume-weighted RSI equivalent
Williams %R : ta.wpr(length) + 100 — Inverted stochastic adjusted to 0-100
Smoothing: If smoothing > 1, apply ta.sma(oscillator, smoothing)
Divergence Detection Algorithm
Identify Pivots :
Price high pivot: ta.pivothigh(high, lookback, lookforward)
Price low pivot: ta.pivotlow(low, lookback, lookforward)
Oscillator high pivot: ta.pivothigh(osc, lookback, lookforward)
Oscillator low pivot: ta.pivotlow(osc, lookback, lookforward)
Store Recent Pivots :
Maintain arrays of last 10 pivots with bar indices
When new pivot confirmed, unshift to array, pop oldest if >10
Scan for Slope Disagreements :
Loop through last 5 pivots
For each pair (current pivot, historical pivot):
Check if within max_lookback bars
Calculate slopes: (current - historical) / bars_between
Regular bearish: price_slope > 0, osc_slope < 0, |osc_slope| > min_threshold
Regular bullish: price_slope < 0, osc_slope > 0, |osc_slope| > min_threshold
Hidden bearish: price_slope < 0, osc_slope > 0, osc_slope > min_threshold
Hidden bullish: price_slope > 0, osc_slope < 0, |osc_slope| > min_threshold
Important Disclaimers and Terms
Performance Disclosure
Past performance, whether backtested or live-traded, does not guarantee future results. Markets change. What works today may not work tomorrow. Hypothetical or simulated performance results have inherent limitations and do not represent actual trading.
Risk of Loss
Trading involves substantial risk of loss. Only trade with risk capital you can afford to lose entirely. The high degree of leverage often available in trading can work against you as well as for you. Leveraged trading may result in losses exceeding your initial deposit.
Not Financial Advice
BZ-CAE is an educational and analytical tool for technical analysis. It is not financial advice, investment advice, or a recommendation to buy or sell any security or instrument. All trading decisions are your sole responsibility. Consult a licensed financial advisor for advice specific to your circumstances.
Technical Indicator Limitations
BZ-CAE is a technical analysis tool based on price and volume data. It does not account for:
Fundamental analysis (earnings, economic data, financial health)
Market sentiment and positioning
Geopolitical events and news
Liquidity conditions and market microstructure changes
Regulatory changes or exchange rules
Integrate with broader analysis and strategy. Do not rely solely on technical indicators for trading decisions.
Repainting Acknowledgment
As disclosed throughout this documentation:
Realtime mode may repaint on forming bars before confirmation (by design for preview functionality)
Confirmed mode has zero repainting (fully validated pivots only)
Choose timing mode appropriate for your use case. Understand the tradeoffs.
Testing Recommendation
ALWAYS test on demo/paper accounts before committing real capital. Validate the indicator's behavior on your specific instruments and timeframes. Learn the system thoroughly in Advisory mode before using Filtering mode.
Learning Resources :
In-indicator tooltips (hover over setting names for detailed explanations)
This comprehensive publishing statement (save for reference)
User guide in script comments (top of code)
Final Word — Philosophy of BZ-CAE
BZ-CAE is not designed to replace your judgment — it's designed to enhance it.
The indicator identifies structural inflection points (bifurcations) where price and momentum disagree. The Cognitive Engine evaluates market state to determine if this disagreement is meaningful or noise. The Adversarial model debates both sides of the trade to catch obvious bad setups. The Confidence system ranks quality so you can choose your risk appetite.
But YOU still execute. YOU still manage risk. YOU still learn from outcomes.
This is intelligence amplification, not intelligence replacement.
Use Advisory mode to learn how expert traders evaluate market state. Use Filtering mode to enforce discipline when emotions run high. Use the dashboard to develop a systematic approach to reading markets. Use confidence scores to size positions probabilistically.
The system provides an edge. Your job is to execute that edge with discipline, patience, and proper risk management over hundreds of trades.
Markets are probabilistic. No system wins every trade. But a systematic edge + disciplined execution + proper risk management compounds over time. That's the path to consistent profitability. BZ-CAE gives you the edge. The discipline and risk management are on you.
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
chrono_utilsLibrary "chrono_utils"
Collection of objects and common functions that are related to datetime windows session days and time
ranges. The main purpose of this library is to handle time-related functionality and make it easy to reason about a
future bar and see if it is part of a predefined user session and/or inside a datetime window. All existing session
functions I found in the documentation e.g. "not na(time(timeframe, session, timezone))" are not suitable for
strategies, since the execution of the orders is delayed by one bar due to the execution happening at the bar close.
So a prediction for the next bar is necessary. Moreover, a history operator with a negative value is not allowed e.g.
`not na(time(timeframe, session, timezone) )` expression is not valid. Thus, I created this library to overcome
this small but very important limitation. In the meantime, I added useful functionality to handle session-based
behavior. An interesting utility that emerged from this development is data anomaly detection where a comparison
between the prediction and the actual value is happening. If those two values are different then a data inconsistency
happens between the prediction bar and the actual bar (probably due to a holiday or half session day etc..)
exTimezone(timezone)
exTimezone - Convert extended timezone to timezone string
Parameters:
timezone (simple string) : - The timezone or a special string
Returns: string representing the timezone
nameOfDay(day)
nameOfDay - Convert the day id into a short nameOfDay
Parameters:
day (int) : - The day id to convert
Returns: - The short name of the day
today()
today - Get the day id of this day
Returns: - The day id
nthDayAfter(day, n)
nthDayAfter - Get the day id of n days after the given day
Parameters:
day (int) : - The day id of the reference day
n (int) : - The number of days to go forward
Returns: - The day id of the day that is n days after the reference day
nextDayAfter(day)
nextDayAfter - Get the day id of next day after the given day
Parameters:
day (int) : - The day id of the reference day
Returns: - The day id of the next day after the reference day
nthDayBefore(day, n)
nthDayBefore - Get the day id of n days before the given day
Parameters:
day (int) : - The day id of the reference day
n (int) : - The number of days to go forward
Returns: - The day id of the day that is n days before the reference day
prevDayBefore(day)
prevDayBefore - Get the day id of previous day before the given day
Parameters:
day (int) : - The day id of the reference day
Returns: - The day id of the previous day before the reference day
tomorrow()
tomorrow - Get the day id of the next day
Returns: - The next day day id
normalize(num, min, max)
normalizeHour - Check if number is inthe range of
Parameters:
num (int)
min (int)
max (int)
Returns: - The normalized number
normalizeHour(hourInDay)
normalizeHour - Check if hour is valid and return a noralized hour range from
Parameters:
hourInDay (int)
Returns: - The normalized hour
normalizeMinute(minuteInHour)
normalizeMinute - Check if minute is valid and return a noralized minute from
Parameters:
minuteInHour (int)
Returns: - The normalized minute
monthInMilliseconds(mon)
monthInMilliseconds - Calculate the miliseconds in one bar of the timeframe
Parameters:
mon (int) : - The month of reference to get the miliseconds
Returns: - The number of milliseconds of the month
barInMilliseconds()
barInMilliseconds - Calculate the miliseconds in one bar of the timeframe
Returns: - The number of milliseconds in one bar
method init(this, fromDateTime, toDateTime)
init - Initialize the time window object from boolean values of each session day
Namespace types: DateTimeWindow
Parameters:
this (DateTimeWindow) : - The time window object that will hold the from and to datetimes
fromDateTime (int) : - The starting datetime of the time window
toDateTime (int) : - The ending datetime of the time window
Returns: - The time window object
method init(this, refTimezone, chTimezone, fromDateTime, toDateTime)
init - Initialize the time window object from boolean values of each session day
Namespace types: DateTimeWindow
Parameters:
this (DateTimeWindow) : - The time window object that will hold the from and to datetimes
refTimezone (simple string) : - The timezone of reference of the 'from' and 'to' dates
chTimezone (simple string) : - The target timezone to convert the 'from' and 'to' dates
fromDateTime (int) : - The starting datetime of the time window
toDateTime (int) : - The ending datetime of the time window
Returns: - The time window object
method init(this, sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, sat)
init - Initialize the session days object from boolean values of each session day
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object that will hold the day selection
sun (bool) : - Is Sunday a trading day?
mon (bool) : - Is Monday a trading day?
tue (bool) : - Is Tuesday a trading day?
wed (bool) : - Is Wednesday a trading day?
thu (bool) : - Is Thursday a trading day?
fri (bool) : - Is Friday a trading day?
sat (bool) : - Is Saturday a trading day?
Returns: - The session days objectfrom_chart
method init(this, unixTime)
init - Initialize the object from the hour and minute of the session time in exchange timezone (syminfo.timezone)
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object with the hour and minute of the time of the day
unixTime (int) : - The unix time
Returns: - The session time object
method init(this, hourInDay, minuteInHour)
init - Initialize the object from the hour and minute of the session time in exchange timezone (syminfo.timezone)
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object with the hour and minute of the time of the day
hourInDay (int) : - The hour of the time
minuteInHour (int) : - The minute of the time
Returns: - The session time object
method init(this, hourInDay, minuteInHour, refTimezone)
init - Initialize the object from the hour and minute of the session time
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object with the hour and minute of the time of the day
hourInDay (int) : - The hour of the time
minuteInHour (int) : - The minute of the time
refTimezone (string) : - The timezone of reference of the 'hour' and 'minute'
Returns: - The session time object
method init(this, startTime, endTime)
init - Initialize the object from the start and end session time in exchange timezone (syminfo.timezone)
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object that will hold the start and end time of the daily session
startTime (SessionTime) : - The time the session begins
endTime (SessionTime) : - The time the session ends
Returns: - The session time range object
method init(this, startTimeHour, startTimeMinute, endTimeHour, endTimeMinute, refTimezone)
init - Initialize the object from the start and end session time
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object that will hold the start and end time of the daily session
startTimeHour (int) : - The time hour the session begins
startTimeMinute (int) : - The time minute the session begins
endTimeHour (int) : - The time hour the session ends
endTimeMinute (int) : - The time minute the session ends
refTimezone (string)
Returns: - The session time range object
method init(this, days, timeRanges)
init - Initialize the user session object from session days and time range
Namespace types: UserSession
Parameters:
this (UserSession) : - The user-defined session object that will hold the day and the time range selection
days (SessionDays) : - The session days object that defines the days the session is happening
timeRanges (SessionTimeRange ) : - The array of all the session time ranges during a session day
Returns: - The user session object
method to_string(this)
to_string - Formats the time window into a human-readable string
Namespace types: DateTimeWindow
Parameters:
this (DateTimeWindow) : - The time window object with the from and to datetimes
Returns: - The string of the time window
method to_string(this)
to_string - Formats the session days into a human-readable string with short day names
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object with the day selection
Returns: - The string of the session day short names
method to_string(this)
to_string - Formats the session time into a human-readable string
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object with the hour and minute of the time of the day
Returns: - The string of the session time
method to_string(this)
to_string - Formats the session time into a human-readable string
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object with the start and end time of the daily session
Returns: - The string of the session time
method to_string(this)
to_string - Formats the user session into a human-readable string
Namespace types: UserSession
Parameters:
this (UserSession) : - The user-defined session object with the day and the time range selection
Returns: - The string of the user session
method to_string(this)
to_string - Formats the bar into a human-readable string
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar object with the open and close times
Returns: - The string of the bar times
method to_string(this)
to_string - Formats the chart session into a human-readable string
Namespace types: ChartSession
Parameters:
this (ChartSession) : - The chart session object that contains the days and the time range shown in the chart
Returns: - The string of the chart session
method get_size_in_secs(this)
get_size_in_secs - Count the seconds from start to end in the given timeframe
Namespace types: DateTimeWindow
Parameters:
this (DateTimeWindow) : - The time window object with the from and to datetimes
Returns: - The number of seconds inside the time widow for the given timeframe
method get_size_in_secs(this)
get_size_in_secs - Calculate the seconds inside the session
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object with the start and end time of the daily session
Returns: - The number of seconds inside the session
method get_size_in_bars(this)
get_size_in_bars - Count the bars from start to end in the given timeframe
Namespace types: DateTimeWindow
Parameters:
this (DateTimeWindow) : - The time window object with the from and to datetimes
Returns: - The number of bars inside the time widow for the given timeframe
method get_size_in_bars(this)
get_size_in_bars - Calculate the bars inside the session
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object with the start and end time of the daily session
Returns: - The number of bars inside the session for the given timeframe
method from_chart(this)
from_chart - Initialize the session days object from the chart
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object that will hold the day selection
Returns: - The user session object
method from_chart(this)
from_chart - Initialize the session time range object from the chart
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object that will hold the start and end time of the daily session
Returns: - The session time range object
method from_chart(this)
from_chart - Initialize the session object from the chart
Namespace types: ChartSession
Parameters:
this (ChartSession) : - The chart session object that will hold the days and the time range shown in the chart
Returns: - The chart session object
method to_sess_string(this)
to_sess_string - Formats the session days into a session string with day ids
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object
Returns: - The string of the session day ids
method to_sess_string(this)
to_sess_string - Formats the session time into a session string
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object with the hour and minute of the time of the day
Returns: - The string of the session time
method to_sess_string(this)
to_sess_string - Formats the session time into a session string
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object with the start and end time of the daily session
Returns: - The string of the session time
method to_sess_string(this)
to_sess_string - Formats the user session into a session string
Namespace types: UserSession
Parameters:
this (UserSession) : - The user-defined session object with the day and the time range selection
Returns: - The string of the user session
method to_sess_string(this)
to_sess_string - Formats the chart session into a session string
Namespace types: ChartSession
Parameters:
this (ChartSession) : - The chart session object that contains the days and the time range shown in the chart
Returns: - The string of the chart session
method from_sess_string(this, sess)
from_sess_string - Initialize the session days object from the session string
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object that will hold the day selection
sess (string) : - The session string part that represents the days
Returns: - The session days object
method from_sess_string(this, sess)
from_sess_string - Initialize the session time object from the session string in exchange timezone (syminfo.timezone)
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object that will hold the hour and minute of the time
sess (string) : - The session string part that represents the time HHmm
Returns: - The session time object
method from_sess_string(this, sess, refTimezone)
from_sess_string - Initialize the session time object from the session string
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object that will hold the hour and minute of the time
sess (string) : - The session string part that represents the time HHmm
refTimezone (simple string) : - The timezone of reference of the 'hour' and 'minute'
Returns: - The session time object
method from_sess_string(this, sess)
from_sess_string - Initialize the session time range object from the session string in exchange timezone (syminfo.timezone)
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object that will hold the start and end time of the daily session
sess (string) : - The session string part that represents the time range HHmm-HHmm
Returns: - The session time range object
method from_sess_string(this, sess, refTimezone)
from_sess_string - Initialize the session time range object from the session string
Namespace types: SessionTimeRange
Parameters:
this (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object that will hold the start and end time of the daily session
sess (string) : - The session string part that represents the time range HHmm-HHmm
refTimezone (simple string) : - The timezone of reference of the time ranges
Returns: - The session time range object
method from_sess_string(this, sess)
from_sess_string - Initialize the user session object from the session string in exchange timezone (syminfo.timezone)
Namespace types: UserSession
Parameters:
this (UserSession) : - The user-defined session object that will hold the day and the time range selection
sess (string) : - The session string that represents the user session HHmm-HHmm,HHmm-HHmm:ddddddd
Returns: - The session time range object
method from_sess_string(this, sess, refTimezone)
from_sess_string - Initialize the user session object from the session string
Namespace types: UserSession
Parameters:
this (UserSession) : - The user-defined session object that will hold the day and the time range selection
sess (string) : - The session string that represents the user session HHmm-HHmm,HHmm-HHmm:ddddddd
refTimezone (simple string) : - The timezone of reference of the time ranges
Returns: - The session time range object
method nth_day_after(this, day, n)
nth_day_after - The nth day after the given day that is a session day (true) in the object
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object with the day selection
day (int) : - The day id of the reference day
n (int) : - The number of days after
Returns: - The day id of the nth session day of the week after the given day
method nth_day_before(this, day, n)
nth_day_before - The nth day before the given day that is a session day (true) in the object
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object with the day selection
day (int) : - The day id of the reference day
n (int) : - The number of days after
Returns: - The day id of the nth session day of the week before the given day
method next_day(this)
next_day - The next day that is a session day (true) in the object
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object with the day selection
Returns: - The day id of the next session day of the week
method previous_day(this)
previous_day - The previous day that is session day (true) in the object
Namespace types: SessionDays
Parameters:
this (SessionDays) : - The session days object with the day selection
Returns: - The day id of the previous session day of the week
method get_sec_in_day(this)
get_sec_in_day - Count the seconds since the start of the day this session time represents
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object with the hour and minute of the time of the day
Returns: - The number of seconds passed from the start of the day until that session time
method get_ms_in_day(this)
get_ms_in_day - Count the milliseconds since the start of the day this session time represents
Namespace types: SessionTime
Parameters:
this (SessionTime) : - The session time object with the hour and minute of the time of the day
Returns: - The number of milliseconds passed from the start of the day until that session time
method eq(this, other)
eq - Compare two bars
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar object with the open and close times
other (Bar) : - The bar object to compare with
Returns: - Whether this bar is equal to the other one
method get_open_time(this)
get_open_time - The open time object
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar object with the open and close times
Returns: - The open time object
method get_close_time(this)
get_close_time - The close time object
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar object with the open and close times
Returns: - The close time object
method get_time_range(this)
get_time_range - Get the time range of the bar
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar object with the open and close times
Returns: - The time range that the bar is in
getBarNow()
getBarNow - Get the current bar object with time and time_close timestamps
Returns: - The current bar
getFixedBarNow()
getFixedBarNow - Get the current bar with fixed width defined by the timeframe. Note: There are case like SPX 15min timeframe where the last session bar is only 10min. This will return a bar of 15 minutes
Returns: - The current bar
method is_in_window(this, win)
is_in_window - Check if the given bar is between the start and end dates of the window
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar to check if it is between the from and to datetimes of the window
win (DateTimeWindow) : - The time window object with the from and to datetimes
Returns: - Whether the current bar is inside the datetime window
method is_in_timerange(this, rng)
is_in_timerange - Check if the given bar is inside the session time range
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar to check if it is between the from and to datetimes
rng (SessionTimeRange) : - The session time range object with the start and end time of the daily session
Returns: - Whether the bar is inside the session time range and if this part of the next trading day
method is_in_days(this, days)
is_in_days - Check if the given bar is inside the session days
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar to check if its day is a trading day
days (SessionDays) : - The session days object with the day selection
Returns: - Whether the current bar day is inside the session
method is_in_session(this, sess)
is_in_session - Check if the given bar is inside the session as defined by the input params (what "not na(time(timeframe.period, this.to_sess_string()) )" should return if you could write it
Namespace types: Bar
Parameters:
this (Bar) : - The bar to check if it is between the from and to datetimes
sess (UserSession) : - The user-defined session object with the day and the time range selection
Returns: - Whether the current time is inside the session
method next_bar(this, offsetBars)
next_bar - Predicts the next bars open and close time based on the charts session
Namespace types: ChartSession
Parameters:
this (ChartSession) : - The chart session object that contains the days and the time range shown in the chart
offsetBars (simple int) : - The number of bars forward
Returns: - Whether the current time is inside the session
DateTimeWindow
DateTimeWindow - Object that represents a datetime window with a beginning and an end
Fields:
fromDateTime (series int) : - The beginning of the datetime window
toDateTime (series int) : - The end of the datetime window
SessionDays
SessionDays - Object that represent the trading days of the week
Fields:
days (map) : - The map that contains all days of the week and their session flag
SessionTime
SessionTime - Object that represents the time (hour and minutes)
Fields:
hourInDay (series int) : - The hour of the day that ranges from 0 to 24
minuteInHour (series int) : - The minute of the hour that ranges from 0 to 59
minuteInDay (series int) : - The minute of the day that ranges from 0 to 1440. They will be calculated based on hourInDay and minuteInHour when method is called
SessionTimeRange
SessionTimeRange - Object that represents a range that extends from the start to the end time
Fields:
startTime (SessionTime) : - The beginning of the time range
endTime (SessionTime) : - The end of the time range
isOvernight (series bool) : - Whether or not this is an overnight time range
UserSession
UserSession - Object that represents a user-defined session
Fields:
days (SessionDays) : - The map of the user-defined trading days
timeRanges (SessionTimeRange ) : - The array with all time ranges of the user-defined session during the trading days
Bar
Bar - Object that represents the bars' open and close times
Fields:
openUnixTime (series int) : - The open time of the bar
closeUnixTime (series int) : - The close time of the bar
chartDayOfWeek (series int)
ChartSession
ChartSession - Object that represents the default session that is shown in the chart
Fields:
days (SessionDays) : - A map with the trading days shown in the chart
timeRange (SessionTimeRange) : - The time range of the session during a trading day
isFinalized (series bool)
`security()` revisited [PineCoders]NOTE
The non-repainting technique in this publication that relies on bar states is now deprecated, as we have identified inconsistencies that undermine its credibility as a universal solution. The outputs that use the technique are still available for reference in this publication. However, we do not endorse its usage. See this publication for more information about the current best practices for requesting HTF data and why they work.
█ OVERVIEW
This script presents a new function to help coders use security() in both repainting and non-repainting modes. We revisit this often misunderstood and misused function, and explain its behavior in different contexts, in the hope of dispelling some of the coder lure surrounding it. The function is incredibly powerful, yet misused, it can become a dangerous WMD and an instrument of deception, for both coders and traders.
We will discuss:
• How to use our new `f_security()` function.
• The behavior of Pine code and security() on the three very different types of bars that make up any chart.
• Why what you see on a chart is a simulation, and should be taken with a grain of salt.
• Why we are presenting a new version of a function handling security() calls.
• Other topics of interest to coders using higher timeframe (HTF) data.
█ WARNING
We have tried to deliver a function that is simple to use and will, in non-repainting mode, produce reliable results for both experienced and novice coders. If you are a novice coder, stick to our recommendations to avoid getting into trouble, and DO NOT change our `f_security()` function when using it. Use `false` as the function's last argument and refrain from using your script at smaller timeframes than the chart's. To call our function to fetch a non-repainting value of close from the 1D timeframe, use:
f_security(_sym, _res, _src, _rep) => security(_sym, _res, _src )
previousDayClose = f_security(syminfo.tickerid, "D", close, false)
If that's all you're interested in, you are done.
If you choose to ignore our recommendation and use the function in repainting mode by changing the `false` in there for `true`, we sincerely hope you read the rest of our ramblings before you do so, to understand the consequences of your choice.
Let's now have a look at what security() is showing you. There is a lot to cover, so buckle up! But before we dig in, one last thing.
What is a chart?
A chart is a graphic representation of events that occur in markets. As any representation, it is not reality, but rather a model of reality. As Scott Page eloquently states in The Model Thinker : "All models are wrong; many are useful". Having in mind that both chart bars and plots on our charts are imperfect and incomplete renderings of what actually occurred in realtime markets puts us coders in a place from where we can better understand the nature of, and the causes underlying the inevitable compromises necessary to build the data series our code uses, and print chart bars.
Traders or coders complaining that charts do not reflect reality act like someone who would complain that the word "dog" is not a real dog. Let's recognize that we are dealing with models here, and try to understand them the best we can. Sure, models can be improved; TradingView is constantly improving the quality of the information displayed on charts, but charts nevertheless remain mere translations. Plots of data fetched through security() being modelized renderings of what occurs at higher timeframes, coders will build more useful and reliable tools for both themselves and traders if they endeavor to perfect their understanding of the abstractions they are working with. We hope this publication helps you in this pursuit.
█ FEATURES
This script's "Inputs" tab has four settings:
• Repaint : Determines whether the functions will use their repainting or non-repainting mode.
Note that the setting will not affect the behavior of the yellow plot, as it always repaints.
• Source : The source fetched by the security() calls.
• Timeframe : The timeframe used for the security() calls. If it is lower than the chart's timeframe, a warning appears.
• Show timeframe reminder : Displays a reminder of the timeframe after the last bar.
█ THE CHART
The chart shows two different pieces of information and we want to discuss other topics in this section, so we will be covering:
A — The type of chart bars we are looking at, indicated by the colored band at the top.
B — The plots resulting of calling security() with the close price in different ways.
C — Points of interest on the chart.
A — Chart bars
The colored band at the top shows the three types of bars that any chart on a live market will print. It is critical for coders to understand the important distinctions between each type of bar:
1 — Gray : Historical bars, which are bars that were already closed when the script was run on them.
2 — Red : Elapsed realtime bars, i.e., realtime bars that have run their course and closed.
The state of script calculations showing on those bars is that of the last time they were made, when the realtime bar closed.
3 — Green : The realtime bar. Only the rightmost bar on the chart can be the realtime bar at any given time, and only when the chart's market is active.
Refer to the Pine User Manual's Execution model page for a more detailed explanation of these types of bars.
B — Plots
The chart shows the result of letting our 5sec chart run for a few minutes with the following settings: "Repaint" = "On" (the default is "Off"), "Source" = `close` and "Timeframe" = 1min. The five lines plotted are the following. They have progressively thinner widths:
1 — Yellow : A normal, repainting security() call.
2 — Silver : Our recommended security() function.
3 — Fuchsia : Our recommended way of achieving the same result as our security() function, for cases when the source used is a function returning a tuple.
4 — White : The method we previously recommended in our MTF Selection Framework , which uses two distinct security() calls.
5 — Black : A lame attempt at fooling traders that MUST be avoided.
All lines except the first one in yellow will vary depending on the "Repaint" setting in the script's inputs. The first plot does not change because, contrary to all other plots, it contains no conditional code to adapt to repainting/no-repainting modes; it is a simple security() call showing its default behavior.
C — Points of interest on the chart
Historical bars do not show actual repainting behavior
To appreciate what a repainting security() call will plot in realtime, one must look at the realtime bar and at elapsed realtime bars, the bars where the top line is green or red on the chart at the top of this page. There you can see how the plots go up and down, following the close value of each successive chart bar making up a single bar of the higher timeframe. You would see the same behavior in "Replay" mode. In the realtime bar, the movement of repainting plots will vary with the source you are fetching: open will not move after a new timeframe opens, low and high will change when a new low or high are found, close will follow the last feed update. If you are fetching a value calculated by a function, it may also change on each update.
Now notice how different the plots are on historical bars. There, the plot shows the close of the previously completed timeframe for the whole duration of the current timeframe, until on its last bar the price updates to the current timeframe's close when it is confirmed (if the timeframe's last bar is missing, the plot will only update on the next timeframe's first bar). That last bar is the only one showing where the plot would end if that timeframe's bars had elapsed in realtime. If one doesn't understand this, one cannot properly visualize how his script will calculate in realtime when using repainting. Additionally, as published scripts typically show charts where the script has only run on historical bars, they are, in fact, misleading traders who will naturally assume the script will behave the same way on realtime bars.
Non-repainting plots are more accurate on historical bars
Now consider this chart, where we are using the same settings as on the chart used to publish this script, except that we have turned "Repainting" off this time:
The yellow line here is our reference, repainting line, so although repainting is turned off, it is still repainting, as expected. Because repainting is now off, however, plots on historical bars show the previous timeframe's close until the first bar of a new timeframe, at which point the plot updates. This correctly reflects the behavior of the script in the realtime bar, where because we are offsetting the series by one, we are always showing the previously calculated—and thus confirmed—higher timeframe value. This means that in realtime, we will only get the previous timeframe's values one bar after the timeframe's last bar has elapsed, at the open of the first bar of a new timeframe. Historical and elapsed realtime bars will not actually show this nuance because they reflect the state of calculations made on their close , but we can see the plot update on that bar nonetheless.
► This more accurate representation on historical bars of what will happen in the realtime bar is one of the two key reasons why using non-repainting data is preferable.
The other is that in realtime, your script will be using more reliable data and behave more consistently.
Misleading plots
Valiant attempts by coders to show non-repainting, higher timeframe data updating earlier than on our chart are futile. If updates occur one bar earlier because coders use the repainting version of the function, then so be it, but they must then also accept that their historical bars are not displaying information that is as accurate. Not informing script users of this is to mislead them. Coders should also be aware that if they choose to use repainting data in realtime, they are sacrificing reliability to speed and may be running a strategy that behaves very differently from the one they backtested, thus invalidating their tests.
When, however, coders make what are supposed to be non-repainting plots plot artificially early on historical bars, as in examples "c4" and "c5" of our script, they would want us to believe they have achieved the miracle of time travel. Our understanding of the current state of science dictates that for now, this is impossible. Using such techniques in scripts is plainly misleading, and public scripts using them will be moderated. We are coding trading tools here—not video games. Elementary ethics prescribe that we should not mislead traders, even if it means not being able to show sexy plots. As the great Feynman said: You should not fool the layman when you're talking as a scientist.
You can readily appreciate the fantasy plot of "c4", the thinnest line in black, by comparing its supposedly non-repainting behavior between historical bars and realtime bars. After updating—by miracle—as early as the wide yellow line that is repainting, it suddenly moves in a more realistic place when the script is running in realtime, in synch with our non-repainting lines. The "c5" version does not plot on the chart, but it displays in the Data Window. It is even worse than "c4" in that it also updates magically early on historical bars, but goes on to evaluate like the repainting yellow line in realtime, except one bar late.
Data Window
The Data Window shows the values of the chart's plots, then the values of both the inside and outside offsets used in our calculations, so you can see them change bar by bar. Notice their differences between historical and elapsed realtime bars, and the realtime bar itself. If you do not know about the Data Window, have a look at this essential tool for Pine coders in the Pine User Manual's page on Debugging . The conditional expressions used to calculate the offsets may seem tortuous but their objective is quite simple. When repainting is on, we use this form, so with no offset on all bars:
security(ticker, i_timeframe, i_source )
// which is equivalent to:
security(ticker, i_timeframe, i_source)
When repainting is off, we use two different and inverted offsets on historical bars and the realtime bar:
// Historical bars:
security(ticker, i_timeframe, i_source )
// Realtime bar (and thus, elapsed realtime bars):
security(ticker, i_timeframe, i_source )
The offsets in the first line show how we prevent repainting on historical bars without the need for the `lookahead` parameter. We use the value of the function call on the chart's previous bar. Since values between the repainting and non-repainting versions only differ on the timeframe's last bar, we can use the previous value so that the update only occurs on the timeframe's first bar, as it will in realtime when not repainting.
In the realtime bar, we use the second call, where the offsets are inverted. This is because if we used the first call in realtime, we would be fetching the value of the repainting function on the previous bar, so the close of the last bar. What we want, instead, is the data from the previous, higher timeframe bar , which has elapsed and is confirmed, and thus will not change throughout realtime bars, except on the first constituent chart bar belonging to a new higher timeframe.
After the offsets, the Data Window shows values for the `barstate.*` variables we use in our calculations.
█ NOTES
Why are we revisiting security() ?
For four reasons:
1 — We were seeing coders misuse our `f_secureSecurity()` function presented in How to avoid repainting when using security() .
Some novice coders were modifying the offset used with the history-referencing operator in the function, making it zero instead of one,
which to our horror, caused look-ahead bias when used with `lookahead = barmerge.lookahead_on`.
We wanted to present a safer function which avoids introducing the dreaded "lookahead" in the scripts of unsuspecting coders.
2 — The popularity of security() in screener-type scripts where coders need to use the full 40 calls allowed per script made us want to propose
a solid method of allowing coders to offer a repainting/no-repainting choice to their script users with only one security() call.
3 — We wanted to explain why some alternatives we see circulating are inadequate and produce misleading behavior.
4 — Our previous publication on security() focused on how to avoid repainting, yet many other considerations worthy of attention are not related to repainting.
Handling tuples
When sending function calls that return tuples with security() , our `f_security()` function will not work because Pine does not allow us to use the history-referencing operator with tuple return values. The solution is to integrate the inside offset to your function's arguments, use it to offset the results the function is returning, and then add the outside offset in a reassignment of the tuple variables, after security() returns its values to the script, as we do in our "c2" example.
Does it repaint?
We're pretty sure Wilder was not asked very often if RSI repainted. Why? Because it wasn't in fashion—and largely unnecessary—to ask that sort of question in the 80's. Many traders back then used daily charts only, and indicator values were calculated at the day's close, so everybody knew what they were getting. Additionally, indicator values were calculated by generally reputable outfits or traders themselves, so data was pretty reliable. Today, almost anybody can write a simple indicator, and the programming languages used to write them are complex enough for some coders lacking the caution, know-how or ethics of the best professional coders, to get in over their heads and produce code that does not work the way they think it does.
As we hope to have clearly demonstrated, traders do have legitimate cause to ask if MTF scripts repaint or not when authors do not specify it in their script's description.
► We recommend that authors always use our `f_security()` with `false` as the last argument to avoid repainting when fetching data dependent on OHLCV information. This is the only way to obtain reliable HTF data. If you want to offer users a choice, make non-repainting mode the default, so that if users choose repainting, it will be their responsibility. Non-repainting security() calls are also the only way for scripts to show historical behavior that matches the script's realtime behavior, so you are not misleading traders. Additionally, non-repainting HTF data is the only way that non-repainting alerts can be configured on MTF scripts, as users of MTF scripts cannot prevent their alerts from repainting by simply configuring them to trigger on the bar's close.
Data feeds
A chart at one timeframe is made up of multiple feeds that mesh seamlessly to form one chart. Historical bars can use one feed, and the realtime bar another, which brokers/exchanges can sometimes update retroactively so that elapsed realtime bars will reappear with very slight modifications when the browser's tab is refreshed. Intraday and daily chart prices also very often originate from different feeds supplied by brokers/exchanges. That is why security() calls at higher timeframes may be using a completely different feed than the chart, and explains why the daily high value, for example, can vary between timeframes. Volume information can also vary considerably between intraday and daily feeds in markets like stocks, because more volume information becomes available at the end of day. It is thus expected behavior—and not a bug—to see data variations between timeframes.
Another point to keep in mind concerning feeds it that when you are using a repainting security() plot in realtime, you will sometimes see discrepancies between its plot and the realtime bars. An artefact revealing these inconsistencies can be seen when security() plots sometimes skip a realtime chart bar during periods of high market activity. This occurs because of races between the chart and the security() feeds, which are being monitored by independent, concurrent processes. A blue arrow on the chart indicates such an occurrence. This is another cause of repainting, where realtime bar-building logic can produce different outcomes on one closing price. It is also another argument supporting our recommendation to use non-repainting data.
Alternatives
There is an alternative to using security() in some conditions. If all you need are OHLC prices of a higher timeframe, you can use a technique like the one Duyck demonstrates in his security free MTF example - JD script. It has the great advantage of displaying actual repainting values on historical bars, which mimic the code's behavior in the realtime bar—or at least on elapsed realtime bars, contrary to a repainting security() plot. It has the disadvantage of using the current chart's TF data feed prices, whereas higher timeframe data feeds may contain different and more reliable prices when they are compiled at the end of the day. In its current state, it also does not allow for a repainting/no-repainting choice.
When `lookahead` is useful
When retrieving non-price data, or in special cases, for experiments, it can be useful to use `lookahead`. One example is our Backtesting on Non-Standard Charts: Caution! script where we are fetching prices of standard chart bars from non-standard charts.
Warning users
Normal use of security() dictates that it only be used at timeframes equal to or higher than the chart's. To prevent users from inadvertently using your script in contexts where it will not produce expected behavior, it is good practice to warn them when their chart is on a higher timeframe than the one in the script's "Timeframe" field. Our `f_tfReminderAndErrorCheck()` function in this script does that. It can also print a reminder of the higher timeframe. It uses one security() call.
Intrabar timeframes
security() is not supported by TradingView when used with timeframes lower than the chart's. While it is still possible to use security() at intrabar timeframes, it then behaves differently. If no care is taken to send a function specifically written to handle the successive intrabars, security() will return the value of the last intrabar in the chart's timeframe, so the last 1H bar in the current 1D bar, if called at "60" from a "D" chart timeframe. If you are an advanced coder, see our FAQ entry on the techniques involved in processing intrabar timeframes. Using intrabar timeframes comes with important limitations, which you must understand and explain to traders if you choose to make scripts using the technique available to others. Special care should also be taken to thoroughly test this type of script. Novice coders should refrain from getting involved in this.
█ TERMINOLOGY
Timeframe
Timeframe , interval and resolution are all being used to name the concept of timeframe. We have, in the past, used "timeframe" and "resolution" more or less interchangeably. Recently, members from the Pine and PineCoders team have decided to settle on "timeframe", so from hereon we will be sticking to that term.
Multi-timeframe (MTF)
Some coders use "multi-timeframe" or "MTF" to name what are in fact "multi-period" calculations, as when they use MAs of progressively longer periods. We consider that a misleading use of "multi-timeframe", which should be reserved for code using calculations actually made from another timeframe's context and using security() , safe for scripts like Duyck's one mentioned earlier, or TradingView's Relative Volume at Time , which use a user-selected timeframe as an anchor to reset calculations. Calculations made at the chart's timeframe by varying the period of MAs or other rolling window calculations should be called "multi-period", and "MTF-anchored" could be used for scripts that reset calculations on timeframe boundaries.
Colophon
Our script was written using the PineCoders Coding Conventions for Pine .
The description was formatted using the techniques explained in the How We Write and Format Script Descriptions PineCoders publication.
Snippets were lifted from our MTF Selection Framework , then massaged to create the `f_tfReminderAndErrorCheck()` function.
█ THANKS
Thanks to apozdnyakov for his help with the innards of security() .
Thanks to bmistiaen for proofreading our description.
Look first. Then leap.
Waindrops [Makit0]█ OVERALL
Plot waindrops (custom volume profiles) on user defined periods, for each period you get high and low, it slices each period in half to get independent vwap, volume profile and the volume traded per price at each half.
It works on intraday charts only, up to 720m (12H). It can plot balanced or unbalanced waindrops, and volume profiles up to 24H sessions.
As example you can setup unbalanced periods to get independent volume profiles for the overnight and cash sessions on the futures market, or 24H periods to get the full session volume profile of EURUSD
The purpose of this indicator is twofold:
1 — from a Chartist point of view, to have an indicator which displays the volume in a more readable way
2 — from a Pine Coder point of view, to have an example of use for two very powerful tools on Pine Script:
• the recently updated drawing limit to 500 (from 50)
• the recently ability to use drawings arrays (lines and labels)
If you are new to Pine Script and you are learning how to code, I hope you read all the code and comments on this indicator, all is designed for you,
the variables and functions names, the sometimes too big explanations, the overall structure of the code, all is intended as an example on how to code
in Pine Script a specific indicator from a very good specification in form of white paper
If you wanna learn Pine Script form scratch just start HERE
In case you have any kind of problem with Pine Script please use some of the awesome resources at our disposal: USRMAN , REFMAN , AWESOMENESS , MAGIC
█ FEATURES
Waindrops are a different way of seeing the volume and price plotted in a chart, its a volume profile indicator where you can see the volume of each price level
plotted as a vertical histogram for each half of a custom period. By default the period is 60 so it plots an independent volume profile each 30m
You can think of each waindrop as an user defined candlestick or bar with four key values:
• high of the period
• low of the period
• left vwap (volume weighted average price of the first half period)
• right vwap (volume weighted average price of the second half period)
The waindrop can have 3 different colors (configurable by the user):
• GREEN: when the right vwap is higher than the left vwap (bullish sentiment )
• RED: when the right vwap is lower than the left vwap (bearish sentiment )
• BLUE: when the right vwap is equal than the left vwap ( neutral sentiment )
KEY FEATURES
• Help menu
• Custom periods
• Central bars
• Left/Right VWAPs
• Custom central bars and vwaps: color and pixels
• Highly configurable volume histogram: execution window, ticks, pixels, color, update frequency and fine tuning the neutral meaning
• Volume labels with custom size and color
• Tracking price dot to be able to see the current price when you hide your default candlesticks or bars
█ SETTINGS
Click here or set any impar period to see the HELP INFO : show the HELP INFO, if it is activated the indicator will not plot
PERIOD SIZE (max 2880 min) : waindrop size in minutes, default 60, max 2880 to allow the first half of a 48H period as a full session volume profile
BARS : show the central and vwap bars, default true
Central bars : show the central bars, default true
VWAP bars : show the left and right vwap bars, default true
Bars pixels : width of the bars in pixels, default 2
Bars color mode : bars color behavior
• BARS : gets the color from the 'Bars color' option on the settings panel
• HISTOGRAM : gets the color from the Bearish/Bullish/Neutral Histogram color options from the settings panel
Bars color : color for the central and vwap bars, default white
HISTOGRAM show the volume histogram, default true
Execution window (x24H) : last 24H periods where the volume funcionality will be plotted, default 5
Ticks per bar (max 50) : width in ticks of each histogram bar, default 2
Updates per period : number of times the histogram will update
• ONE : update at the last bar of the period
• TWO : update at the last bar of each half period
• FOUR : slice the period in 4 quarters and updates at the last bar of each of them
• EACH BAR : updates at the close of each bar
Pixels per bar : width in pixels of each histogram bar, default 4
Neutral Treshold (ticks) : delta in ticks between left and right vwaps to identify a waindrop as neutral, default 0
Bearish Histogram color : histogram color when right vwap is lower than left vwap, default red
Bullish Histogram color : histogram color when right vwap is higher than left vwap, default green
Neutral Histogram color : histogram color when the delta between right and left vwaps is equal or lower than the Neutral treshold, default blue
VOLUME LABELS : show volume labels
Volume labels color : color for the volume labels, default white
Volume Labels size : text size for the volume labels, choose between AUTO, TINY, SMALL, NORMAL or LARGE, default TINY
TRACK PRICE : show a yellow ball tracking the last price, default true
█ LIMITS
This indicator only works on intraday charts (minutes only) up to 12H (720m), the lower chart timeframe you can use is 1m
This indicator needs price, time and volume to work, it will not work on an index (there is no volume), the execution will not be allowed
The histogram (volume profile) can be plotted on 24H sessions as limit but you can plot several 24H sessions
█ ERRORS AND PERFORMANCE
Depending on the choosed settings, the script performance will be highly affected and it will experience errors
Two of the more common errors it can throw are:
• Calculation takes too long to execute
• Loop takes too long
The indicator performance is highly related to the underlying volatility (tick wise), the script takes each candlestick or bar and for each tick in it stores the price and volume, if the ticker in your chart has thousands and thousands of ticks per bar the indicator will throw an error for sure, it can not calculate in time such amount of ticks.
What all of that means? Simply put, this will throw error on the BITCOIN pair BTCUSD (high volatility with tick size 0.01) because it has too many ticks per bar, but lucky you it will work just fine on the futures contract BTC1! (tick size 5) because it has a lot less ticks per bar
There are some options you can fine tune to boost the script performance, the more demanding option in terms of resources consumption is Updates per period , by default is maxed out so lowering this setting will improve the performance in a high way.
If you wanna know more about how to improve the script performance, read the HELP INFO accessible from the settings panel
█ HOW-TO SETUP
The basic parameters to adjust are Period size , Ticks per bar and Pixels per bar
• Period size is the main setting, defines the waindrop size, to get a better looking histogram set bigger period and smaller chart timeframe
• Ticks per bar is the tricky one, adjust it differently for each underlying (ticker) volatility wise, for some you will need a low value, for others a high one.
To get a more accurate histogram set it as lower as you can (min value is 1)
• Pixels per bar allows you to adjust the width of each histogram bar, with it you can adjust the blank space between them or allow overlaping
You must play with these three parameters until you obtain the desired histogram: smoother, sharper, etc...
These are some of the different kind of charts you can setup thru the settings:
• Balanced Waindrops (default): charts with waindrops where the two halfs are of same size.
This is the default chart, just select a period (30m, 60m, 120m, 240m, pick your poison), adjust the histogram ticks and pixels and watch
• Unbalanced Waindrops: chart with waindrops where the two halfs are of different sizes.
Do you trade futures and want to plot a waindrop with the first half for the overnight session and the second half for the cash session? you got it;
just adjust the period to 1860 for any CME ticker (like ES1! for example) adjust the histogram ticks and pixels and watch
• Full Session Volume Profile: chart with waindrops where only the first half plots.
Do you use Volume profile to analize the market? Lucky you, now you can trick this one to plot it, just try a period of 780 on SPY, 2760 on ES1!, or 2880 on EURUSD
remember to adjust the histogram ticks and pixels for each underlying
• Only Bars: charts with only central and vwap bars plotted, simply deactivate the histogram and volume labels
• Only Histogram: charts with only the histogram plotted (volume profile charts), simply deactivate the bars and volume labels
• Only Volume: charts with only the raw volume numbers plotted, simply deactivate the bars and histogram
If you wanna know more about custom full session periods for different asset classes, read the HELP INFO accessible from the settings panel
EXAMPLES
Full Session Volume Profile on MES 5m chart:
Full Session Unbalanced Waindrop on MNQ 2m chart (left side Overnight session, right side Cash Session):
The following examples will have the exact same charts but on four different tickers representing a futures contract, a forex pair, an etf and a stock.
We are doing this to be able to see the different parameters we need for plotting the same kind of chart on different assets
The chart composition is as follows:
• Left side: Volume Labels chart (period 10)
• Upper Right side: Waindrops (period 60)
• Lower Right side: Full Session Volume Profile
The first example will specify the main parameters, the rest of the charts will have only the differences
MES :
• Left: Period size: 10, Bars: uncheck, Histogram: uncheck, Execution window: 1, Ticks per bar: 2, Updates per period: EACH BAR,
Pixels per bar: 4, Volume labels: check, Track price: check
• Upper Right: Period size: 60, Bars: check, Bars color mode: HISTOGRAM, Histogram: check, Execution window: 2, Ticks per bar: 2,
Updates per period: EACH BAR, Pixels per bar: 4, Volume labels: uncheck, Track price: check
• Lower Right: Period size: 2760, Bars: uncheck, Histogram: check, Execution window: 1, Ticks per bar: 1, Updates per period: EACH BAR,
Pixels per bar: 2, Volume labels: uncheck, Track price: check
EURUSD :
• Upper Right: Ticks per bar: 10
• Lower Right: Period size: 2880, Ticks per bar: 1, Pixels per bar: 1
SPY :
• Left: Ticks per bar: 3
• Upper Right: Ticks per bar: 5, Pixels per bar: 3
• Lower Right: Period size: 780, Ticks per bar: 2, Pixels per bar: 2
AAPL :
• Left: Ticks per bar: 2
• Upper Right: Ticks per bar: 6, Pixels per bar: 3
• Lower Right: Period size: 780, Ticks per bar: 1, Pixels per bar: 2
█ THANKS TO
PineCoders for all they do, all the tools and help they provide and their involvement in making a better community
scarf for the idea of coding a waindrops like indicator, I did not know something like that existed at all
All the Pine Coders, Pine Pros and Pine Wizards, people who share their work and knowledge for the sake of it and helping others, I'm very grateful indeed
I'm learning at each step of the way from you all, thanks for this awesome community;
Opensource and shared knowledge: this is the way! (said with canned voice from inside my helmet :D)
█ NOTE
This description was formatted following THIS guidelines
═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
I sincerely hope you enjoy reading and using this work as much as I enjoyed developing it :D
GOOD LUCK AND HAPPY TRADING!
Delta Volume Columns Pro [LucF]█ OVERVIEW
This indicator displays volume delta information calculated with intrabar inspection on historical bars, and feed updates when running in realtime. It is designed to run in a pane and can display either stacked buy/sell volume columns or a signal line which can be calculated and displayed in many different ways.
Five different models are offered to reveal different characteristics of the calculated volume delta information. Many options are offered to visualize the calculations, giving you much leeway in morphing the indicator's visuals to suit your needs. If you value delta volume information, I hope you will find the time required to master Delta Volume Columns Pro well worth the investment. I am confident that if you combine a proper understanding of the indicator's information with an intimate knowledge of the volume idiosyncrasies on the markets you trade, you can extract useful market intelligence using this tool.
█ WARNINGS
1. The indicator only works on markets where volume information is available,
Please validate that your symbol's feed carries volume information before asking me why the indicator doesn't plot values.
2. When you refresh your chart or re-execute the script on the chart, the indicator will repaint because elapsed realtime bars will then recalculate as historical bars.
3. Because the indicator uses different modes of calculation on historical and realtime bars, it's critical that you understand the differences between them. Details are provided further down.
4. Calculations using intrabar inspection on historical bars can only be done from some chart timeframes. See further down for a list of supported timeframes.
If the chart's timeframe is not supported, no historical volume delta will display.
█ CONCEPTS
Chart bars
Three different types of bars are used in charts:
1. Historical bars are bars that have already closed when the script executes on them.
2. The realtime bar is the current, incomplete bar where a script is running on an open market. There is only one active realtime bar on your chart at any given time.
The realtime bar is where alerts trigger.
3. Elapsed realtime bars are bars that were calculated when they were realtime bars but have since closed.
When a script re-executes on a chart because the browser tab is refreshed or some of its inputs are changed, elapsed realtime bars are recalculated as historical bars.
Why does this indicator use two modes of calculation?
Historical bars on TradingView charts contain OHLCV data only, which is insufficient to calculate volume delta on them with any level of precision. To mine more detailed information from those bars we look at intrabars , i.e., bars from a smaller timeframe (we call it the intrabar timeframe ) that are contained in one chart bar. If your chart Is running at 1D on a 24x7 market for example, most 1D chart bars will contain 24 underlying 1H bars in their dilation. On historical bars, this indicator looks at those intrabars to amass volume delta information. If the intrabar is up, its volume goes in the Buy bin, and inversely for the Sell bin. When price does not move on an intrabar, the polarity of the last known movement is used to determine in which bin its volume goes.
In realtime, we have access to price and volume change for each update of the chart. Because a 1D chart bar can be updated tens of thousands of times during the day, volume delta calculations on those updates is much more precise. This precision, however, comes at a price:
— The script must be running on the chart for it to keep calculating in realtime.
— If you refresh your chart you will lose all accumulated realtime calculations on elapsed realtime bars, and the realtime bar.
Elapsed realtime bars will recalculate as historical bars, i.e., using intrabar inspection, and the realtime bar's calculations will reset.
When the script recalculates elapsed realtime bars as historical bars, the values on those bars will change, which means the script repaints in those conditions.
— When the indicator first calculates on a chart containing an incomplete realtime bar, it will count ALL the existing volume on the bar as Buy or Sell volume,
depending on the polarity of the bar at that point. This will skew calculations for that first bar. Scripts have no access to the history of a realtime bar's previous updates,
and intrabar inspection cannot be used on realtime bars, so this is the only to go about this.
— Even if alerts only trigger upon confirmation of their conditions after the realtime bar closes, they are repainting alerts
because they would perhaps not have calculated the same way using intrabar inspection.
— On markets like stocks that often have different EOD and intraday feeds and volume information,
the volume's scale may not be the same for the realtime bar if your chart is at 1D, for example,
and the indicator is using an intraday timeframe to calculate on historical bars.
— Any chart timeframe can be used in realtime mode, but plots that include moving averages in their calculations may require many elapsed realtime bars before they can calculate.
You might prefer drastically reducing the periods of the moving averages, or using the volume columns mode, which displays instant values, instead of the line.
Volume Delta Balances
This indicator uses a variety of methods to evaluate five volume delta balances and derive other values from those balances. The five balances are:
1 — On Bar Balance : This is the only balance using instant values; it is simply the subtraction of the Sell volume from the Buy volume on the bar.
2 — Average Balance : Calculates a distinct EMA for both the Buy and Sell volumes, and subtracts the Sell EMA from the Buy EMA.
3 — Momentum Balance : Starts by calculating, separately for both Buy and Sell volumes, the difference between the same EMAs used in "Average Balance" and
an SMA of double the period used for the "Average Balance" EMAs. The difference for the Sell side is subtracted from the difference for the Buy side,
and an RSI of that value is calculated and brought over the −50/+50 scale.
4 — Relative Balance : The reference values used in the calculation are the Buy and Sell EMAs used in the "Average Balance".
From those, we calculate two intermediate values using how much the instant Buy and Sell volumes on the bar exceed their respective EMA — but with a twist.
If the bar's Buy volume does not exceed the EMA of Buy volume, a zero value is used. The same goes for the Sell volume with the EMA of Sell volume.
Once we have our two intermediate values for the Buy and Sell volumes exceeding their respective MA, we subtract them. The final "Relative Balance" value is an ALMA of that subtraction.
The rationale behind using zero values when the bar's Buy/Sell volume does not exceed its EMA is to only take into account the more significant volume.
If both instant volume values exceed their MA, then the difference between the two is the signal's value.
The signal is called "relative" because the intermediate values are the difference between the instant Buy/Sell volumes and their respective MA.
This balance flatlines when the bar's Buy/Sell volumes do not exceed their EMAs, which makes it useful to spot areas where trader interest dwindles, such as consolidations.
The smaller the period of the final value's ALMA, the more easily you will see the balance flatline. These flat zones should be considered no-trade zones.
5 — Percent Balance : This balance is the ALMA of the ratio of the "On Bar Balance" value, i.e., the volume delta balance on the bar (which can be positive or negative),
over the total volume for that bar.
From the balances and marker conditions, two more values are calculated:
1 — Marker Bias : It sums the up/down (+1/‒1) occurrences of the markers 1 to 4 over a period you define, so it ranges from −4 to +4, times the period.
Its calculation will depend on the modes used to calculate markers 3 and 4.
2 — Combined Balances : This is the sum of the bull/bear (+1/−1) states of each of the five balances, so it ranges from −5 to +5.
█ FEATURES
The indicator has two main modes of operation: Columns and Line .
Columns
• In Columns mode you can display stacked Buy/Sell volume columns.
• The buy section always appears above the centerline, the sell section below.
• The top and bottom sections can be colored independently using eight different methods.
• The EMAs of the Buy/Sell values can be displayed (these are the same EMAs used to calculate the "Average Balance").
Line
• Displays one of seven signals: the five balances or one of two complementary values, i.e., the "Marker Bias" or the "Combined Balances".
• You can color the line and its fill using independent calculation modes to pack more information in the display.
You can thus appraise the state of 3 different values using the line itself, its color and the color of its fill.
• A "Divergence Levels" feature will use the line to automatically draw expanding levels on divergence events.
Default settings
Using the indicator's default settings, this is the information displayed:
• The line is calculated on the "Average Balance".
• The line's color is determined by the bull/bear state of the "Percent Balance".
• The line's fill gradient is determined by the advances/declines of the "Momentum Balance".
• The orange divergence dots are calculated using discrepancies between the polarity of the "On Bar Balance" and the chart's bar.
• The divergence levels are determined using the line's level when a divergence occurs.
• The background's fill gradient is calculated on advances/declines of the "Marker Bias".
• The chart bars are colored using advances/declines of the "Relative Balance". Divergences are shown in orange.
• The intrabar timeframe is automatically determined from the chart's timeframe so that a minimum of 50 intrabars are used to calculate volume delta on historical bars.
Alerts
The configuration of the marker conditions explained further is what determines the conditions that will trigger alerts created from this script. Note that simply selecting the display of markers does not create alerts. To create an alert on this script, you must use ALT-A from the chart. You can create multiple alerts triggering on different conditions from this same script; simply configure the markers so they define the trigger conditions for each alert before creating the alert. The configuration of the script's inputs is saved with the alert, so from then on you can change them without affecting the alert. Alert messages will mention the marker(s) that triggered the specific alert event. Keep in mind, when creating alerts on small chart timeframes, that discrepancies between alert triggers and markers displayed on your chart are to be expected. This is because the alert and your chart are running two distinct instances of the indicator on different servers and different feeds. Also keep in mind that while alerts only trigger on confirmed conditions, they are calculated using realtime calculation mode, which entails that if you refresh your chart and elapsed realtime bars recalculate as historical bars using intrabar inspection, markers will not appear in the same places they appeared in realtime. So it's important to understand that even though the alert conditions are confirmed when they trigger, these alerts will repaint.
Let's go through the sections of the script's inputs.
Columns
The size of the Buy/Sell columns always represents their respective importance on the bar, but the coloring mode for tops and bottoms is independent. The default setup uses a standard coloring mode where the Buy/Sell columns are always in the bull/bear color with a higher intensity for the winning side. Seven other coloring modes allow you to pack more information in the columns. When choosing to color the top columns using a bull/bear gradient on "Average Balance", for example, you will have bull/bear colored tops. In order for the color of the bottom columns to continue to show the instant bar balance, you can then choose the "On Bar Balance — Dual Solid Colors" coloring mode to make those bars the color of the winning side for that bar. You can display the averages of the Buy and Sell columns. If you do, its coloring is controlled through the "Line" and "Line fill" sections below.
Line and Line fill
You can select the calculation mode and the thickness of the line, and independent calculations to determine the line's color and fill.
Zero Line
The zero line can display dots when all five balances are bull/bear.
Divergences
You first select the detection mode. Divergences occur whenever the up/down direction of the signal does not match the up/down polarity of the bar. Divergences are used in three components of the indicator's visuals: the orange dot, colored chart bars, and to calculate the divergence levels on the line. The divergence levels are dynamic levels that automatically build from the line's values on divergence events. On consecutive divergences, the levels will expand, creating a channel. This implementation of the divergence levels corresponds to my view that divergences indicate anomalies, hesitations, points of uncertainty if you will. It precludes any attempt to identify a directional bias to divergences. Accordingly, the levels merely take note of divergence events and mark those points in time with levels. Traders then have a reference point from which they can evaluate further movement. The bull/bear/neutral colors used to plot the levels are also congruent with this view in that they are determined by the line's position relative to the levels, which is how I think divergences can be put to the most effective use. One of the coloring modes for the line's fill uses advances/declines in the line after divergence events.
Background
The background can show a bull/bear gradient on six different calculations. As with other gradients, you can adjust its brightness to make its importance proportional to how you use it in your analysis.
Chart bars
Chart bars can be colored using seven different methods. You have the option of emptying the body of bars where volume does not increase, as does my TLD indicator, and you can choose whether you want to show divergences.
Intrabar Timeframe
This is the intrabar timeframe that will be used to calculate volume delta using intrabar inspection on historical bars. You can choose between four modes. The three "Auto-steps" modes calculate, from the chart's timeframe, the intrabar timeframe where the said number of intrabars will make up the dilation of chart bars. Adjustments are made for non-24x7 markets. "Fixed" mode allows you to select the intrabar timeframe you want. Checking the "Show TF" box will display in the lower-right corner the intrabar timeframe used at any given moment. The proper selection of the intrabar timeframe is important. It must achieve maximal granularity to produce precise results while not unduly slowing down calculations, or worse, causing runtime errors. Note that historical depth will vary with the intrabar timeframe. The smaller the timeframe, the shallower historical plots you will be.
Markers
Markers appear when the required condition has been confirmed on a closed bar. The configuration of the markers when you create an alert is what determines when the alert will trigger. Five markers are available:
• Balances Agreement : All five balances are either bullish or bearish.
• Double Bumps : A double bump is two consecutive up/down bars with +/‒ volume delta, and rising Buy/Sell volume above its average.
• Divergence confirmations : A divergence is confirmed up/down when the chosen balance is up/down on the previous bar when that bar was down/up, and this bar is up/down.
• Balance Shifts : These are bull/bear transitions of the selected signal.
• Marker Bias Shifts : Marker bias shifts occur when it crosses into bull/bear territory.
Periods
Allows control over the periods of the different moving averages used to calculate the balances.
Volume Discrepancies
Stock exchanges do not report the same volume for intraday and daily (or higher) resolutions. Other variations in how volume information is reported can also occur in other markets, namely Forex, where volume irregularities can even occur between different intraday timeframes. This will cause discrepancies between the total volume on the bar at the chart's timeframe, and the total volume calculated by adding the volume of the intrabars in that bar's dilation. This does not necessarily invalidate the volume delta information calculated from intrabars, but it tells us that we are using partial volume data. A mechanism to detect chart vs intrabar timeframe volume discrepancies is provided. It allows you to define a threshold percentage above which the background will indicate a difference has been detected.
Other Settings
You can control here the display of the gray dot reminder on realtime bars, and the display of error messages if you are using a chart timeframe that is not greater than the fixed intrabar timeframe, when you use that mode. Disabling the message can be useful if you only use realtime mode at chart timeframes that do not support intrabar inspection.
█ RAMBLINGS
On Volume Delta
Volume is arguably the best complement to interpret price action, and I consider volume delta to be the most effective way of processing volume information. In periods of low-volatility price consolidations, volume will typically also be lower than normal, but slight imbalances in the trend of the buy/sell volume balance can sometimes help put early odds on the direction of the break from consolidation. Additionally, the progression of the volume imbalance can help determine the proximity of the breakout. I also find volume delta and the number of divergences very useful to evaluate the strength of trends. In trends, I am looking for "slow and steady", i.e., relatively low volatility and pauses where price action doesn't look like world affairs are being reassessed. In my personal mythology, this type of trend is often more resilient than high-volatility breakouts, especially when volume balance confirms the general agreement of traders signaled by the low-volatility usually accompanying this type of trend. The volume action on pauses will often help me decide between aggressively taking profits, tightening a stop or going for a longer-term movement. As for reversals, they generally occur in high-volatility areas where entering trades is more expensive and riskier. While the identification of counter-trend reversals fascinates many traders to no end, they represent poor opportunities in my view. Volume imbalances often precede reversals, but I prefer to use volume delta information to identify the areas following reversals where I can confirm them and make relatively low-cost entries with better odds.
On "Buy/Sell" Volume
Buying or selling volume are misnomers, as every unit of volume transacted is both bought and sold by two different traders. While this does not keep me from using the terms, there is no such thing as “buy only” or “sell only” volume. Trader lingo is riddled with peculiarities.
Divergences
The divergence detection method used here relies on a difference between the direction of a signal and the polarity (up/down) of a chart bar. When using the default "On Bar Balance" to detect divergences, however, only the bar's volume delta is used. You may wonder how there can be divergences between buying/selling volume information and price movement on one bar. This will sometimes be due to the calculation's shortcomings, but divergences may also occur in instances where because of order book structure, it takes less volume to increase the price of an asset than it takes to decrease it. As usual, divergences are points of interest because they reveal imbalances, which may or may not become turning points. To your pattern-hungry brain, the divergences displayed by this indicator will — as they do on other indicators — appear to often indicate turnarounds. My opinion is that reality is generally quite sobering and I have no reliable information that would tend to prove otherwise. Exercise caution when using them. Consequently, I do not share the overwhelming enthusiasm of traders in identifying bullish/bearish divergences. For me, the best course of action when a divergence occurs is to wait and see what happens from there. That is the rationale underlying how my divergence levels work; they take note of a signal's level when a divergence occurs, and it's the signal's behavior from that point on that determines if the post-divergence action is bullish/bearish.
Superfluity
In "The Bed of Procrustes", Nassim Nicholas Taleb writes: To bankrupt a fool, give him information . This indicator can display lots of information. While learning to use a new indicator inevitably requires an adaptation period where we put it through its paces and try out all its options, once you have become used to it and decide to adopt it, rigorously eliminate the components you don't use and configure the remaining ones so their visual prominence reflects their relative importance in your analysis. I tried to provide flexible options for traders to control this indicator's visuals for that exact reason — not for window dressing.
█ LIMITATIONS
• This script uses a special characteristic of the `security()` function allowing the inspection of intrabars — which is not officially supported by TradingView.
It has the advantage of permitting a more robust calculation of volume delta than other methods on historical bars, but also has its limits.
• Intrabar inspection only works on some chart timeframes: 3, 5, 10, 15 and 30 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 12 hours, 1 day, 1 week and 1 month.
The script’s code can be modified to run on other resolutions.
• When the difference between the chart’s timeframe and the intrabar timeframe is too great, runtime errors will occur. The Auto-Steps selection mechanisms should avoid this.
• All volume is not created equally. Its source, components, quality and reliability will vary considerably with sectors and instruments.
The higher the quality, the more reliably volume delta information can be used to guide your decisions.
You should make it your responsibility to understand the volume information provided in the data feeds you use. It will help you make the most of volume delta.
█ NOTES
For traders
• The Data Window shows key values for the indicator.
• While this indicator displays some of the same information calculated in my Delta Volume Columns ,
I have elected to make it a separate publication so that traders continue to have a simpler alternative available to them. Both code bases will continue to evolve separately.
• All gradients used in this indicator determine their brightness intensities using advances/declines in the signal—not their relative position in a pre-determined scale.
• Volume delta being relative, by nature, it is particularly well-suited to Forex markets, as it filters out quite elegantly the cyclical volume data characterizing the sector.
If you are interested in volume delta, consider having a look at my other "Delta Volume" indicators:
• Delta Volume Realtime Action displays realtime volume delta and tick information on the chart.
• Delta Volume Candles builds volume delta candles on the chart.
• Delta Volume Columns is a simpler version of this indicator.
For coders
• I use the `f_c_gradientRelativePro()` from the PineCoders Color Gradient Framework to build my gradients.
This function has the advantage of allowing begin/end colors for both the bull and bear colors. It also allows us to define the number of steps allowed for each gradient.
I use this to modulate the gradients so they perform optimally on the combination of the signal used to calculate advances/declines,
but also the nature of the visual component the gradient applies to. I use fewer steps for choppy signals and when the gradient is used on discrete visual components
such as volume columns or chart bars.
• I use the PineCoders Coding Conventions for Pine to write my scripts.
• I used functions modified from the PineCoders MTF Selection Framework for the selection of timeframes.
█ THANKS TO:
— The devs from TradingView's Pine and other teams, and the PineCoders who collaborate with them. They are doing amazing work,
and much of what this indicator does could not be done without their recent improvements to Pine.
— A guy called Kuan who commented on a Backtest Rookies presentation of their Volume Profile indicator using a `for` loop.
This indicator started from the intrabar inspection technique illustrated in Kuan's snippet.
— theheirophant , my partner in the exploration of the sometimes weird abysses of `security()`’s behavior at intrabar timeframes.
— midtownsk8rguy , my brilliant companion in mining the depths of Pine graphics.
ORB Fusion🎯 CORE INNOVATION: INSTITUTIONAL ORB FRAMEWORK WITH FAILED BREAKOUT INTELLIGENCE
ORB Fusion represents a complete institutional-grade Opening Range Breakout system combining classic Market Profile concepts (Initial Balance, day type classification) with modern algorithmic breakout detection, failed breakout reversal logic, and comprehensive statistical tracking. Rather than simply drawing lines at opening range extremes, this system implements the full trading methodology used by professional floor traders and market makers—including the critical concept that failed breakouts are often higher-probability setups than successful breakouts .
The Opening Range Hypothesis:
The first 30-60 minutes of trading establishes the day's value area —the price range where the majority of participants agree on fair value. This range is formed during peak information flow (overnight news digestion, gap reactions, early institutional positioning). Breakouts from this range signal directional conviction; failures to hold breakouts signal trapped participants and create exploitable reversals.
Why Opening Range Matters:
1. Information Aggregation : Opening range reflects overnight news, pre-market sentiment, and early institutional orders. It's the market's initial "consensus" on value.
2. Liquidity Concentration : Stop losses cluster just outside opening range. Breakouts trigger these stops, creating momentum. Failed breakouts trap traders, forcing reversals.
3. Statistical Persistence : Markets exhibit range expansion tendency —when price accepts above/below opening range with volume, it often extends 1.0-2.0x the opening range size before mean reversion.
4. Institutional Behavior : Large players (market makers, institutions) use opening range as reference for the day's trading plan. They fade extremes in rotation days and follow breakouts in trend days.
Historical Context:
Opening Range Breakout methodology originated in commodity futures pits (1970s-80s) where floor traders noticed consistent patterns: the first 30-60 minutes established a "fair value zone," and directional moves occurred when this zone was violated with conviction. J. Peter Steidlmayer formalized this observation in Market Profile theory, introducing the "Initial Balance" concept—the first hour (two 30-minute periods) defining market structure.
📊 OPENING RANGE CONSTRUCTION
Four ORB Timeframe Options:
1. 5-Minute ORB (0930-0935 ET):
Captures immediate market direction during "opening drive"—the explosive first few minutes when overnight orders hit the tape.
Use Case:
• Scalping strategies
• High-frequency breakout trading
• Extremely liquid instruments (ES, NQ, SPY)
Characteristics:
• Very tight range (often 0.2-0.5% of price)
• Early breakouts common (7 of 10 days break within first hour)
• Higher false breakout rate (50-60%)
• Requires sub-minute chart monitoring
Psychology: Captures panic buyers/sellers reacting to overnight news. Range is small because sample size is minimal—only 5 minutes of price discovery. Early breakouts often fail because they're driven by retail FOMO rather than institutional conviction.
2. 15-Minute ORB (0930-0945 ET):
Balances responsiveness with statistical validity. Captures opening drive plus initial reaction to that drive.
Use Case:
• Day trading strategies
• Balanced scalping/swing hybrid
• Most liquid instruments
Characteristics:
• Moderate range (0.4-0.8% of price typically)
• Breakout rate ~60% of days
• False breakout rate ~40-45%
• Good balance of opportunity and reliability
Psychology: Includes opening panic AND the first retest/consolidation. Sophisticated traders (institutions, algos) start expressing directional bias. This is the "Goldilocks" timeframe—not too reactive, not too slow.
3. 30-Minute ORB (0930-1000 ET):
Classic ORB timeframe. Default for most professional implementations.
Use Case:
• Standard intraday trading
• Position sizing for full-day trades
• All liquid instruments (equities, indices, futures)
Characteristics:
• Substantial range (0.6-1.2% of price)
• Breakout rate ~55% of days
• False breakout rate ~35-40%
• Statistical sweet spot for extensions
Psychology: Full opening auction + first institutional repositioning complete. By 10:00 AM ET, headlines are digested, early stops are hit, and "real" directional players reveal themselves. This is when institutional programs typically finish their opening positioning.
Statistical Advantage: 30-minute ORB shows highest correlation with daily range. When price breaks and holds outside 30m ORB, probability of reaching 1.0x extension (doubling the opening range) exceeds 60% historically.
4. 60-Minute ORB (0930-1030 ET) - Initial Balance:
Steidlmayer's "Initial Balance"—the foundation of Market Profile theory.
Use Case:
• Swing trading entries
• Day type classification
• Low-frequency institutional setups
Characteristics:
• Wide range (0.8-1.5% of price)
• Breakout rate ~45% of days
• False breakout rate ~25-30% (lowest)
• Best for trend day identification
Psychology: Full first hour captures A-period (0930-1000) and B-period (1000-1030). By 10:30 AM ET, all early positioning is complete. Market has "voted" on value. Subsequent price action confirms (trend day) or rejects (rotation day) this value assessment.
Initial Balance Theory:
IB represents the market's accepted value area . When price extends significantly beyond IB (>1.5x IB range), it signals a Trend Day —strong directional conviction. When price remains within 1.0x IB, it signals a Rotation Day —mean reversion environment. This classification completely changes trading strategy.
🔬 LTF PRECISION TECHNOLOGY
The Chart Timeframe Problem:
Traditional ORB indicators calculate range using the chart's current timeframe. This creates critical inaccuracies:
Example:
• You're on a 5-minute chart
• ORB period is 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET)
• Indicator sees only 6 bars (30min ÷ 5min/bar = 6 bars)
• If any 5-minute bar has extreme wick, entire ORB is distorted
The Problem Amplifies:
• On 15-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 2 bars sampled
• On 30-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 1 bar sampled
• Opening spike or single large wick defines entire range (invalid)
Solution: Lower Timeframe (LTF) Precision:
ORB Fusion uses `request.security_lower_tf()` to sample 1-minute bars regardless of chart timeframe:
```
For 30-minute ORB on 15-minute chart:
- Traditional method: Uses 2 bars (15min × 2 = 30min)
- LTF Precision: Requests thirty 1-minute bars, calculates true high/low
```
Why This Matters:
Scenario: ES futures, 15-minute chart, 30-minute ORB
• Traditional ORB: High = 5850.00, Low = 5842.00 (range = 8 points)
• LTF Precision ORB: High = 5848.50, Low = 5843.25 (range = 5.25 points)
Difference: 2.75 points distortion from single 15-minute wick hitting 5850.00 at 9:31 AM then immediately reversing. LTF precision filters this out by seeing it was a fleeting wick, not a sustained high.
Impact on Extensions:
With inflated range (8 points vs 5.25 points):
• 1.5x extension projects +12 points instead of +7.875 points
• Difference: 4.125 points (nearly $200 per ES contract)
• Breakout signals trigger late; extension targets unreachable
Implementation:
```pinescript
getLtfHighLow() =>
float ha = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", high)
float la = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", low)
```
Function returns arrays of 1-minute high/low values, then finds true maximum and minimum across all samples.
When LTF Precision Activates:
Only when chart timeframe exceeds ORB session window:
• 5-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF used (chart TF > session bars needed)
• 1-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF not needed (direct sampling sufficient)
Recommendation: Always enable LTF Precision unless you're on 1-minute charts. The computational overhead is negligible, and accuracy improvement is substantial.
⚖️ INITIAL BALANCE (IB) FRAMEWORK
Steidlmayer's Market Profile Innovation:
J. Peter Steidlmayer developed Market Profile in the 1980s for the Chicago Board of Trade. His key insight: market structure is best understood through time-at-price (value area) rather than just price-over-time (traditional charts).
Initial Balance Definition:
IB is the price range established during the first hour of trading, subdivided into:
• A-Period : First 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET for US equities)
• B-Period : Second 30 minutes (1000-1030 ET)
A-Period vs B-Period Comparison:
The relationship between A and B periods forecasts the day:
B-Period Expansion (Bullish):
• B-period high > A-period high
• B-period low ≥ A-period low
• Interpretation: Buyers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bullish continuation likely
• Strategy: Buy pullbacks to A-period high (now support)
B-Period Expansion (Bearish):
• B-period low < A-period low
• B-period high ≤ A-period high
• Interpretation: Sellers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bearish continuation likely
• Strategy: Sell rallies to A-period low (now resistance)
B-Period Contraction:
• B-period stays within A-period range
• Interpretation: Market indecisive, digesting A-period information
• Implication: Rotation day likely, stay range-bound
• Strategy: Fade extremes, sell high/buy low within IB
IB Extensions:
Professional traders use IB as a ruler to project price targets:
Extension Levels:
• 0.5x IB : Initial probe outside value (minor target)
• 1.0x IB : Full extension (major target for normal days)
• 1.5x IB : Trend day threshold (classifies as trending)
• 2.0x IB : Strong trend day (rare, ~10-15% of days)
Calculation:
```
IB Range = IB High - IB Low
Bull Extension 1.0x = IB High + (IB Range × 1.0)
Bear Extension 1.0x = IB Low - (IB Range × 1.0)
```
Example:
ES futures:
• IB High: 5850.00
• IB Low: 5842.00
• IB Range: 8.00 points
Extensions:
• 1.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 8 = 5858.00
• 1.5x Bull Target: 5850 + 12 = 5862.00
• 2.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 16 = 5866.00
If price reaches 5862.00 (1.5x), day is classified as Trend Day —strategy shifts from mean reversion to trend following.
📈 DAY TYPE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Four Day Types (Market Profile Framework):
1. TREND DAY:
Definition: Price extends ≥1.5x IB range in one direction and stays there.
Characteristics:
• Opens and never returns to IB
• Persistent directional movement
• Volume increases as day progresses (conviction building)
• News-driven or strong institutional flow
Frequency: ~20-25% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Follow the trend, trail stops, let winners run
• DON'T: Fade extremes, take early profits
• Key: Add to position on pullbacks to previous extension level
• Risk: Getting chopped in false trend (see Failed Breakout section)
Example: FOMC decision, payroll report, earnings surprise—anything creating one-sided conviction.
2. NORMAL DAY:
Definition: Price extends 0.5-1.5x IB, tests both sides, returns to IB.
Characteristics:
• Two-sided trading
• Extensions occur but don't persist
• Volume balanced throughout day
• Most common day type
Frequency: ~45-50% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Take profits at extension levels, expect reversals
• DON'T: Hold for massive moves
• Key: Treat each extension as a profit-taking opportunity
• Risk: Holding too long when momentum shifts
Example: Typical day with no major catalysts—market balancing supply and demand.
3. ROTATION DAY:
Definition: Price stays within IB all day, rotating between high and low.
Characteristics:
• Never accepts outside IB
• Multiple tests of IB high/low
• Decreasing volume (no conviction)
• Classic range-bound action
Frequency: ~25-30% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Fade extremes (sell IB high, buy IB low)
• DON'T: Chase breakouts
• Key: Enter at extremes with tight stops just outside IB
• Risk: Breakout finally occurs after multiple failures
Example: [/b> Pre-holiday trading, summer doldrums, consolidation after big move.
4. DEVELOPING:
Definition: Day type not yet determined (early in session).
Usage: Classification before 12:00 PM ET when IB extension pattern unclear.
ORB Fusion's Classification Algorithm:
```pinescript
if close > ibHigh:
ibExtension = (close - ibHigh) / ibRange
direction = "BULLISH"
else if close < ibLow:
ibExtension = (ibLow - close) / ibRange
direction = "BEARISH"
if ibExtension >= 1.5:
dayType = "TREND DAY"
else if ibExtension >= 0.5:
dayType = "NORMAL DAY"
else if close within IB:
dayType = "ROTATION DAY"
```
Why Classification Matters:
Same setup (bullish ORB breakout) has opposite implications:
• Trend Day : Hold for 2.0x extension, trail stops aggressively
• Normal Day : Take profits at 1.0x extension, watch for reversal
• Rotation Day : Fade the breakout immediately (likely false)
Knowing day type prevents catastrophic errors like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
🚀 BREAKOUT DETECTION & CONFIRMATION
Three Confirmation Methods:
1. Close Beyond Level (Recommended):
Logic: Candle must close above ORB high (bull) or below ORB low (bear).
Why:
• Filters out wicks (temporary liquidity grabs)
• Ensures sustained acceptance above/below range
• Reduces false breakout rate by ~20-30%
Example:
• ORB High: 5850.00
• Bar high touches 5850.50 (wick above)
• Bar closes at 5848.00 (inside range)
• Result: NO breakout signal
vs.
• Bar high touches 5850.50
• Bar closes at 5851.00 (outside range)
• Result: BREAKOUT signal confirmed
Trade-off: Slightly delayed entry (wait for close) but much higher reliability.
2. Wick Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Any touch of ORB high/low triggers breakout.
Why:
• Earliest possible entry
• Captures aggressive momentum moves
Risk:
• High false breakout rate (60-70%)
• Stop runs trigger signals
• Requires very tight stops (difficult to manage)
Use Case: Scalping with 1-2 point profit targets where any penetration = trade.
3. Body Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Candle body (close vs open) must be entirely outside range.
Why:
• Strictest confirmation
• Ensures directional conviction (not just momentum)
• Lowest false breakout rate
Example: Trade-off: [/b> Very conservative—misses some valid breakouts but rarely triggers on false ones.
Volume Confirmation Layer:
All confirmation methods can require volume validation:
Volume Multiplier Logic: Rationale: [/b> True breakouts are driven by institutional activity (large size). Volume spike confirms real conviction vs. stop-run manipulation.
Statistical Impact: [/b>
• Breakouts with volume confirmation: ~65% success rate
• Breakouts without volume: ~45% success rate
• Difference: 20 percentage points edge
Implementation Note: [/b>
Volume confirmation adds complexity—you'll miss breakouts that work but lack volume. However, when targeting 1.5x+ extensions (ambitious goals), volume confirmation becomes critical because those moves require sustained institutional participation.
Recommended Settings by Strategy: [/b>
Scalping (1-2 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: OFF
• Rationale: Quick in/out doesn't need perfection
Intraday Swing (5-10 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: ON (1.5x multiplier)
• Rationale: Balance reliability and opportunity
Position Trading (full-day holds): [/b>
• Method: Body
• Volume: ON (2.0x multiplier)
• Rationale: Must be certain—large stops require high win rate
🔥 FAILED BREAKOUT SYSTEM
The Core Insight: [/b>
Failed breakouts are often more profitable [/b> than successful breakouts because they create trapped traders with predictable behavior.
Failed Breakout Definition: [/b>
A breakout that:
1. Initially penetrates ORB level with confirmation
2. Attracts participants (volume spike, momentum)
3. Fails to extend (stalls or immediately reverses)
4. Returns inside ORB range within N bars
Psychology of Failure: [/b>
When breakout fails:
• Breakout buyers are trapped [/b>: Bought at ORB high, now underwater
• Early longs reduce: Take profit, fearful of reversal
• Shorts smell blood: See failed breakout as reversal signal
• Result: Cascade of selling as trapped bulls exit + new shorts enter
Mirror image for failed bearish breakouts (trapped shorts cover + new longs enter).
Failure Detection Parameters: [/b>
1. Failure Confirmation Bars (default: 3): [/b>
How many bars after breakout to confirm failure?
Logic: Settings: [/b>
• 2 bars: Aggressive failure detection (more signals, more false failures)
• 3 bars Balanced (default)
• 5-10 bars: Conservative (wait for clear reversal)
Why This Matters:
Too few bars: You call "failed breakout" when price is just consolidating before next leg.
Too many bars: You miss the reversal entry (price already back in range).
2. Failure Buffer (default: 0.1 ATR): [/b>
How far inside ORB must price return to confirm failure?
Formula: Why Buffer Matters: clear rejection [/b> (not just hovering at level).
Settings: [/b>
• 0.0 ATR: No buffer, immediate failure signal
• 0.1 ATR: Small buffer (default) - filters noise
• [b>0.2-0.3 ATR: Large buffer - only dramatic failures count
Example: Reversal Entry System: [/b>
When failure confirmed, system generates complete reversal trade:
For Failed Bull Breakout (Short Reversal): [/b>
Entry: [/b> Current close when failure confirmed
Stop Loss: [/b> Extreme high since breakout + 0.10 ATR padding
Target 1: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 0.5)
Target 2: Target 3: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 1.5)
Example:
• ORB High: 5850, ORB Low: 5842, Range: 8 points
• Breakout to 5853, fails, reverses to 5848 (entry)
• Stop: 5853 + 1 = 5854 (6 point risk)
• T1: 5850 - 4 = 5846 (-2 points, 1:3 R:R)
• T2: 5850 - 8 = 5842 (-6 points, 1:1 R:R)
• T3: 5850 - 12 = 5838 (-10 points, 1.67:1 R:R)
[b>Why These Targets? [/b>
• T1 (0.5x ORB below high): Trapped bulls start panic
• T2 (1.0x ORB = ORB Mid): Major retracement, momentum fully reversed
• T3 (1.5x ORB): Reversal extended, now targeting opposite side
Historical Performance: [/b>
Failed breakout reversals in ORB Fusion's tracking system show:
• Win Rate: 65-75% (significantly higher than initial breakouts)
• Average Winner: 1.2x ORB range
• Average Loser: 0.5x ORB range (protected by stop at extreme)
• Expectancy: Strongly positive even with <70% win rate
Why Failed Breakouts Outperform: [/b>
1. Information Advantage: You now know what price did (failed to extend). Initial breakout trades are speculative; reversal trades are reactive to confirmed failure.
2. Trapped Participant Pressure: Every trapped bull becomes a seller. This creates sustained pressure.
3. Stop Loss Clarity: Extreme high is obvious stop (just beyond recent high). Breakout trades have ambiguous stops (ORB mid? Recent low? Too wide or too tight).
4. Mean Reversion Edge: Failed breakouts return to value (ORB mid). Initial breakouts try to escape value (harder to sustain).
Critical Insight: [/b>
"The best trade is often the one that trapped everyone else."
Failed breakouts create asymmetric opportunity because you're trading against [/b> trapped participants rather than with [/b> them. When you see a failed breakout signal, you're seeing real-time evidence that the market rejected directional conviction—that's exploitable.
📐 FIBONACCI EXTENSION SYSTEM
Six Extension Levels: [/b>
Extensions project how far price will travel after ORB breakout. Based on Fibonacci ratios + empirical market behavior.
1. 1.272x (27.2% Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.272)
Psychology: [/b> Initial probe beyond ORB. Early momentum + trapped shorts (on bull side) covering.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~75-80% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• First resistance/support after breakout
• Partial profit target (take 30-50% off)
• Watch for rejection here (could signal failure in progress)
Why 1.272? [/b> Related to harmonic patterns (1.272 is √1.618). Empirically, markets often stall at 25-30% extension before deciding whether to continue or fail.
2. 1.5x (50% Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.5)
Psychology: [/b> Breakout gaining conviction. Requires sustained buying/selling (not just momentum spike).
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~60-65% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Major partial profit (take 50-70% off)
• Move stops to breakeven
• Trail remaining position
Why 1.5x? [/b> Classic halfway point to 2.0x. Markets often consolidate here before final push. If day type is "Normal," this is likely the high/low for the day.
3. 1.618x (Golden Ratio Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.618)
Psychology: [/b> Strong directional day. Institutional conviction + retail FOMO.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~45-50% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Final partial profit (close 80-90%)
• Trail remainder with wide stop (allow breathing room)
Why 1.618? [/b> Fibonacci golden ratio. Appears consistently in market geometry. When price reaches 1.618x extension, move is "mature" and reversal risk increases.
4. 2.0x (100% Extension): [/b>
Formula: ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.0)
Psychology: [/b> Trend day confirmed. Opening range completely duplicated.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~30-35% after confirmed breakout
Trading: Why 2.0x? [/b> Psychological level—range doubled. Also corresponds to typical daily ATR in many instruments (opening range ~ 0.5 ATR, daily range ~ 1.0 ATR).
5. 2.618x (Super Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.618)
Psychology: [/b> Parabolic move. News-driven or squeeze.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~10-15% after confirmed breakout
[b>Trading: Why 2.618? [/b> Fibonacci ratio (1.618²). Rare to reach—when it does, move is extreme. Often precedes multi-day consolidation or reversal.
6. 3.0x (Extreme Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 2.0)
Psychology: [/b> Market melt-up/crash. Only in extreme events.
[b>Probability of Reach: [/b> <5% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Close immediately if reached
• These are outlier events (black swans, flash crashes, squeeze-outs)
• Holding for more is greed—take windfall profit
Why 3.0x? [/b> Triple opening range. So rare it's statistical noise. When it happens, it's headline news.
Visual Example:
ES futures, ORB 5842-5850 (8 point range), Bullish breakout:
• ORB High : 5850.00 (entry zone)
• 1.272x : 5850 + 2.18 = 5852.18 (first resistance)
• 1.5x : 5850 + 4.00 = 5854.00 (major target)
• 1.618x : 5850 + 4.94 = 5854.94 (strong target)
• 2.0x : 5850 + 8.00 = 5858.00 (trend day)
• 2.618x : 5850 + 12.94 = 5862.94 (extreme)
• 3.0x : 5850 + 16.00 = 5866.00 (parabolic)
Profit-Taking Strategy:
Optimal scaling out at extensions:
• Breakout entry at 5850.50
• 30% off at 1.272x (5852.18) → +1.68 points
• 40% off at 1.5x (5854.00) → +3.50 points
• 20% off at 1.618x (5854.94) → +4.44 points
• 10% off at 2.0x (5858.00) → +7.50 points
[b>Average Exit: Conclusion: [/b> Scaling out at extensions produces 40% higher expectancy than holding for home runs.
📊 GAP ANALYSIS & FILL PSYCHOLOGY
[b>Gap Definition: [/b>
Price discontinuity between previous close and current open:
• Gap Up : Open > Previous Close + noise threshold (0.1 ATR)
• Gap Down : Open < Previous Close - noise threshold
Why Gaps Matter: [/b>
Gaps represent unfilled orders [/b>. When market gaps up, all limit buy orders between yesterday's close and today's open are never filled. Those buyers are "left behind." Psychology: they wait for price to return ("fill the gap") so they can enter. This creates magnetic pull [/b> toward gap level.
Gap Fill Statistics (Empirical): [/b>
• Gaps <0.5% [/b>: 85-90% fill within same day
• Gaps 0.5-1.0% [/b>: 70-75% fill within same day, 90%+ within week
• Gaps >1.0% [/b>: 50-60% fill within same day (major news often prevents fill)
Gap Fill Strategy: [/b>
Setup 1: Gap-and-Go
Gap opens, extends away from gap (doesn't fill).
• ORB confirms direction away from gap
• Trade WITH ORB breakout direction
• Expectation: Gap won't fill today (momentum too strong)
Setup 2: Gap-Fill Fade
Gap opens, but fails to extend. Price drifts back toward gap.
• ORB breakout TOWARD gap (not away)
• Trade toward gap fill level
• Target: Previous close (gap fill complete)
Setup 3: Gap-Fill Rejection
Gap fills (touches previous close) then rejects.
• ORB breakout AWAY from gap after fill
• Trade away from gap direction
• Thesis: Gap filled (orders executed), now resume original direction
[b>Example: Scenario A (Gap-and-Go):
• ORB breaks upward to $454 (away from gap)
• Trade: LONG breakout, expect continued rally
• Gap becomes support ($452)
Scenario B (Gap-Fill):
• ORB breaks downward through $452.50 (toward gap)
• Trade: SHORT toward gap fill at $450.00
• Target: $450.00 (gap filled), close position
Scenario C (Gap-Fill Rejection):
• Price drifts to $450.00 (gap filled) early in session
• ORB establishes $450-$451 after gap fill
• ORB breaks upward to $451.50
• Trade: LONG breakout (gap is filled, now resume rally)
ORB Fusion Integration: [/b>
Dashboard shows:
• Gap type (Up/Down/None)
• Gap size (percentage)
• Gap fill status (Filled ✓ / Open)
This informs setup confidence:
• ORB breakout AWAY from unfilled gap: +10% confidence (gap becomes support/resistance)
• ORB breakout TOWARD unfilled gap: -10% confidence (gap fill may override ORB)
[b>📈 VWAP & INSTITUTIONAL BIAS [/b>
[b>Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP): [/b>
Average price weighted by volume at each price level. Represents true "average" cost for the day.
[b>Calculation: Institutional Benchmark [/b>: Institutions (mutual funds, pension funds) use VWAP as performance benchmark. If they buy above VWAP, they underperformed; below VWAP, they outperformed.
2. [b>Algorithmic Target [/b>: Many algos are programmed to buy below VWAP and sell above VWAP to achieve "fair" execution.
3. [b>Support/Resistance [/b>: VWAP acts as dynamic support (price above) or resistance (price below).
[b>VWAP Bands (Standard Deviations): [/b>
• [b>1σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 1 standard deviation
- Contains ~68% of volume
- Normal trading range
- Bounces common
• [b>2σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 2 standard deviations
- Contains ~95% of volume
- Extreme extension
- Mean reversion likely
ORB + VWAP Confluence: [/b>
Highest-probability setups occur when ORB and VWAP align:
Bullish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout upward (bullish signal)
• Price above VWAP (institutional buying)
• Confidence boost: +15%
Bearish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout downward (bearish signal)
• Price below VWAP (institutional selling)
• Confidence boost: +15%
[b>Divergence Warning:
• ORB breakout upward BUT price below VWAP
• Conflict: Breakout says "buy," VWAP says "sell"
• Confidence penalty: -10%
• Interpretation: Retail buying but institutions not participating (lower quality breakout)
📊 MOMENTUM CONTEXT SYSTEM
[b>Innovation: Candle Coloring by Position
Rather than fixed support/resistance lines, ORB Fusion colors candles based on their [b>relationship to ORB :
[b>Three Zones: [/b>
1. Inside ORB (Blue Boxes): [/b>
[b>Calculation:
• Darker blue: Near extremes of ORB (potential breakout imminent)
• Lighter blue: Near ORB mid (consolidation)
[b>Trading: [/b> Coiled spring—await breakout.
[b>2. Above ORB (Green Boxes):
[b>Calculation: 3. Below ORB (Red Boxes):
Mirror of above ORB logic.
[b>Special Contexts: [/b>
[b>Breakout Bar (Darkest Green/Red): [/b>
The specific bar where breakout occurs gets maximum color intensity regardless of distance. This highlights the pivotal moment.
[b>Failed Breakout Bar (Orange/Warning): [/b>
When failed breakout is confirmed, that bar gets orange/warning color. Visual alert: "reversal opportunity here."
[b>Near Extension (Cyan/Magenta Tint): [/b>
When price is within 0.5 ATR of an extension level, candle gets tinted cyan (bull) or magenta (bear). Indicates "target approaching—prepare to take profit."
[b>Why Visual Context? [/b>
Traditional indicators show lines. ORB Fusion shows [b>context-aware momentum [/b>. Glance at chart:
• Lots of blue? Consolidation day (fade extremes).
• Progressive green? Trend day (follow).
• Green then orange? Failed breakout (reversal setup).
This visual language communicates market state instantly—no interpretation needed.
🎯 TRADE SETUP GENERATION & GRADING [/b>
[b>Algorithmic Setup Detection: [/b>
ORB Fusion continuously evaluates market state and generates current best trade setup with:
• Action (LONG / SHORT / FADE HIGH / FADE LOW / WAIT)
• Entry price
• Stop loss
• Three targets
• Risk:Reward ratio
• Confidence score (0-100)
• Grade (A+ to D)
[b>Setup Types: [/b>
[b>1. ORB LONG (Bullish Breakout): [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bullish ORB breakout confirmed
• Not failed
[b>Parameters:
• Entry: Current close
• Stop: ORB mid (protects against failure)
• T1: ORB High + 0.5x range (1.5x extension)
• T2: ORB High + 1.0x range (2.0x extension)
• T3: ORB High + 1.618x range (2.618x extension)
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bearish breakout occurred
• Failed (returned inside ORB)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: Close when failure confirmed
• Stop: Extreme low since breakout + 0.10 ATR
• T1: ORB Low + 0.5x range
• T2: ORB Low + 1.0x range (ORB mid)
• T3: ORB Low + 1.5x range
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger:
• Inside ORB
• Close > ORB mid (near high)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: ORB High (limit order)
• Stop: ORB High + 0.2x range
• T1: ORB Mid
• T2: ORB Low
[b>Confidence Scoring: [/b>
Base: 40 points (lower base—range fading is lower probability than breakout/reversal)
[b>Use Case: [/b> Rotation days. Not recommended on normal/trend days.
[b>6. FADE LOW (Range Trade):
Mirror of FADE HIGH.
[b>7. WAIT:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• ORB not complete yet OR
• No clear setup (price in no-man's-land)
[b>Action: [/b> Observe, don't trade.
[b>Confidence: [/b> 0 points
[b>Grading System:
```
Confidence → Grade
85-100 → A+
75-84 → A
65-74 → B+
55-64 → B
45-54 → C
0-44 → D
```
[b>Grade Interpretation: [/b>
• [b>A+ / A: High probability setup. Take these trades.
• [b>B+ / B [/b>: Decent setup. Trade if fits system rules.
• [b>C [/b>: Marginal setup. Only if very experienced.
• [b>D [/b>: Poor setup or no setup. Don't trade.
[b>Example Scenario: [/b>
ES futures:
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 point range)
• Bullish breakout to 5851 confirmed
• Volume: 2.0x average (confirmed)
• VWAP: 5845 (price above VWAP ✓)
• Day type: Developing (too early, no bonus)
• Gap: None
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Action: LONG
• Entry: 5851
• Stop: 5846 (ORB mid, -5 point risk)
• T1: 5854 (+3 points, 1:0.6 R:R)
• T2: 5858 (+7 points, 1:1.4 R:R)
• T3: 5862.94 (+11.94 points, 1:2.4 R:R)
[b>Confidence: LONG with 55% confidence.
Interpretation: Solid setup, not perfect. Trade it if your system allows B-grade signals.
[b>📊 STATISTICS TRACKING & PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS [/b>
[b>Real-Time Performance Metrics: [/b>
ORB Fusion tracks comprehensive statistics over user-defined lookback (default 50 days):
[b>Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Bull Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
• [b>Bear Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
[b>Win Definition: [/b> Breakout reaches ≥1.0x extension (doubles the opening range) before end of day.
[b>Example: [/b>
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 points)
• Bull breakout at 5851
• Reaches 5858 (1.0x extension) by close
• Result: WIN
[b>Failed Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Total Failed Breakouts [/b>: Count of breakouts that failed
• [b>Reversal Wins [/b>: Count where reversal trade reached target
• [b>Failed Reversal Win Rate [/b>: Wins / Total Failed
[b>Win Definition for Reversals: [/b>
• Failed bull → reversal short reaches ORB mid
• Failed bear → reversal long reaches ORB mid
[b>Extension Tracking: [/b>
• [b>Average Extension Reached [/b>: Mean of maximum extension achieved across all breakout days
• [b>Max Extension Overall [/b>: Largest extension ever achieved in lookback period
[b>Example: 🎨 THREE DISPLAY MODES
[b>Design Philosophy: [/b>
Not all traders need all features. Beginners want simplicity. Professionals want everything. ORB Fusion adapts.
[b>SIMPLE MODE: [/b>
[b>Shows: [/b>
• Primary ORB levels (High, Mid, Low)
• ORB box
• Breakout signals (triangles)
• Failed breakout signals (crosses)
• Basic dashboard (ORB status, breakout status, setup)
• VWAP
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels and extensions
• ORB extensions beyond basic levels
• Gap analysis visuals
• Statistics dashboard
• Momentum candle coloring
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Traders who want clean chart
• Focus on core ORB concept only
• Mobile trading (less screen space)
[b>STANDARD MODE:
[b>Shows Everything in Simple Plus: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels (high, low, mid)
• IB extensions
• ORB extensions (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x)
• Gap analysis and fill targets
• VWAP bands (1σ and 2σ)
• Momentum candle coloring
• Context section in dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Advanced extensions (2.618x, 3.0x)
• Detailed statistics dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Most traders
• Balance between information and clarity
• Covers 90% of use cases
[b>ADVANCED MODE:
[b>Shows Everything:
• All session ORBs
• All IB levels and extensions
• All ORB extensions (including 2.618x and 3.0x)
• Full gap analysis
• VWAP with both 1σ and 2σ bands
• Momentum candle coloring
• Complete statistics dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
• All context metrics
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Professional traders
• System developers
• Those who want maximum information density
[b>Switching Modes: [/b>
Single dropdown input: "Display Mode" → Simple / Standard / Advanced
Entire indicator adapts instantly. No need to toggle 20 individual settings.
📖 NARRATIVE DASHBOARD
[b>Innovation: Plain-English Market State [/b>
Most indicators show data. ORB Fusion explains what the data [b>means [/b>.
[b>Narrative Components: [/b>
[b>1. Phase: [/b>
• "📍 Building ORB..." (during ORB session)
• "📊 Trading Phase" (after ORB complete)
• "⏳ Pre-Market" (before ORB session)
[b>2. Status (Current Observation): [/b>
• "⚠️ Failed breakout - reversal likely"
• "🚀 Bullish momentum in play"
• "📉 Bearish momentum in play"
• "⚖️ Consolidating in range"
• "👀 Monitoring for setup"
[b>3. Next Level:
Tells you what to watch for:
• "🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00" (next extension target)
• "Watch ORB levels" (inside range, await breakout)
[b>4. Setup: [/b>
Current trade setup + grade:
• "LONG " (bullish breakout, A-grade)
• "🔥 SHORT REVERSAL " (failed bull breakout, A+-grade)
• "WAIT " (no setup)
[b>5. Reason: [/b>
Why this setup exists:
• "ORB Bullish Breakout"
• "Failed Bear Breakout - High Probability Reversal"
• "Range Fade - Near High"
[b>6. Tip (Market Insight):
Contextual advice:
• "🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops" (day type is trending)
• "🔄 ROTATION - Fade extremes" (day type is rotating)
• "📊 Gap unfilled - magnet level" (gap creates target)
• "📈 Normal conditions" (no special context)
[b>Example Narrative:
```
📖 ORB Narrative
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
Phase | 📊 Trading Phase
Status | 🚀 Bullish momentum in play
Next | 🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00
📈 Setup | LONG
Reason | ORB Bullish Breakout
💡 Tip | 🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops
```
[b>Glance Interpretation: [/b>
"We're in trading phase. Bullish breakout happened (momentum in play). Next target is 1.5x extension at 5854. Current setup is LONG with A-grade. It's a trend day, so trail stops (don't take early profits)."
Complete market state communicated in 6 lines. No interpretation needed.
[b>Why This Matters:
Beginner traders struggle with "So what?" question. Indicators show lines and signals, but what does it mean [/b>? Narrative dashboard bridges this gap.
Professional traders benefit too—rapid context assessment during fast-moving markets. No time to analyze; glance at narrative, get action plan.
🔔 INTELLIGENT ALERT SYSTEM
[b>Four Alert Types: [/b>
[b>1. Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> ORB breakout confirmed (bull or bear)
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🚀 ORB BULLISH BREAKOUT
Price: 5851.00
Volume Confirmed
Grade: A
```
[b>Frequency: [/b> Once per bar (prevents spam)
[b>2. Failed Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Breakout fails, reversal setup generated
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🔥 FAILED BULLISH BREAKOUT!
HIGH PROBABILITY SHORT REVERSAL
Entry: 5848.00
Stop: 5854.00
T1: 5846.00
T2: 5842.00
Historical Win Rate: 73%
```
[b>Why Comprehensive? [/b> Failed breakout alerts include complete trade plan. You can execute immediately from alert—no need to check chart.
[b>3. Extension Alert:
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price reaches extension level for first time
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🎯 Bull Extension 1.5x reached @ 5854.00
```
[b>Use: [/b> Profit-taking reminder. When extension hit, consider scaling out.
[b>4. IB Break Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price breaks above IB high or below IB low
[b>Message: [/b>
```
📊 IB HIGH BROKEN - Potential Trend Day
```
[b>Use: [/b> Day type classification. IB break suggests trend day developing—adjust strategy to trend-following mode.
[b>Alert Management: [/b>
Each alert type can be enabled/disabled independently. Prevents notification overload.
[b>Cooldown Logic: [/b>
Alerts won't fire if same alert type triggered within last bar. Prevents:
• "Breakout" alert every tick during choppy breakout
• Multiple "extension" alerts if price oscillates at level
Ensures: One clean alert per event.
⚙️ KEY PARAMETERS EXPLAINED
[b>Opening Range Settings: [/b>
• [b>ORB Timeframe [/b> (5/15/30/60 min): Duration of opening range window
- 30 min recommended for most traders
• [b>Use RTH Only [/b> (ON/OFF): Only trade during regular trading hours
- ON recommended (avoids thin overnight markets)
• [b>Use LTF Precision [/b> (ON/OFF): Sample 1-minute bars for accuracy
- ON recommended (critical for charts >1 minute)
• [b>Precision TF [/b> (1/5 min): Timeframe for LTF sampling
- 1 min recommended (most accurate)
[b>Session ORBs: [/b>
• [b>Show Asian/London/NY ORB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display multi-session ranges
- OFF in Simple mode
- ON in Standard/Advanced if trading 24hr markets
• [b>Session Windows [/b>: Time ranges for each session ORB
- Defaults align with major session opens
[b>Initial Balance: [/b>
• [b>Show IB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display Initial Balance levels
- ON recommended for day type classification
• [b>IB Session Window [/b> (0930-1030): First hour of trading
- Default is standard for US equities
• [b>Show IB Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project IB extension targets
- ON recommended (identifies trend days)
• [b>IB Extensions 1-4 [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x): Extension multipliers
- Defaults are Market Profile standard
[b>ORB Extensions: [/b>
• [b>Show Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project ORB extension targets
- ON recommended (defines profit targets)
• [b>Enable Individual Extensions [/b> (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, 2.618x, 3.0x)
- Enable 1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x minimum
- Disable 2.618x and 3.0x unless trading very volatile instruments
[b>Breakout Detection:
• [b>Confirmation Method [/b> (Close/Wick/Body):
- Close recommended (best balance)
- Wick for scalping
- Body for conservative
• [b>Require Volume Confirmation [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (increases reliability)
• [b>Volume Multiplier [/b> (1.0-3.0):
- 1.5x recommended
- Lower for thin instruments
- Higher for heavy volume instruments
[b>Failed Breakout System: [/b>
• [b>Enable Failed Breakouts [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON strongly recommended (highest edge)
• [b>Bars to Confirm Failure [/b> (2-10):
- 3 bars recommended
- 2 for aggressive (more signals, more false failures)
- 5+ for conservative (fewer signals, higher quality)
• [b>Failure Buffer [/b> (0.0-0.5 ATR):
- 0.1 ATR recommended
- Filters noise during consolidation near ORB level
• [b>Show Reversal Targets [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (visualizes trade plan)
• [b>Reversal Target Mults [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x):
- Defaults are tested values
- Adjust based on average daily range
[b>Gap Analysis:
• [b>Show Gap Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON if trading instruments that gap frequently
- OFF for 24hr markets (forex, crypto—no gaps)
• [b>Gap Fill Target [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON to visualize previous close (gap fill level)
[b>VWAP:
• [b>Show VWAP [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (key institutional level)
• [b>Show VWAP Bands [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON in Standard/Advanced
- OFF in Simple
• [b>Band Multipliers (1.0σ, 2.0σ):
- Defaults are standard
- 1σ = normal range, 2σ = extreme
[b>Day Type: [/b>
• [b>Show Day Type Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (critical for strategy adaptation)
• [b>Trend Day Threshold [/b> (1.0-2.5 IB mult):
- 1.5x recommended
- When price extends >1.5x IB, classifies as Trend Day
[b>Enhanced Visuals:
• [b>Show Momentum Candles [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for visual context
- OFF if chart gets too colorful
• [b>Show Gradient Zone Fills [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for professional look
- OFF for minimalist chart
• [b>Label Display Mode [/b> (All/Adaptive/Minimal):
- Adaptive recommended (shows nearby labels only)
- All for information density
- Minimal for clean chart
• [b>Label Proximity [/b> (1.0-5.0 ATR):
- 3.0 ATR recommended
- Labels beyond this distance are hidden (Adaptive mode)
[b>🎓 PROFESSIONAL USAGE PROTOCOL [/b>
[b>Phase 1: Learning the System (Week 1) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Understand ORB concepts and dashboard interpretation
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Display Mode: STANDARD
• ORB Timeframe: 30 minutes
• Enable ALL features (IB, extensions, failed breakouts, VWAP, gap analysis)
• Enable statistics tracking
[b>Actions: [/b>
• Paper trade ONLY—no real money
• Observe ORB formation every day (9:30-10:00 AM ET for US markets)
• Note when ORB breakouts occur and if they extend
• Note when breakouts fail and reversals happen
• Watch day type classification evolve during session
• Track statistics—which setups are working?
[b>Key Learning: [/b>
• How often do breakouts reach 1.5x extension? (typically 50-60% of confirmed breakouts)
• How often do breakouts fail? (typically 30-40%)
• Which setup grade (A/B/C) actually performs best? (should see A-grade outperforming)
• What day type produces best results? (trend days favor breakouts, rotation days favor fades)
[b>Phase 2: Parameter Optimization (Week 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Tune system to your instrument and timeframe
[b>ORB Timeframe Selection:
• Run 5 days with 15-minute ORB
• Run 5 days with 30-minute ORB
• Compare: Which captures better breakouts on your instrument?
• Typically: 30-minute optimal for most, 15-minute for very liquid (ES, SPY)
[b>Volume Confirmation Testing:
• Run 5 days WITH volume confirmation
• Run 5 days WITHOUT volume confirmation
• Compare: Does volume confirmation increase win rate?
• If win rate improves by >5%: Keep volume confirmation ON
• If no improvement: Turn OFF (avoid missing valid breakouts)
[b>Failed Breakout Bars:
[b>Goal: [/b> Develop personal trading rules based on system signals
[b>Setup Selection Rules: [/b>
Define which setups you'll trade:
• [b>Conservative: [/b> Only A+ and A grades
• [b>Balanced: [/b> A+, A, B+ grades
• [b>Aggressive: [/b> All grades B and above
Test each approach for 5-10 trades, compare results.
[b>Position Sizing by Grade: [/b>
Consider risk-weighting by setup quality:
• A+ grade: 100% position size
• A grade: 75% position size
• B+ grade: 50% position size
• B grade: 25% position size
Example: If max risk is $1000/trade:
• A+ setup: Risk $1000
• A setup: Risk $750
• B+ setup: Risk $500
This matches bet sizing to edge.
[b>Day Type Adaptation: [/b>
Create rules for different day types:
Trend Days:
• Take ALL breakout signals (A/B/C grades)
• Hold for 2.0x extension minimum
• Trail stops aggressively (1.0 ATR trail)
• DON'T fade—reversals unlikely
Rotation Days:
• ONLY take failed breakout reversals
• Ignore initial breakout signals (likely to fail)
• Take profits quickly (0.5x extension)
• Focus on fade setups (Fade High/Fade Low)
Normal Days:
• Take A/A+ breakout signals only
• Take ALL failed breakout reversals (high probability)
• Target 1.0-1.5x extensions
• Partial profit-taking at extensions
Time-of-Day Rules: [/b>
Breakouts at different times have different probabilities:
10:00-10:30 AM (Early Breakout):
• ORB just completed
• Fresh breakout
• Probability: Moderate (50-55% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Conservative position sizing
10:30-12:00 PM (Mid-Morning):
• Momentum established
• Volume still healthy
• Probability: High (60-65% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Standard position sizing
12:00-2:00 PM (Lunch Doldrums):
• Volume dries up
• Whipsaw risk increases
• Probability: Low (40-45% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Avoid new entries OR reduce size 50%
2:00-4:00 PM (Afternoon Session):
• Late-day positioning
• EOD squeezes possible
• Probability: Moderate-High (55-60%)
• Strategy: Watch for IB break—if trending all day, follow
[b>Phase 4: Live Micro-Sizing (Month 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Validate paper trading results with minimal risk
[b>Setup: [/b>
• 10-20% of intended full position size
• Take ONLY A+ and A grade setups
• Follow stop loss and targets religiously
[b>Execution: [/b>
• Execute from alerts OR from dashboard setup box
• Entry: Close of signal bar OR next bar market order
• Stop: Use exact stop from setup (don't widen)
• Targets: Scale out at T1/T2/T3 as indicated
[b>Tracking: [/b>
• Log every trade: Entry, Exit, Grade, Outcome, Day Type
• Calculate: Win rate, Average R-multiple, Max consecutive losses
• Compare to paper trading results (should be within 15%)
[b>Red Flags: [/b>
• Win rate <45%: System not suitable for this instrument/timeframe
• Major divergence from paper trading: Execution issues (slippage, late entries, emotional exits)
• Max consecutive losses >8: Hitting rough patch OR market regime changed
[b>Phase 5: Scaling Up (Months 3-6)
[b>Goal: [/b> Gradually increase to full position size
[b>Progression: [/b>
• Month 3: 25-40% size (if micro-sizing profitable)
• Month 4: 40-60% size
• Month 5: 60-80% size
• Month 6: 80-100% size
[b>Milestones Required to Scale Up: [/b>
• Minimum 30 trades at current size
• Win rate ≥48%
• Profit factor ≥1.2
• Max drawdown <20%
• Emotional control (no revenge trading, no FOMO)
[b>Advanced Techniques:
[b>Multi-Timeframe ORB: Assumes first 30-60 minutes establish value. Violation: Market opens after major news, price discovery continues for hours (opening range meaningless).
2. [b>Volume Indicates Conviction: ES, NQ, RTY, SPY, QQQ—high liquidity, clean ORB formation, reliable extensions
• [b>Large-Cap Stocks: AAPL, MSFT, TSLA, NVDA (>$5B market cap, >5M daily volume)
• [b>Liquid Futures: CL (crude oil), GC (gold), 6E (EUR/USD), ZB (bonds)—24hr markets benefit from session ORBs
• [b>Major Forex Pairs: [/b> EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY—London/NY session ORBs work well
[b>Performs Poorly On: [/b>
• [b>Illiquid Stocks: <$1M daily volume, wide spreads, gappy price action
• [b>Penny Stocks: [/b> Manipulated, pump-and-dump, no real price discovery
• [b>Low-Volume ETFs: Exotic sector ETFs, leveraged products with thin volume
• [b>Crypto on Sketchy Exchanges: Wash trading, spoofing invalidates volume analysis
• [b>Earnings Days: [/b> ORB completes before earnings release, then completely resets (useless)
• Binary Event Days: FDA approvals, court rulings—discontinuous price action
[b>Known Weaknesses: [/b>
• [b>Slow Starts: ORB doesn't complete until 10:00 AM (30-min ORB). Early morning traders have no signals for 30 minutes. Consider using 15-minute ORB if this is problematic.
• [b>Failure Detection Lag: [/b> Failed breakout requires 3+ bars to confirm. By the time system signals reversal, price may have already moved significantly back inside range. Manual traders watching in real-time can enter earlier.
• [b>Extension Overshoot: [/b> System projects extensions mathematically (1.5x, 2.0x, etc.). Actual moves may stop short (1.3x) or overshoot (2.2x). Extensions are targets, not magnets.
• [b>Day Type Misclassification: [/b> Early in session, day type is "Developing." By the time it's classified definitively (often 11:00 AM+), half the day is over. Strategy adjustments happen late.
• [b>Gap Assumptions: [/b> System assumes gaps want to fill. Strong trend days never fill gaps (gap becomes support/resistance forever). Blindly trading toward gaps can backfire on trend days.
• [b>Volume Data Quality: Forex doesn't have centralized volume (uses tick volume as proxy—less reliable). Crypto volume is often fake (wash trading). Volume confirmation less effective on these instruments.
• [b>Multi-Session Complexity: [/b> When using Asian/London/NY ORBs simultaneously, chart becomes cluttered. Requires discipline to focus on relevant session for current time.
[b>Risk Factors: [/b>
• [b>Opening Gaps: Large gaps (>2%) can create distorted ORBs. Opening range might be unusually wide or narrow, making extensions unreliable.
• [b>Low Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX <12, opening ranges can be tiny (0.2-0.3%). Extensions are equally tiny. Profit targets don't justify commission/slippage.
• [b>High Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX >30, opening ranges are huge (2-3%+). Extensions project unrealistic targets. Failed breakouts happen faster (volatility whipsaw).
• [b>Algorithm Dominance:[/b> In heavily algorithmic markets (ES during overnight session), ORB levels can be manipulated—algos pin price to ORB high/low intentionally. Breakouts become stop-runs rather than genuine directional moves.
[b>⚠️ RISK DISCLOSURE[/b>
Trading futures, stocks, options, forex, and cryptocurrencies involves substantial risk of loss and is not suitable for all investors. Opening Range Breakout strategies, while based on sound market structure principles, do not guarantee profits and can result in significant losses.
The ORB Fusion indicator implements professional trading concepts including Opening Range theory, Market Profile Initial Balance analysis, Fibonacci extensions, and failed breakout reversal logic. These methodologies have theoretical foundations but past performance—whether backtested or live—is not indicative of future results.
Opening Range theory assumes the first 30-60 minutes of trading establish a meaningful value area and that breakouts from this range signal directional conviction. This assumption may not hold during:
• Major news events (FOMC, NFP, earnings surprises)
• Market structure changes (circuit breakers, trading halts)
• Low liquidity periods (holidays, early closures)
• Algorithmic manipulation or spoofing
Failed breakout detection relies on patterns of trapped participant behavior. While historically these patterns have shown statistical edges, market conditions change. Institutional algorithms, changing market structure, or regime shifts can reduce or eliminate edges that existed historically.
Initial Balance classification (trend day vs rotation day vs normal day) is a heuristic framework, not a deterministic prediction. Day type can change mid-session. Early classification may prove incorrect as the day develops.
Extension projections (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, etc.) are probabilistic targets derived from Fibonacci ratios and empirical market behavior. They are not "support and resistance levels" that price must reach or respect. Markets can stop short of extensions, overshoot them, or ignore them entirely.
Volume confirmation assumes high volume indicates institutional participation and conviction. In algorithmic markets, volume can be artificially high (HFT activity) or artificially low (dark pools, internalization). Volume is a proxy, not a guarantee of conviction.
LTF precision sampling improves ORB accuracy by using 1-minute bars but introduces additional data dependencies. If 1-minute data is unavailable, inaccurate, or delayed, ORB calculations will be incorrect.
The grading system (A+/A/B+/B/C/D) and confidence scores aggregate multiple factors (volume, VWAP, day type, IB expansion, gap context) into a single assessment. This is a mechanical calculation, not artificial intelligence. The system cannot adapt to unprecedented market conditions or events outside its programmed logic.
Real trading involves slippage, commissions, latency, partial fills, and rejected orders not present in indicator calculations. ORB Fusion generates signals at bar close; actual fills occur with delay. Opening range forms during highest volatility (first 30 minutes)—spreads widen, slippage increases. Execution quality significantly impacts realized results.
Statistics tracking (win rates, extension levels reached, day type distribution) is based on historical bars in your lookback window. If lookback is small (<50 bars) or market regime changed, statistics may not represent future probabilities.
Users must independently validate system performance on their specific instruments, timeframes, and broker execution environment. Paper trade extensively (100+ trades minimum) before risking capital. Start with micro position sizing (5-10% of intended size) for 50+ trades to validate execution quality matches expectations.
Never risk more than you can afford to lose completely. Use proper position sizing (0.5-2% risk per trade maximum). Implement stop losses on every single trade without exception. Understand that most retail traders lose money—sophisticated indicators do not change this fundamental reality. They systematize analysis but cannot eliminate risk.
The developer makes no warranties regarding profitability, suitability, accuracy, reliability, or fitness for any purpose. Users assume full responsibility for all trading decisions, parameter selections, risk management, and outcomes.
By using this indicator, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and accepted these risk disclosures and limitations, and you accept full responsibility for all trading activity and potential losses.
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
[b>CLOSING STATEMENT[/b>
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
Opening Range Breakout is not a trick. It's a framework. The first 30-60 minutes reveal where participants believe value lies. Breakouts signal directional conviction. Failures signal trapped participants. Extensions define profit targets. Day types dictate strategy. Failed breakouts create the highest-probability reversals.
ORB Fusion doesn't predict the future—it identifies [b>structure[/b>, detects [b>breakouts[/b>, recognizes [b>failures[/b>, and generates [b>probabilistic trade plans[/b> with defined risk and reward.
The edge is not in the opening range itself. The edge is in recognizing when the market respects structure (follow breakouts) versus when it violates structure (fade breakouts). The edge is in detecting failures faster than discretionary traders. The edge is in systematic classification that prevents catastrophic errors—like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
Most indicators draw lines. ORB Fusion implements a complete institutional trading methodology: Opening Range theory, Market Profile classification, failed breakout intelligence, Fibonacci projections, volume confirmation, gap psychology, and real-time performance tracking.
Whether you're a beginner learning market structure or a professional seeking systematic ORB implementation, this system provides the framework.
"The market's first word is its opening range. Everything after is commentary." — ORB Fusion
Volume Based Sampling [BackQuant]Volume Based Sampling
What this does
This indicator converts the usual time-based stream of candles into an event-based stream of “synthetic” bars that are created only when enough trading activity has occurred . You choose the activity definition:
Volume bars : create a new synthetic bar whenever the cumulative number of shares/contracts traded reaches a threshold.
Dollar bars : create a new synthetic bar whenever the cumulative traded dollar value (price × volume) reaches a threshold.
The script then keeps an internal ledger of these synthetic opens, highs, lows, closes, and volumes, and can display them as candles, plot a moving average calculated over the synthetic closes, mark each time a new sample is formed, and optionally overlay the native time-bars for comparison.
Why event-based sampling matters
Markets do not release information on a clock: activity clusters during news, opens/closes, and liquidity shocks. Event-based bars normalize for that heteroskedastic arrival of information: during active periods you get more bars (finer resolution); during quiet periods you get fewer bars (coarser resolution). Research shows this can reduce microstructure pathologies and produce series that are closer to i.i.d. and more suitable for statistical modeling and ML. In particular:
Volume and dollar bars are a common event-time alternative to time bars in quantitative research and are discussed extensively in Advances in Financial Machine Learning (AFML). These bars aim to homogenize information flow by sampling on traded size or value rather than elapsed seconds.
The Volume Clock perspective models market activity in “volume time,” showing that many intraday phenomena (volatility, liquidity shocks) are better explained when time is measured by traded volume instead of seconds.
Related market microstructure work on flow toxicity and liquidity highlights that the risk dealers face is tied to information intensity of order flow, again arguing for activity-based clocks.
How the indicator works (plain English)
Choose your bucket type
Volume : accumulate volume until it meets a threshold.
Dollar Bars : accumulate close × volume until it meets a dollar threshold.
Pick the threshold rule
Dynamic threshold : by default, the script computes a rolling statistic (mean or median) of recent activity to set the next bucket size. This adapts bar size to changing conditions (e.g., busier sessions produce more frequent synthetic bars).
Fixed threshold : optionally override with a constant target (e.g., exactly 100,000 contracts per synthetic bar, or $5,000,000 per dollar bar).
Build the synthetic bar
While a bucket fills, the script tracks:
o_s: first price of the bucket (synthetic open)
h_s: running maximum price (synthetic high)
l_s: running minimum price (synthetic low)
c_s: last price seen (synthetic close)
v_s: cumulative native volume inside the bucket
d_samples: number of native bars consumed to complete the bucket (a proxy for “how fast” the threshold filled)
Emit a new sample
Once the bucket meets/exceeds the threshold, a new synthetic bar is finalized and stored. If overflow occurs (e.g., a single native bar pushes you past the threshold by a lot), the code will emit multiple synthetic samples to account for the extra activity.
Maintain a rolling history efficiently
A ring buffer can overwrite the oldest samples when you hit your Max Stored Samples cap, keeping memory usage stable.
Compute synthetic-space statistics
The script computes an SMA over the last N synthetic closes and basic descriptors like average bars per synthetic sample, mean and standard deviation of synthetic returns, and more. These are all in event time , not clock time.
Inputs and options you will actually use
Data Settings
Sampling Method : Volume or Dollar Bars.
Rolling Lookback : window used to estimate the dynamic threshold from recent activity.
Filter : Mean or Median for the dynamic threshold. Median is more robust to spikes.
Use Fixed? / Fixed Threshold : override dynamic sizing with a constant target.
Max Stored Samples : cap on synthetic history to keep performance snappy.
Use Ring Buffer : turn on to recycle storage when at capacity.
Indicator Settings
SMA over last N samples : moving average in synthetic space . Because its index is sample count, not minutes, it adapts naturally: more updates in busy regimes, fewer in quiet regimes.
Visuals
Show Synthetic Bars : plot the synthetic OHLC candles.
Candle Color Mode :
Green/Red: directional close vs open
Volume Intensity: opacity scales with synthetic size
Neutral: single color
Adaptive: graded by how large the bucket was relative to threshold
Mark new samples : drop a small marker whenever a new synthetic bar prints.
Comparison & Research
Show Time Bars : overlay the native time-based candles to visually compare how the two sampling schemes differ.
How to read it, step by step
Turn on “Synthetic Bars” and optionally overlay “Time Bars.” You will see that during high-activity bursts, synthetic bars print much faster than time bars.
Watch the synthetic SMA . Crosses in synthetic space can be more meaningful because each update represents a roughly comparable amount of traded information.
Use the “Avg Bars per Sample” in the info table as a regime signal. Falling average bars per sample means activity is clustering, often coincident with higher realized volatility.
Try Dollar Bars when price varies a lot but share count does not; they normalize by dollar risk taken in each sample. Volume Bars are ideal when share count is a better proxy for information flow in your instrument.
Quant finance background and citations
Event time vs. clock time : Easley, López de Prado, and O’Hara advocate measuring intraday phenomena on a volume clock to better align sampling with information arrival. This framing helps explain volatility bursts and liquidity droughts and motivates volume-based bars.
Flow toxicity and dealer risk : The same authors show how adverse selection risk changes with the intensity and informativeness of order flow, further supporting activity-based clocks for modeling and risk management.
AFML framework : In Advances in Financial Machine Learning , event-driven bars such as volume, dollar, and imbalance bars are presented as superior sampling units for many ML tasks, yielding more stationary features and fewer microstructure distortions than fixed time bars. ( Alpaca )
Practical use cases
1) Regime-aware moving averages
The synthetic SMA in event time is not fooled by quiet periods: if nothing of consequence trades, it barely updates. This can make trend filters less sensitive to calendar drift and more sensitive to true participation.
2) Breakout logic on “equal-information” samples
The script exposes simple alerts such as breakout above/below the synthetic SMA . Because each bar approximates a constant amount of activity, breakouts are conditioned on comparable informational mass, not arbitrary time buckets.
3) Volatility-adaptive backtests
If you use synthetic bars as your base data stream, most signal rules become self-paced : entry and exit opportunities accelerate in fast markets and slow down in quiet regimes, which often improves the realism of slippage and fill modeling in research pipelines (pair this indicator with strategy code downstream).
4) Regime diagnostics
Avg Bars per Sample trending down: activity is dense; expect larger realized ranges.
Return StdDev (synthetic) rising: noise or trend acceleration in event time; re-tune risk.
Interpreting the info panel
Method : your sampling choice and current threshold.
Total Samples : how many synthetic bars have been formed.
Current Vol/Dollar : how much of the next bucket is already filled.
Bars in Bucket : native bars consumed so far in the current bucket.
Avg Bars/Sample : lower means higher trading intensity.
Avg Return / Return StdDev : return stats computed over synthetic closes .
Research directions you can build from here
Imbalance and run bars
Extend beyond pure volume or dollar thresholds to imbalance bars that trigger on directional order flow imbalance (e.g., buy volume minus sell volume), as discussed in the AFML ecosystem. These often further homogenize distributional properties used in ML. alpaca.markets
Volume-time indicators
Re-compute classical indicators (RSI, MACD, Bollinger) on the synthetic stream. The premise is that signals are updated by traded information , not seconds, which may stabilize indicator behavior in heteroskedastic regimes.
Liquidity and toxicity overlays
Combine synthetic bars with proxies of flow toxicity to anticipate spread widening or volatility clustering. For instance, tag synthetic bars that surpass multiples of the threshold and test whether subsequent realized volatility is elevated.
Dollar-risk parity sampling for portfolios
Use dollar bars to align samples across assets by notional risk, enabling cleaner cross-asset features and comparability in multi-asset models (e.g., correlation studies, regime clustering). AFML discusses the benefits of event-driven sampling for cross-sectional ML feature engineering.
Microstructure feature set
Compute duration in native bars per synthetic sample , range per sample , and volume multiple of threshold as inputs to state classifiers or regime HMMs . These features are inherently activity-aware and often predictive of short-horizon volatility and trend persistence per the event-time literature. ( Alpaca )
Tips for clean usage
Start with dynamic thresholds using Median over a sensible lookback to avoid outlier distortion, then move to Fixed thresholds when you know your instrument’s typical activity scale.
Compare time bars vs synthetic bars side by side to develop intuition for how your market “breathes” in activity time.
Keep Max Stored Samples reasonable for performance; the ring buffer avoids memory creep while preserving a rolling window of research-grade data.
Screener based on Profitunity strategy for multiple timeframes
Screener based on Profitunity strategy by Bill Williams for multiple timeframes (max 5, including chart timeframe) and customizable symbol list. The screener analyzes the Alligator and Awesome Oscillator indicators, Divergent bars and high volume bars.
The maximum allowed number of requests (symbols and timeframes) is limited to 40 requests, for example, for 10 symbols by 4 requests of different timeframes. Therefore, the indicator automatically limits the number of displayed symbols depending on the number of timeframes for each symbol, if there are more symbols than are displayed in the screener table, then the ordinal numbers are displayed to the left of the symbols, in this case you can display the next group of symbols by increasing the value by 1 in the "Show tickers from" field, if the "Group" field is enabled, or specify the symbol number by 1 more than the last symbol in the screener table. 👀 When timeframe filtering is applied, the screener table displays only the columns of those timeframes for which the filtering value is selected, which allows displaying more symbols.
For each timeframe, in the "TIMEFRAMES > Prev" field, you can enable the display of data for the previous bar relative to the last (current) one, if the market is open for the requested symbol. In the "TIMEFRAMES > Y" field, you can enable filtering depending on the location of the last five bars relative to the Alligator indicator lines, which are designated by special symbols in the screener table:
⬆️ — if the Alligator is open upwards (Lips > Teeth > Jaw) and none of the bars is closed below the Lips line;
↗️ — if one of the bars, except for the penultimate one, is closed below Lips, or two bars, except for the last one, are closed below Lips, or the Alligator is open upwards only below four bars, but none of the bars is closed below Lips;
⬇️ — if the Alligator is open downwards (Lips < Teeth < Jaw), but none of the bars is closed above Lips;
↘️ — if one of the bars, except the penultimate one, is closed above the Lips, or two bars, except the last one, are closed above the Lips, or the Alligator is open down only above four bars, but none of the bars are closed above the Lips;
➡️ — in other cases, including when the Alligator lines intersect and one of the bars is closed behind the Lips line or two bars intersect one of the Alligator lines.
In the "TIMEFRAMES > Show bar change value for TF" field, you can add a column to the right of the selected timeframe column with the percentage change between the closing price of the last bar (current) and the closing price of the previous bar ((close – previous close) / previous close * 100). Depending on the percentage value, the background color of the screener table cell will change: dark red if <= -3%; red if <= -2%, light red if <= -0.5%; dark green if >= 3%; green if >= 2%; light green if >= 0.5%.
For each timeframe, the screener table displays the symbol of the latest (current) bar, depending on the closing price relative to the bar's midpoint ((high + low) / 2) and its location relative to the Alligator indicator lines: ⎾ — the bar's closing price is above its midpoint; ⎿ — the bar's closing price is below its midpoint; ├ — the bar's closing price is equal to its midpoint; 🟢 — Bullish Divergent bar, i.e. the bar's closing price is above its midpoint, the bar's high is below all Alligator lines, the bar's low is below the previous bar's low; 🔴 — Bearish Divergent bar, i.e. the bar's closing price is below its midpoint, the bar's low is above all Alligator lines, the bar's high is above the previous bar's high. When filtering is enabled in the "TIMEFRAMES > Filtering by Divergent bar" field, the data in the screener table cells will be displayed only for those timeframes that have a Divergent bar. A high bar volume signal is also displayed — 📶/📶² if the bar volume is greater than 40%/70% of the average volume value calculated using a simple moving average (SMA) in the 140 bar interval from the last bar.
In the indicator settings in the "SYMBOL LIST" field, each ticker (for example: OANDA:SPX500USD) must be on a separate line. If the market is closed, then the data for requested symbols will be limited to the time of the last (current) bar on the chart, for example, if the current symbol was traded yesterday, and the requested symbol is traded today, when requesting data for an hourly timeframe, the last bar will be for yesterday, if the timeframe of the current chart is not higher than 1 day. Therefore, by default, a warning will be displayed on the chart instead of the screener table that if the market is open, you must wait for the screener to load (after the first price change on the current chart), or if the highest timeframe in the screener is 1 day, you will be prompted to change the timeframe on the current chart to 1 week, if the screener requests data for the timeframe of 1 week, you will be prompted to change the timeframe on the current chart to 1 month, or switch to another symbol on the current chart for which the market is open (for example: BINANCE:BTCUSDT), or disable the warning in the field "SYMBOL LIST > Do not display screener if market is close".
The number of the last columns with the color of the AO indicator that will be displayed in the screener table for each timeframe is specified in the indicator settings in the "AWESOME OSCILLATOR > Number of columns" field.
For each timeframe, the direction of the trend between the price of the highest and lowest bars in the specified range of bars from the last bar is displayed — ↑ if the trend is up (the highest bar is to the right of the lowest), or ↓ if the trend is down (the lowest bar is to the right of the highest). If there is a divergence on the AO indicator in the specified interval, the symbol ∇ is also displayed. The average volume value is also calculated in the specified interval using a simple moving average (SMA). The number of bars is set in the indicator settings in the "INTERVAL FOR HIGHEST AND LOWEST BARS > Bars count" field.
In the indicator settings in the "STYLE" field you can change the position of the screener table relative to the chart window, the background color, the color and size of the text.
***
Скринер на основе стратегии Profitunity Билла Вильямса для нескольких таймфреймов (максимум 5, включая таймфрейм графика) и настраиваемого списка символов. Скринер анализирует индикаторы Alligator и Awesome Oscillator, Дивергентные бары и бары с высоким объемом.
Максимально допустимое количество запросов (символы и таймфреймы) ограничено 40 запросами, например, для 10 символов по 4 запроса разных таймфреймов. Поэтому в индикаторе автоматически ограничивается количество отображаемых символов в зависимости от количества таймфреймов для каждого символа, если символов больше чем отображено в таблице скринера, то слева от символов отображаются порядковые номера, в таком случае можно отобразить следующую группу символов, увеличив значение на 1 в настройках индикатора поле "Show tickers from", если включено поле "Group", или указать номер символа на 1 больше, чем последний символ в таблице скринера. 👀 Когда применяется фильтрация по таймфрейму, в таблице скринера отображаются только столбцы тех таймфреймов, для которых выбрано значение фильтрации, что позволяет отображать большее количество символов.
Для каждого таймфрейма в настройках индикатора в поле "TIMEFRAMES > Prev" можно включить отображение данных для предыдущего бара относительно последнего (текущего), если для запрашиваемого символа рынок открыт. В поле "TIMEFRAMES > Y" можно включить фильтрацию, в зависимости от расположения последних пяти баров относительно линий индикатора Alligator, которые обозначаются специальными символами в таблице скринера:
⬆️ — если Alligator открыт вверх (Lips > Teeth > Jaw) и ни один из баров не закрыт ниже линии Lips;
↗️ — если один из баров, кроме предпоследнего, закрыт ниже Lips, или два бара, кроме последнего, закрыты ниже Lips, или Alligator открыт вверх только ниже четырех баров, но ни один из баров не закрыт ниже Lips;
⬇️ — если Alligator открыт вниз (Lips < Teeth < Jaw), но ни один из баров не закрыт выше Lips;
↘️ — если один из баров, кроме предпоследнего, закрыт выше Lips, или два бара, кроме последнего, закрыты выше Lips, или Alligator открыт вниз только выше четырех баров, но ни один из баров не закрыт выше Lips;
➡️ — в остальных случаях, в то числе когда линии Alligator пересекаются и один из баров закрыт за линией Lips или два бара пересекают одну из линий Alligator.
В поле "TIMEFRAMES > Show bar change value for TF" можно добавить справа от выбранного столбца таймфрейма столбец с процентным изменением между ценой закрытия последнего бара (текущего) и ценой закрытия предыдущего бара ((close – previous close) / previous close * 100). В зависимости от величины процента будет меняться цвет фона ячейки таблицы скринера: темно-красный, если <= -3%; красный, если <= -2%, светло-красный, если <= -0.5%; темно-зеленый, если >= 3%; зеленый, если >= 2%; светло-зеленый, если >= 0.5%.
Для каждого таймфрейма в таблице скринера отображается символ последнего (текущего) бара, в зависимости от цены закрытия относительно середины бара ((high + low) / 2) и расположения относительно линий индикатора Alligator: ⎾ — цена закрытия бара выше его середины; ⎿ — цена закрытия бара ниже его середины; ├ — цена закрытия бара равна его середине; 🟢 — Бычий Дивергентный бар, т.е. цена закрытия бара выше его середины, максимум бара ниже всех линий Alligator, минимум бара ниже минимума предыдущего бара; 🔴 — Медвежий Дивергентный бар, т.е. цена закрытия бара ниже его середины, минимум бара выше всех линий Alligator, максимум бара выше максимума предыдущего бара. При включении фильтрации в поле "TIMEFRAMES > Filtering by Divergent bar" данные в ячейках таблицы скринера будут отображаться только для тех таймфреймов, где есть Дивергентный бар. Также отображается сигнал высокого объема бара — 📶/📶², если объем бара больше чем на 40%/70% среднего значения объема, рассчитанного с помощью простой скользящей средней (SMA) в интервале 140 баров от последнего бара.
В настройках индикатора в поле "SYMBOL LIST" каждый тикер (например: OANDA:SPX500USD) должен быть на отдельной строке. Если рынок закрыт, то данные для запрашиваемых символов будут ограничены временем последнего (текущего) бара на графике, например, если текущий символ торговался последний день вчера, а запрашиваемый символ торгуется сегодня, при запросе данных для часового таймфрейма, последний бар будет за вчерашний день, если таймфрейм текущего графика не выше 1 дня. Поэтому по умолчанию на графике будет отображаться предупреждение вместо таблицы скринера о том, что если рынок открыт, то необходимо дождаться загрузки скринера (после первого изменения цены на текущем графике), или если в скринере самый высокий таймфрейм 1 день, то будет предложено изменить на текущем графике таймфрейм на 1 неделю, если в скринере запрашиваются данные для таймфрейма 1 неделя, то будет предложено изменить на текущем графике таймфрейм на 1 месяц, или же переключиться на другой символ на текущем графике, для которого рынок открыт (например: BINANCE:BTCUSDT), или отключить предупреждение в поле "SYMBOL LIST > Do not display screener if market is close".
Количество последних столбцов с цветом индикатора AO, которые будут отображены в таблице скринера для каждого таймфрейма, указывается в настройках индикатора в поле "AWESOME OSCILLATOR > Number of columns".
Для каждого таймфрейма отображается направление тренда между ценой самого высокого и самого низкого баров в указанном интервале баров от последнего бара — ↑, если тренд направлен вверх (самый высокий бар справа от самого низкого), или ↓, если тренд направлен вниз (самый низкий бар справа от самого высокого). Если есть дивергенция на индикаторе AO в указанном интервале, то также отображается символ — ∇. В указанном интервале также рассчитывается среднее значение объема с помощью простой скользящей средней (SMA). Количество баров устанавливается в настройках индикатора в поле "INTERVAL FOR HIGHEST AND LOWEST BARS > Bars count".
В настройках индикатора в поле "STYLE" можно изменить положение таблицы скринера относительно окна графика, цвет фона, цвет и размер текста.
FvgCalculations█ OVERVIEW
This library provides the core calculation engine for identifying Fair Value Gaps (FVGs) across different timeframes and for processing their interaction with price. It includes functions to detect FVGs on both the current chart and higher timeframes, as well as to check for their full or partial mitigation.
█ CONCEPTS
The library's primary functions revolve around the concept of Fair Value Gaps and their lifecycle.
Fair Value Gap (FVG) Identification
An FVG, or imbalance, represents a price range where buying or selling pressure was significant enough to cause a rapid price movement, leaving an "inefficiency" in the market. This library identifies FVGs based on three-bar patterns:
Bullish FVG: Forms when the low of the current bar (bar 3) is higher than the high of the bar two periods prior (bar 1). The FVG is the space between the high of bar 1 and the low of bar 3.
Bearish FVG: Forms when the high of the current bar (bar 3) is lower than the low of the bar two periods prior (bar 1). The FVG is the space between the low of bar 1 and the high of bar 3.
The library provides distinct functions for detecting FVGs on the current (Low Timeframe - LTF) and specified higher timeframes (Medium Timeframe - MTF / High Timeframe - HTF).
FVG Mitigation
Mitigation refers to price revisiting an FVG.
Full Mitigation: An FVG is considered fully mitigated when price completely closes the gap. For a bullish FVG, this occurs if the current low price moves below or touches the FVG's bottom. For a bearish FVG, it occurs if the current high price moves above or touches the FVG's top.
Partial Mitigation (Entry/Fill): An FVG is partially mitigated when price enters the FVG's range but does not fully close it. The library tracks the extent of this fill. For a bullish FVG, if the current low price enters the FVG from above, that low becomes the new effective top of the remaining FVG. For a bearish FVG, if the current high price enters the FVG from below, that high becomes the new effective bottom of the remaining FVG.
FVG Interaction
This refers to any instance where the current bar's price range (high to low) touches or crosses into the currently unfilled portion of an active (visible and not fully mitigated) FVG.
Multi-Timeframe Data Acquisition
To detect FVGs on higher timeframes, specific historical bar data (high, low, and time of bars at indices and relative to the higher timeframe's last completed bar) is required. The requestMultiTFBarData function is designed to fetch this data efficiently.
█ CALCULATIONS AND USE
The functions in this library are typically used in a sequence to manage FVGs:
1. Data Retrieval (for MTF/HTF FVGs):
Call requestMultiTFBarData() with the desired higher timeframe string (e.g., "60", "D").
This returns a tuple of htfHigh1, htfLow1, htfTime1, htfHigh3, htfLow3, htfTime3.
2. FVG Detection:
For LTF FVGs: Call detectFvg() on each confirmed bar. It uses high , low, low , and high along with barstate.isconfirmed.
For MTF/HTF FVGs: Call detectMultiTFFvg() using the data obtained from requestMultiTFBarData().
Both detection functions return an fvgObject (defined in FvgTypes) if an FVG is found, otherwise na. They also can classify FVGs as "Large Volume" (LV) if classifyLV is true and the FVG size (top - bottom) relative to the tfAtr (Average True Range of the respective timeframe) meets the lvAtrMultiplier.
3. FVG State Updates (on each new bar for existing FVGs):
First, check for overall price interaction using fvgInteractionCheck(). This function determines if the current bar's high/low has touched or entered the FVG's currentTop or currentBottom.
If interaction occurs and the FVG is not already mitigated:
Call checkMitigation() to determine if the FVG has been fully mitigated by the current bar's currentHigh and currentLow. If true, the FVG's isMitigated status is updated.
If not fully mitigated, call checkPartialMitigation() to see if the price has further entered the FVG. This function returns the newLevel to which the FVG has been filled (e.g., currentLow for a bullish FVG, currentHigh for bearish). This newLevel is then used to update the FVG's currentTop or currentBottom.
The calling script (e.g., fvgMain.c) is responsible for storing and managing the array of fvgObject instances and passing them to these update functions.
█ NOTES
Bar State for LTF Detection: The detectFvg() function relies on barstate.isconfirmed to ensure FVG detection is based on closed bars, preventing FVGs from being detected prematurely on the currently forming bar.
Higher Timeframe Data (lookahead): The requestMultiTFBarData() function uses lookahead = barmerge.lookahead_on. This means it can access historical data from the higher timeframe that corresponds to the current bar on the chart, even if the higher timeframe bar has not officially closed. This is standard for multi-timeframe analysis aiming to plot historical HTF data accurately on a lower timeframe chart.
Parameter Typing: Functions like detectMultiTFFvg and detectFvg infer the type for boolean (classifyLV) and numeric (lvAtrMultiplier) parameters passed from the main script, while explicitly typed series parameters (like htfHigh1, currentAtr) expect series data.
fvgObject Dependency: The FVG detection functions return fvgObject instances, and fvgInteractionCheck takes an fvgObject as a parameter. This UDT is defined in the FvgTypes library, making it a dependency for using FvgCalculations.
ATR for LV Classification: The tfAtr (for MTF/HTF) and currentAtr (for LTF) parameters are expected to be the Average True Range values for the respective timeframes. These are used, if classifyLV is enabled, to determine if an FVG's size qualifies it as a "Large Volume" FVG based on the lvAtrMultiplier.
MTF/HTF FVG Appearance Timing: When displaying FVGs from a higher timeframe (MTF/HTF) on a lower timeframe (LTF) chart, users might observe that the most recent MTF/HTF FVG appears one LTF bar later compared to its appearance on a native MTF/HTF chart. This is an expected behavior due to the detection mechanism in `detectMultiTFFvg`. This function uses historical bar data from the MTF/HTF (specifically, data equivalent to `HTF_bar ` and `HTF_bar `) to identify an FVG. Therefore, all three bars forming the FVG on the MTF/HTF must be fully closed and have shifted into these historical index positions relative to the `request.security` call from the LTF chart before the FVG can be detected and displayed on the LTF. This ensures that the MTF/HTF FVG is identified based on confirmed, closed bars from the higher timeframe.
█ EXPORTED FUNCTIONS
requestMultiTFBarData(timeframe)
Requests historical bar data for specific previous bars from a specified higher timeframe.
It fetches H , L , T (for the bar before last) and H , L , T (for the bar three periods prior)
from the requested timeframe.
This is typically used to identify FVG patterns on MTF/HTF.
Parameters:
timeframe (simple string) : The higher timeframe to request data from (e.g., "60" for 1-hour, "D" for Daily).
Returns: A tuple containing: .
- htfHigh1 (series float): High of the bar at index 1 (one bar before the last completed bar on timeframe).
- htfLow1 (series float): Low of the bar at index 1.
- htfTime1 (series int) : Time of the bar at index 1.
- htfHigh3 (series float): High of the bar at index 3 (three bars before the last completed bar on timeframe).
- htfLow3 (series float): Low of the bar at index 3.
- htfTime3 (series int) : Time of the bar at index 3.
detectMultiTFFvg(htfHigh1, htfLow1, htfTime1, htfHigh3, htfLow3, htfTime3, tfAtr, classifyLV, lvAtrMultiplier, tfType)
Detects a Fair Value Gap (FVG) on a higher timeframe (MTF/HTF) using pre-fetched bar data.
Parameters:
htfHigh1 (float) : High of the first relevant bar (typically high ) from the higher timeframe.
htfLow1 (float) : Low of the first relevant bar (typically low ) from the higher timeframe.
htfTime1 (int) : Time of the first relevant bar (typically time ) from the higher timeframe.
htfHigh3 (float) : High of the third relevant bar (typically high ) from the higher timeframe.
htfLow3 (float) : Low of the third relevant bar (typically low ) from the higher timeframe.
htfTime3 (int) : Time of the third relevant bar (typically time ) from the higher timeframe.
tfAtr (float) : ATR value for the higher timeframe, used for Large Volume (LV) FVG classification.
classifyLV (bool) : If true, FVGs will be assessed to see if they qualify as Large Volume.
lvAtrMultiplier (float) : The ATR multiplier used to define if an FVG is Large Volume.
tfType (series tfType enum from no1x/FvgTypes/1) : The timeframe type (e.g., types.tfType.MTF, types.tfType.HTF) of the FVG being detected.
Returns: An fvgObject instance if an FVG is detected, otherwise na.
detectFvg(classifyLV, lvAtrMultiplier, currentAtr)
Detects a Fair Value Gap (FVG) on the current (LTF - Low Timeframe) chart.
Parameters:
classifyLV (bool) : If true, FVGs will be assessed to see if they qualify as Large Volume.
lvAtrMultiplier (float) : The ATR multiplier used to define if an FVG is Large Volume.
currentAtr (float) : ATR value for the current timeframe, used for LV FVG classification.
Returns: An fvgObject instance if an FVG is detected, otherwise na.
checkMitigation(isBullish, fvgTop, fvgBottom, currentHigh, currentLow)
Checks if an FVG has been fully mitigated by the current bar's price action.
Parameters:
isBullish (bool) : True if the FVG being checked is bullish, false if bearish.
fvgTop (float) : The top price level of the FVG.
fvgBottom (float) : The bottom price level of the FVG.
currentHigh (float) : The high price of the current bar.
currentLow (float) : The low price of the current bar.
Returns: True if the FVG is considered fully mitigated, false otherwise.
checkPartialMitigation(isBullish, currentBoxTop, currentBoxBottom, currentHigh, currentLow)
Checks for partial mitigation of an FVG by the current bar's price action.
It determines if the price has entered the FVG and returns the new fill level.
Parameters:
isBullish (bool) : True if the FVG being checked is bullish, false if bearish.
currentBoxTop (float) : The current top of the FVG box (this might have been adjusted by previous partial fills).
currentBoxBottom (float) : The current bottom of the FVG box (similarly, might be adjusted).
currentHigh (float) : The high price of the current bar.
currentLow (float) : The low price of the current bar.
Returns: The new price level to which the FVG has been filled (e.g., currentLow for a bullish FVG).
Returns na if no new partial fill occurred on this bar.
fvgInteractionCheck(fvg, highVal, lowVal)
Checks if the current bar's price interacts with the given FVG.
Interaction means the price touches or crosses into the FVG's
current (possibly partially filled) range.
Parameters:
fvg (fvgObject type from no1x/FvgTypes/1) : The FVG object to check.
Its isMitigated, isVisible, isBullish, currentTop, and currentBottom fields are used.
highVal (float) : The high price of the current bar.
lowVal (float) : The low price of the current bar.
Returns: True if price interacts with the FVG, false otherwise.
Percentage price changeThis indicator marks bars whose values increase or decrease by an amount greater than or equal to the value of the specified parameter as a percentage. Bars that meet the condition are marked with labels, boxes and colors. In addition to the standard method of calculating the percentage change at the closing price of the current and previous bars, the indicator allows you to choose non-standard calculation methods (at the prices of opening and closing the current bar, as well as at the prices of the maximum at the minimum of the current bar). You can choose to display the percentage changes of individual bars as well as a series of bars. You can select the number of bars in a series of bars. You can also apply filters by the direction of the bars in the series or by the percentage of individual bars in the series.
It is important to remember that in version 5 of Pine Script™, the maximum possible number of labels and the maximum possible number of boxes cannot exceed 500!
There are several main parameters that can be changed in section PARAMETERS FOR CALCULATION:
1. 'Bars count' - The number of bars for which the percentage rise or fall is calculated.
2. ‘Percentage change’ - sets the price change as a percentage. Bars with a price range above or equal to the specified value will be marked on the chart.
3. ‘First and second points of calculation’ - the first and second points for calculating the percentage change. Here you can set several different values for the calculation:
- 'Cl.pr., Close' - Closing price of the previous bar and closing price of the current bar (or a series of bars) (these values are used for the standard calculation of the percentage change on the chart).
- 'Open, Close' - Opening and closing prices of the current bar (or a series of bars).
- 'High|Low' - Highest and lowest price of the current bar (or a series of bars).
- 'Cl.pr.|High|Low' - Highest or lowest price of the current bar (or a series of bars) (depending on whether the bar is going up or down) or closing price of the previous bar for first point (one of these values is automatically selected, which gives a larger result, depending on whether there is a gap between these values). Highest or lowest price of the current bar for second point.
In the LIMITS section, you can set the following parameters.
1. ‘Only for the last bar’ - If this option is selected, the indicator will be applied only for the last bar (or series of bars).
2. 'Only bars in one direction' - A condition that takes into account sequences from the selected number of bars going in only one direction. If at least one bar has a different direction from the other bars, then such a sequence will not be taken into account. This only works if the 'Bars count' is > 1.
3. "Cut off higher values" - This field cuts off higher values. Bars with a price range above or equal to the specified value will not be marked on the chart. This can be used in some cases to make the chart less loaded with data and more visual. Of course, you can also use this option however you want.
4. ‘Min percent in series of bars’ - If the value 'Number of bars' is > 1, then a series of bars is taken into account, in which the percentage change of individual bars is greater than or equal to the set value.
In the DATE RANGE section, you can set the limits of the time and date range in which the calculation will be performed. In some cases, this can be used in order not to exceed the limit on the number of labels or boxes, which cannot exceed 500. Of course, you can also use this option however you want. By default, the date range is unlimited.
'Timezone offset, hours' - It is used only for the correct display of the limits of the date range in the parameter table.
In the PRICE INCREASE LABELS and PRICE REDUCTION LABELS section, you can define the design of labels bars and boxes, such as colors, shapes, sizes, and location. You can set the colors of the bars separately on the Style tab. On the Style tab, you can also turn on/off the display of frames, labels and color markings of bars.
The PARAMETER TABLE section is designed to adjust the display of the table for a more visual display of the selected values of all parameters on the Arguments tab. Depending on which values have been set and which parameters have been enabled or disabled, the table will change its appearance, display or hide some rows. A single line 'Total found' will be displayed all the time. It shows the count of bars that meet the condition and count of labels or boxes used in the diagram. Since the bars are labeled with labels or boxes, their number cannot exceed 500 for Pine script version 5.
1. 'Pos.' - sets the main position of the table on the screen.
2. 'X off.', 'Y off.' - You can set the offset of the table along the X and Y axes. This option can be useful to avoid overlapping multiple tables if you want to use two or more instances of this indicator on your chart. The minimum value is -30, the maximum is 30. Positive values shift the table to the right on the X axis and up on the Y axis. Negative values shift the table to the left on the X axis and down on the Y axis.
3. 'Font color' - The font color in the table.
'Warn. font color', 'Warn. backgr. color' - The font and background colors in the 'Total found' row in the table. If the number of labels or boxes exceeds 500, the font and background will be colored in these colors.
4. ‘Font size’ – Sets the font size in the table.
5. 'Show hours and minutes in date/time range' - changes the date and time format of time range from {yyyy.MM.dd HH:mm} to {yyyy.MM.dd}.
6. 'View all params' - used to display all parameters, even those duplicated in the main line of the indicator.
7. ‘Title’ – If desired, you can make a header for the table.
The last row of the table shows the number of bars found that meet the conditions. Since these bars are marked with labels (in the case of one bar) or boxes (in the case of series of bars), the limit that can be marked on the chart is 500. Exceeding this value will be displayed in the table and additionally highlighted in red font. This will signal that not all bars found are displayed on the chart.
On the Style tab, you can turn the table display on/off.
Higher-timeframe requests█ OVERVIEW
This publication focuses on enhancing awareness of the best practices for accessing higher-timeframe (HTF) data via the request.security() function. Some "traditional" approaches, such as what we explored in our previous `security()` revisited publication, have shown limitations in their ability to retrieve non-repainting HTF data. The fundamental technique outlined in this script is currently the most effective in preventing repainting when requesting data from a higher timeframe. For detailed information about why it works, see this section in the Pine Script™ User Manual .
█ CONCEPTS
Understanding repainting
Repainting is a behavior that occurs when a script's calculations or outputs behave differently after restarting it. There are several types of repainting behavior, not all of which are inherently useless or misleading. The most prevalent form of repainting occurs when a script's calculations or outputs exhibit different behaviors on historical and realtime bars.
When a script calculates across historical data, it only needs to execute once per bar, as those values are confirmed and not subject to change. After each historical execution, the script commits the states of its calculations for later access.
On a realtime, unconfirmed bar, values are fluid . They are subject to change on each new tick from the data provider until the bar closes. A script's code can execute on each tick in a realtime bar, meaning its calculations and outputs are subject to realtime fluctuations, just like the underlying data it uses. Each time a script executes on an unconfirmed bar, it first reverts applicable values to their last committed states, a process referred to as rollback . It only commits the new values from a realtime bar after the bar closes. See the User Manual's Execution model page to learn more.
In essence, a script can repaint when it calculates on realtime bars due to fluctuations before a bar's confirmation, which it cannot reproduce on historical data. A common strategy to avoid repainting when necessary involves forcing only confirmed values on realtime bars, which remain unchanged until each bar's conclusion.
Repainting in higher-timeframe (HTF) requests
When working with a script that retrieves data from higher timeframes with request.security() , it's crucial to understand the differences in how such requests behave on historical and realtime bars .
The request.security() function executes all code required by its `expression` argument using data from the specified context (symbol, timeframe, or modifiers) rather than on the chart's data. As when executing code in the chart's context, request.security() only returns new historical values when a bar closes in the requested context. However, the values it returns on realtime HTF bars can also update before confirmation, akin to the rollback and recalculation process that scripts perform in the chart's context on the open bar. Similar to how scripts operate in the chart's context, request.security() only confirms new values after a realtime bar closes in its specified context.
Once a script's execution cycle restarts, what were previously realtime bars become historical bars, meaning the request.security() call will only return confirmed values from the HTF on those bars. Therefore, if the requested data fluctuates across an open HTF bar, the script will repaint those values after it restarts.
This behavior is not a bug; it's simply the default behavior of request.security() . In some cases, having the latest information from an unconfirmed HTF bar is precisely what a script needs. However, in many other cases, traders will require confirmed, stable values that do not fluctuate across an open HTF bar. Below, we explain the most reliable approach to achieve such a result.
Achieving consistent timing on all bars
One can retrieve non-fluctuating values with consistent timing across historical and realtime feeds by exclusively using request.security() to fetch the data from confirmed HTF bars. The best way to achieve this result is offsetting the `expression` argument by at least one bar (e.g., `close [1 ]`) and using barmerge.lookahead_on as the `lookahead` argument.
We discourage the use of barmerge.lookahead_on alone since it prompts the function to look toward future values of HTF bars across historical data, which is heavily misleading. However, when paired with a requested `expression` that includes a one-bar historical offset, the "future" data the function retrieves is not from the future. Instead, it represents the last confirmed bar's values at the start of each HTF bar, thus preventing the results on realtime bars from fluctuating before confirmation from the timeframe.
For example, this line of code uses a request.security() call with barmerge.lookahead_on to request the close price from the "1D" timeframe, offset by one bar with the history-referencing operator [ ] . This line will return the daily price with consistent timing across all bars:
float htfClose = request.security(syminfo.tickerid, "1D", close , lookahead = barmerge.lookahead_on)
Note that:
• This technique only works as intended for higher-timeframe requests .
• When designing a script to work specifically with HTFs, we recommend including conditions to prevent request.security() from accessing timeframes equal to or lower than the chart's timeframe, especially if you intend to publish it. In this script, we included an if structure that raises a runtime error when the requested timeframe is too small.
• A necessary trade-off with this approach is that the script must wait for an HTF bar's confirmation to retrieve new data on realtime bars, thus delaying its availability until the open of the subsequent HTF bar. The time elapsed during such a delay varies with each market, but it's typically relatively small.
👉 Failing to offset the function's `expression` argument while using barmerge.lookahead_on will produce historical results with lookahead bias , as it will look to the future states of historical HTF bars, retrieving values before the times at which they're available in the feed. See the `lookahead` and Future leak with `request.security()` sections in the Pine Script™ User Manual for more information.
Evolving practices
The fundamental technique outlined in this publication is currently the only reliable approach to requesting non-repainting HTF data with request.security() . It is the superior approach because it avoids the pitfalls of other methods, such as the one introduced in the `security()` revisited publication. That publication proposed using a custom `f_security()` function, which applied offsets to the `expression` and the requested result based on historical and realtime bar states. At that time, we explored techniques that didn't carry the risk of lookahead bias if misused (i.e., removing the historical offset on the `expression` while using lookahead), as requests that look ahead to the future on historical bars exhibit dangerously misleading behavior.
Despite these efforts, we've unfortunately found that the bar state method employed by `f_security()` can produce inaccurate results with inconsistent timing in some scenarios, undermining its credibility as a universal non-repainting technique. As such, we've deprecated that approach, and the Pine Script™ User Manual no longer recommends it.
█ METHOD VARIANTS
In this script, all non-repainting requests employ the same underlying technique to avoid repainting. However, we've applied variants to cater to specific use cases, as outlined below:
Variant 1
Variant 1, which the script displays using a lime plot, demonstrates a non-repainting HTF request in its simplest form, aligning with the concept explained in the "Achieving consistent timing" section above. It uses barmerge.lookahead_on and offsets the `expression` argument in request.security() by one bar to retrieve the value from the last confirmed HTF bar. For detailed information about why this works, see the Avoiding Repainting section of the User Manual's Other timeframes and data page.
Variant 2
Variant 2 ( fuchsia ) introduces a custom function, `htfSecurity()`, which wraps the request.security() function to facilitate convenient repainting control. By specifying a value for its `repaint` parameter, users can determine whether to allow repainting HTF data. When the `repaint` value is `false`, the function applies lookahead and a one-bar offset to request the last confirmed value from the specified `timeframe`. When the value is `true`, the function requests the `expression` using the default behavior of request.security() , meaning the results can fluctuate across chart bars within realtime HTF bars and repaint when the script restarts.
Note that:
• This function exclusively handles HTF requests. If the requested timeframe is not higher than the chart's, it will raise a runtime error .
• We prefer this approach since it provides optional repainting control. Sometimes, a script's calculations need to respond immediately to realtime HTF changes, which `repaint = true` allows. In other cases, such as when issuing alerts, triggering strategy commands, and more, one will typically need stable values that do not repaint, in which case `repaint = false` will produce the desired behavior.
Variant 3
Variant 3 ( white ) builds upon the same fundamental non-repainting approach used by the first two. The difference in this variant is that it applies repainting control to tuples , which one cannot pass as the `expression` argument in our `htfSecurity()` function. Tuples are handy for consolidating `request.*()` calls when a script requires several values from the same context, as one can request a single tuple from the context rather than executing multiple separate request.security() calls.
This variant applies the internal logic of our `htfSecurity()` function in the script's global scope to request a tuple containing open and `srcInput` values from a higher timeframe with repainting control. Historically, Pine Script™ did not allow the history-referencing operator [ ] when requesting tuples unless the tuple came from a function call, which limited this technique. However, updates to Pine over time have lifted this restriction, allowing us to pass tuples with historical offsets directly as the `expression` in request.security() . By offsetting all items in a tuple `expression` by one bar and using barmerge.lookahead_on , we effectively retrieve a tuple of stable, non-repainting HTF values.
Since we cannot encapsulate this method within the `htfSecurity()` function and must execute the calculations in the global scope, the script's "Repainting" input directly controls the global `offset` and `lookahead` values to ensure it behaves as intended.
Variant 4 (Control)
Variant 4, which the script displays as a translucent orange plot, uses a default request.security() call, providing a reference point to compare the difference between a repainting request and the non-repainting variants outlined above. Whenever the script restarts its execution cycle, realtime bars become historical bars, and the request.security() call here will repaint the results on those bars.
█ Inputs
Repainting
The "Repainting" input (`repaintInput` variable) controls whether Variant 2 and Variant 3 are allowed to use fluctuating values from an unconfirmed HTF bar. If its value is `false` (default), these requests will only retrieve stable values from the last confirmed HTF bar.
Source
The "Source" input (`srcInput` variable) determines the series the script will use in the `expression` for all HTF data requests. Its default value is close .
HTF Selection
This script features two ways to specify the higher timeframe for all its data requests, which users can control with the "HTF Selection" input (`tfTypeInput` variable):
1) If its value is "Fixed TF", the script uses the timeframe value specified by the "Fixed Higher Timeframe" input (`fixedTfInput` variable). The script will raise a runtime error if the selected timeframe is not larger than the chart's.
2) If the input's value is "Multiple of chart TF", the script multiplies the value of the "Timeframe Multiple" input (`tfMultInput` variable) by the chart's timeframe.in_seconds() value, then converts the result to a valid timeframe string via timeframe.from_seconds() .
Timeframe Display
This script features the option to display an "information box", i.e., a single-cell table that shows the higher timeframe the script is currently using. Users can toggle the display and determine the table's size, location, and color scheme via the inputs in the "Timeframe Display" group.
█ Outputs
This script produces the following outputs:
• It plots the results from all four of the above variants for visual comparison.
• It highlights the chart's background gray whenever a new bar starts on the higher timeframe, signifying when confirmations occur in the requested context.
• To demarcate which bars the script considers historical or realtime bars, it plots squares with contrasting colors corresponding to bar states at the bottom of the chart pane.
• It displays the higher timeframe string in a single-cell table with a user-specified size, location, and color scheme.
Look first. Then leap.
Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis# WYCKOFF METHOD - QUICK REFERENCE CHEAT SHEET
## 🟢 STRONGEST BUY SIGNALS
### 1. SPRING ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakdown below support on LOW volume
- **Look for:** Quick reversal, close above support
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Below spring low
- **Target:** Top of range minimum
### 2. SOS (Sign of Strength) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakout above resistance on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread up bar, strong close
- **Entry:** On breakout or wait for LPS pullback
- **Stop:** Below range top
- **Target:** Height of range projected up
### 3. SHAKEOUT ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Sharp move below support with HIGH volume, immediate reversal
- **Look for:** Long lower wick, closes strong
- **Entry:** When price reclaims support
- **Stop:** Below shakeout low
- **Target:** Previous resistance
---
## 🔴 STRONGEST SELL SIGNALS
### 1. UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution) ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakout above resistance, quick rejection
- **Look for:** Spike high, weak close, often high volume
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Above UTAD high
- **Target:** Bottom of range minimum
### 2. SOW (Sign of Weakness) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakdown below support on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread down bar, weak close
- **Entry:** On breakdown or wait for LPSY rally
- **Stop:** Above range bottom
- **Target:** Height of range projected down
### 3. UPTHRUST ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Move above resistance on LOW volume, weak close
- **Look for:** Long upper wick, closes in lower half
- **Entry:** When resistance holds
- **Stop:** Above upthrust high
- **Target:** Support level
---
## 📊 ACCUMULATION PHASES (Bottom Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Downtrend
├─ PS (Preliminary Support) - First buying
├─ SC (Selling Climax) - Panic bottom ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Rally) - Relief bounce
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest SC low
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of support
├─ Volume decreasing
└─ Absorption occurring
PHASE C: The Test
├─ SPRING - False breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ TEST - Support holds on low volume
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOS - Breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ LPS - Last Point of Support (pullback)
└─ BU - Backup
PHASE E: Markup
└─ New uptrend, strong momentum
```
**Background Color:** Blue → Green (getting brighter)
**Action:** Buy in Phase C/D, Hold through Phase E
---
## 📊 DISTRIBUTION PHASES (Top Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Uptrend
├─ PSY (Preliminary Supply) - First selling
├─ BC (Buying Climax) - Euphoric top ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Reaction) - Sharp drop
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest BC high
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of resistance
├─ Demand being absorbed
└─ Volume patterns change
PHASE C: The Test
└─ UTAD - False breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOW - Breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ LPSY - Last Point of Supply (rally to exit)
PHASE E: Markdown
└─ New downtrend, strong selling
```
**Background Color:** Orange → Red (getting darker)
**Action:** Sell in Phase C/D, Stay out during Phase E
---
## 💰 VOLUME SPREAD ANALYSIS (VSA)
| Signal | Meaning | Color | Implication |
|--------|---------|-------|-------------|
| **ND** (No Demand) | Up bar, LOW volume | 🟠 Orange | Weakness - uptrend ending |
| **NS** (No Supply) | Down bar, LOW volume | 🔵 Blue | Strength - downtrend ending |
| **SV** (Stopping Volume) | VERY HIGH volume, narrow spread | 🟣 Purple | Potential reversal |
| **UT** (Upthrust) | Above resistance, LOW vol, weak close | 🔴 Red | Sell signal |
| **SO** (Shakeout) | Below support, HIGH vol, strong close | 🟢 Green | Buy signal |
---
## 🎯 VOLUME INTERPRETATION
| Volume Level | Bar Color | Meaning |
|--------------|-----------|---------|
| **VERY HIGH** (>2x average) | Dark Green/Red | Climax, potential reversal |
| **HIGH** (>1.5x average) | Light Green/Red | Strong interest |
| **NORMAL** | Gray | Average trading |
| **LOW** (<0.7x average) | Faint Gray | Testing, no interest |
---
## ⚖️ EFFORT vs RESULT
| Scenario | Volume | Spread | Meaning |
|----------|--------|--------|---------|
| **High Effort, Low Result** | HIGH | Narrow | ⚠️ Potential reversal |
| **Low Effort, High Result** | LOW | Wide | ⚠️ Trend weakening |
| **High Effort, High Result** | HIGH | Wide | ✅ Strong trend |
| **Low Effort, Low Result** | LOW | Narrow | 😴 No interest |
---
## 📏 TRADING RULES
### ✅ DO:
- ✅ Wait for confirmation before entering
- ✅ Trade in direction of higher timeframe
- ✅ Use springs and UTAD as primary signals
- ✅ Measure trading range for targets
- ✅ Place stops outside the range
- ✅ Look for volume confirmation
- ✅ Check multiple timeframes
- ✅ Focus on Phase C and D events
### ❌ DON'T:
- ❌ Buy during Phase E Markdown
- ❌ Sell during Phase E Markup
- ❌ Trade against major trend
- ❌ Ignore volume signals
- ❌ Enter without clear stop loss
- ❌ Trade every signal
- ❌ Use on very low timeframes without practice
- ❌ Ignore the context
---
## 🎪 COMPOSITE OPERATOR (Smart Money)
### 💰 Green Money Symbol (Bottom)
- **Meaning:** Institutions accumulating
- **Location:** Demand zones, springs, tests
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - buy
### 💰 Red Money Symbol (Top)
- **Meaning:** Institutions distributing
- **Location:** Supply zones, UTAD, weak rallies
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - sell
---
## 📍 SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
### 🟢 Demand Zones (Green Boxes)
- **Created at:** SC, Spring, Shakeout
- **Represents:** Where smart money bought
- **Action:** Look for bounces
### 🔴 Supply Zones (Red Boxes)
- **Created at:** BC, UTAD, Upthrust
- **Represents:** Where smart money sold
- **Action:** Look for rejections
---
## 🎯 TARGET CALCULATION
### Measured Move Method
```
1. Measure trading range height
Example: Top at 120, Bottom at 100 = 20 points
2. Add to breakout point (accumulation)
Breakout at 120 + 20 = Target: 140
3. Or subtract from breakdown (distribution)
Breakdown at 100 - 20 = Target: 80
```
### Multiple Targets
- **Conservative:** 1x range height (100% probability reached)
- **Moderate:** 1.5x range height (70% probability)
- **Aggressive:** 2x range height (40% probability)
---
## ⏰ TIMEFRAME GUIDE
| Timeframe | Use For | Reliability | Recommended For |
|-----------|---------|-------------|-----------------|
| **Weekly** | Major trends | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Position traders |
| **Daily** | Swing trades | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Most traders |
| **4-Hour** | Active swing | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Active traders |
| **1-Hour** | Day trading | ⭐⭐⭐ | Experienced only |
| **15-Min** | Scalping | ⭐⭐ | Experts only |
**Golden Rule:** Always check one timeframe higher for context!
---
## 🚨 ALERT PRIORITY
### 🔔 MUST-HAVE ALERTS
1. Spring
2. UTAD
3. SOS
4. SOW
### 🔔 NICE-TO-HAVE ALERTS
5. Selling Climax (SC)
6. Buying Climax (BC)
7. Smart Money Accumulation
8. Smart Money Distribution
### 🔔 CONFIRMATION ALERTS
9. Phase E Markup
10. Phase E Markdown
---
## 💡 QUICK DECISION TREE
```
Is there a clear trading range?
├─ YES
│ ├─ Did price break BELOW support?
│ │ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = SPRING → BUY ✅
│ │ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays down = Breakdown → SELL ⚠️
│ │
│ └─ Did price break ABOVE resistance?
│ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = UTAD → SELL ✅
│ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays up = Breakout → BUY ⚠️
│
└─ NO
├─ Strong uptrend = Wait for re-accumulation
└─ Strong downtrend = Wait for re-distribution
```
---
## 📝 PRE-TRADE CHECKLIST
Before entering any trade:
- Identified the current Wyckoff phase
- Confirmed with volume analysis
- Checked higher timeframe trend
- Located supply/demand zones
- Identified clear entry point
- Set stop loss level
- Calculated target (risk:reward >1:2)
- Verified position size (risk 1-2%)
- Have at least 2 confirming signals
- Not trading against major trend
---
## 🧠 REMEMBER
**The Three Laws:**
1. **Supply & Demand** - Price is determined by imbalance
2. **Cause & Effect** - Range size predicts move size
3. **Effort & Result** - Volume should confirm price movement
**The Key Principle:**
> "Trade with the Composite Operator (smart money), not against them"
**Best Setups:**
1. Spring in accumulation (Phase C)
2. UTAD in distribution (Phase C)
3. SOS breakout (Phase D)
4. SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**When in Doubt:**
- ❓ Stay out
- 📈 Use higher timeframe
- 📚 Review the documentation
- 🎯 Wait for clearer signal
---
## 📱 INDICATOR SETTINGS QUICK SETUP
**For Stocks/Crypto (Good Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.5
- Climax Volume: 2.0
- Swing Length: 5
**For Forex (Limited Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.3
- Climax Volume: 1.8
- Swing Length: 7
- Turn OFF "Volume Confirmation"
**For Day Trading:**
- Swing Length: 3
- All other settings: Default
**For Position Trading:**
- Swing Length: 7-10
- Volume MA Length: 30
- Use Daily/Weekly charts
---
## 🎓 SKILL PROGRESSION
### Beginner (Month 1-2)
- Focus on: SC, Spring, SOS
- Timeframe: Daily only
- Goal: Identify phases correctly
### Intermediate (Month 3-6)
- Add: All accumulation events
- Timeframe: Daily + 4H
- Goal: Trade springs profitably
### Advanced (Month 6-12)
- Add: Distribution events, VSA
- Timeframe: Multiple timeframes
- Goal: Trade complete cycles
### Expert (Year 2+)
- Master: All events, all timeframes
- Combine: With other methodologies
- Goal: Consistent profitability
---
**Print this sheet and keep it next to your trading desk!**
*Remember: Quality over quantity. Wait for the best setups.*
# Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis Indicator
## Complete Implementation Guide for TradingView Pine Script
---
## TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. (#overview)
2. (#installation)
3. (#theory)
4. (#components)
5. (#signals)
6. (#strategies)
7. (#settings)
8. (#alerts)
9. (#patterns)
10. (#troubleshooting)
---
## OVERVIEW
This indicator implements Richard Wyckoff's complete trading methodology, including:
- **All 5 Phases** of Accumulation and Distribution
- **18+ Wyckoff Events** (PS, SC, AR, ST, Spring, SOS, LPS, BC, UTAD, SOW, etc.)
- **Volume Spread Analysis (VSA)** principles
- **Supply & Demand Zone** detection
- **Composite Operator** logic (Smart Money tracking)
- **Effort vs Result** analysis
- **Three Wyckoff Laws**: Supply/Demand, Cause/Effect, Effort/Result
---
## INSTALLATION
### Step 1: Copy the Code
1. Open the `wyckoff_comprehensive.pine` file
2. Select all code (Ctrl+A / Cmd+A)
3. Copy to clipboard (Ctrl+C / Cmd+C)
### Step 2: Add to TradingView
1. Go to TradingView.com
2. Open any chart
3. Click "Pine Editor" at the bottom of the screen
4. Click "New" or "Open"
5. Paste the entire code
6. Click "Save" and give it a name
7. Click "Add to Chart"
### Step 3: Verify Installation
You should see:
- Labels on the chart (PS, SC, Spring, SOS, etc.)
- Background colors indicating phases
- Volume analysis in the lower pane
- A table in the top-right corner showing current phase
---
## WYCKOFF METHOD THEORY
### The Three Fundamental Laws
#### 1. **Law of Supply and Demand**
- Price rises when demand exceeds supply
- Price falls when supply exceeds demand
- The indicator tracks volume vs price movement to identify imbalances
#### 2. **Law of Cause and Effect**
- A period of accumulation (cause) leads to markup (effect)
- A period of distribution (cause) leads to markdown (effect)
- Trading ranges build "cause" for future price movement
#### 3. **Law of Effort vs Result**
- **Effort** = Volume (energy put into the market)
- **Result** = Price movement (spread of the bar)
- High effort with low result = potential reversal
- Low effort with high result = trend weakness
### The Five Phases
#### **ACCUMULATION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Downtrend**
- Preliminary Support (PS): First sign of buying
- Selling Climax (SC): Panic selling exhaustion
- Automatic Rally (AR): Bounce from SC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of SC low on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range develops
- Supply being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
- Volume generally decreases
**Phase C: The Test (Spring)**
- False breakdown below support
- Traps late sellers
- Quick reversal on low volume
- Last chance to accumulate before markup
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Strength (SOS): Break above resistance
- Last Point of Support (LPS): Pullback opportunity
- Backup (BU): Final consolidation
- Demand clearly exceeds supply
**Phase E: Markup**
- New uptrend established
- Price moves rapidly higher
- Phase E can last months/years
- Original trading range becomes support
#### **DISTRIBUTION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Uptrend**
- Preliminary Supply (PSY): First sign of selling
- Buying Climax (BC): Euphoric buying exhaustion
- Automatic Reaction (AR): Sharp selloff from BC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of BC high on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range at top
- Demand being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
**Phase C: The Test (UTAD)**
- Upthrust After Distribution
- False breakout above resistance
- Traps late buyers
- Quick reversal
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Weakness (SOW): Break below support
- Last Point of Supply (LPSY): Rally opportunity to exit
- Supply clearly exceeds demand
**Phase E: Markdown**
- New downtrend established
- Price moves rapidly lower
- Original trading range becomes resistance
---
## INDICATOR COMPONENTS
### 1. EVENT LABELS
#### Accumulation Events (Green labels)
- **PS** = Preliminary Support
- **SC** = Selling Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Rally
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **SPRING** = Spring (critical buy signal)
- **TEST** = Test of support
- **SOS** = Sign of Strength (breakout)
- **LPS** = Last Point of Support
- **BU** = Backup
#### Distribution Events (Red labels)
- **PSY** = Preliminary Supply
- **BC** = Buying Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Reaction
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **UTAD** = Upthrust After Distribution (critical sell signal)
- **SOW** = Sign of Weakness
- **LPSY** = Last Point of Supply
#### VSA Events (Small colored labels)
- **ND** (Orange) = No Demand - weakness
- **NS** (Blue) = No Supply - strength
- **SV** (Purple) = Stopping Volume
- **UT** (Red) = Upthrust - weakness
- **SO** (Green) = Shakeout - strength
#### Composite Operator (💰 symbols)
- Green 💰 at bottom = Smart Money Accumulation
- Red 💰 at top = Smart Money Distribution
### 2. BACKGROUND COLORS
- **Light Blue** = Phase A (Accumulation)
- **Light Orange** = Phase A (Distribution)
- **Very Light Green** = Phase C (Accumulation Testing)
- **Very Light Red** = Phase C (Distribution Testing)
- **Light Green** = Phase D (Accumulation Strength)
- **Light Red** = Phase D (Distribution Weakness)
- **Green** = Phase E (Markup - Bull trend)
- **Red** = Phase E (Markdown - Bear trend)
### 3. SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
- **Green boxes** = Demand zones (where smart money accumulated)
- **Red boxes** = Supply zones (where smart money distributed)
- Zones extend 20 bars into the future
- Price reactions at these zones are significant
### 4. VOLUME PANEL
- **Dark Green/Red bars** = Very High Volume (climax)
- **Light Green/Red bars** = High Volume
- **Gray bars** = Normal Volume
- **Faint Gray bars** = Low Volume
- **Blue line** = Volume Moving Average
### 5. INFORMATION TABLE (Top Right)
Displays real-time analysis:
- **Current Phase** (A, B, C, D, or E)
- **Status** (description of what's happening)
- **Volume** (Very High, High, Normal, Low)
- **Spread** (Wide, Normal, Narrow)
- **Effort/Result** (Poor, Normal, Good)
- **Range** (YES if in trading range)
- **Bias** (BULLISH, BEARISH, or NEUTRAL)
---
## HOW TO READ THE SIGNALS
### STRONG BUY SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **SPRING** (strongest)
- False breakdown below support
- Look for: Low volume, quick reversal, close above support
- Entry: When price closes back above support level
- Stop: Below the spring low
2. **SOS (Sign of Strength)**
- Break above trading range resistance
- Look for: High volume, wide spread up bar
- Entry: On breakout or pullback to LPS
- Stop: Below trading range
3. **Shakeout (SO)**
- Similar to spring but more violent
- Look for: High volume, penetration of support, strong close
- Entry: When price reclaims support
- Stop: Below shakeout low
4. **LPS (Last Point of Support)**
- Pullback after SOS
- Look for: Low volume, shallow pullback
- Entry: When support holds
- Stop: Below LPS
5. **No Supply (NS)**
- Down bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of selling pressure
- Confirms accumulation phase
### STRONG SELL SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution)** (strongest)
- False breakout above resistance
- Look for: High volume spike, rejection, close below resistance
- Entry: When price closes back below resistance
- Stop: Above UTAD high
2. **SOW (Sign of Weakness)**
- Break below trading range support
- Look for: High volume, wide spread down bar
- Entry: On breakdown or rally to LPSY
- Stop: Above trading range
3. **Upthrust (UT)**
- Move above resistance on low volume, weak close
- Look for: Low volume, close in lower half of bar
- Entry: When resistance becomes resistance again
- Stop: Above upthrust high
4. **LPSY (Last Point of Supply)**
- Rally after SOW
- Look for: Low volume, weak rally
- Entry: When rally fails
- Stop: Above LPSY
5. **No Demand (ND)**
- Up bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of buying pressure
- Confirms distribution phase
### NEUTRAL/WARNING SIGNALS
- **High Effort, Low Result** = Potential reversal coming
- **Stopping Volume** = Trend may be ending
- **Absorption** = Large volume with small movement (accumulation/distribution)
---
## TRADING STRATEGY EXAMPLES
### Strategy 1: Accumulation Range Breakout
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range (blue background in Phase B)
2. Wait for Spring or Test (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOS breakout (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Buy on SOS breakout
- Option B: Wait for LPS pullback (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Below the spring low or trading range bottom
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range (cause)
- Project upward from breakout point (effect)
- Minimum target = range height
**Example:**
```
Trading Range: 100 to 120 (20 point range)
SOS Breakout at: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140 minimum
```
### Strategy 2: Distribution Range Breakdown
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range after uptrend
2. Wait for UTAD (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Sell on SOW breakdown
- Option B: Wait for LPSY rally (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Above the UTAD high or trading range top
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range
- Project downward from breakdown point
- Minimum target = range height
### Strategy 3: Spring Trading
**Setup:**
1. Strong downtrend followed by range
2. Price breaks below range bottom
3. Volume is LOW on breakdown
4. Price quickly reverses and closes above support
**Entry:**
- When candle closes above support level
- Or on retest of support
**Stop Loss:**
- Below spring low (usually tight)
**Target:**
- Top of trading range
- Previous swing high
**Risk/Reward:**
- Typically 1:3 or better
### Strategy 4: Smart Money Tracking
**Setup:**
1. Look for 💰 symbols in demand zones
2. Multiple accumulation signals (PS, SC, ST, Test)
3. Volume decreasing during range
**Entry:**
- At next demand zone test
- On SOS breakout
**Confirmation:**
- Background turning green (Phase D/E)
- Table shows "BULLISH" bias
### Strategy 5: VSA Reversal
**Setup:**
1. Strong trend in place
2. Stopping Volume (SV) appears at extreme
3. Followed by No Demand (ND) or No Supply (NS)
**Entry:**
- When trend breaks down/up
- On retest of extreme
**Example (Bullish):**
```
Downtrend → Stopping Volume → No Supply → Up bar
Entry: Buy when price moves above SV bar
```
---
## SETTINGS & CUSTOMIZATION
### Volume Analysis Settings
**Volume MA Length** (default: 20)
- Shorter = More sensitive to volume changes
- Longer = Smoother, less noise
- Recommended: 15-25 for most timeframes
**High Volume Multiplier** (default: 1.5)
- Threshold for "high volume"
- Lower = More signals
- Higher = Only extreme volume
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Climax Volume Multiplier** (default: 2.0)
- Threshold for climax events (SC, BC)
- Should be significantly higher than normal
- Recommended: 2.0-3.0
### Phase Detection Settings
**Swing Detection Length** (default: 5)
- How many bars to look left/right for swing points
- Shorter = More swings detected (more noise)
- Longer = Fewer swings (cleaner, might miss some)
- Recommended: 3-7
**Range Expansion Threshold** (default: 1.5)
- Multiplier for "wide spread" bars
- Higher = Only very wide bars qualify
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Volume Confirmation** (default: ON)
- Requires volume confirmation for events
- Turn OFF for very low volume instruments
- Keep ON for stocks, forex, crypto
### Display Options
Toggle on/off:
- ✅ **Show Accumulation/Distribution Phases** - Background colors
- ✅ **Show Wyckoff Events** - All labeled events
- ✅ **Show Volume Spread Analysis** - VSA labels
- ✅ **Show Supply/Demand Zones** - Boxes on chart
- ✅ **Show Composite Operator Signals** - 💰 symbols
### Color Customization
- **Bullish Color** - All accumulation events
- **Bearish Color** - All distribution events
- **Neutral Color** - Range/neutral signals
---
## ALERT SETUP
### Available Alerts
1. **Selling Climax (SC)** - Potential bottom forming
2. **Spring** - Strong buy signal
3. **Sign of Strength (SOS)** - Bullish breakout
4. **Buying Climax (BC)** - Potential top forming
5. **UTAD** - Strong sell signal
6. **Sign of Weakness (SOW)** - Bearish breakdown
7. **Phase E Markup** - Uptrend confirmed
8. **Phase E Markdown** - Downtrend confirmed
9. **Smart Money Accumulation** - Institutions buying
10. **Smart Money Distribution** - Institutions selling
### How to Set Up Alerts
1. Click the "⏰" icon on TradingView
2. Select "Create Alert"
3. Condition: Choose the indicator and alert type
4. Example: "Wyckoff Method - Spring"
5. Set notification preferences (popup, email, webhook)
6. Click "Create"
### Recommended Alert Strategy
**Conservative Trader:**
- Spring
- SOS
- UTAD
- SOW
**Aggressive Trader:**
- Add: SC, BC, Smart Money signals
**Long-term Investor:**
- Phase E Markup
- Phase E Markdown
- Smart Money Accumulation
---
## COMMON PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: Classic Accumulation
```
Phase A: Downtrend → PS → SC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (4-12 weeks typical)
Phase C: Spring (false breakdown)
Phase D: SOS → LPS → BU
Phase E: Markup (new uptrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for spring
- Buy on LPS or SOS
- Hold through markup
### Pattern 2: Classic Distribution
```
Phase A: Uptrend → PSY → BC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (topping process)
Phase C: UTAD (false breakout)
Phase D: SOW → LPSY
Phase E: Markdown (new downtrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for UTAD
- Sell on LPSY or SOW
- Stay out during markdown
### Pattern 3: Re-Accumulation
```
Uptrend → Trading Range → Spring → Uptrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing uptrend
- Shorter accumulation period
- Often no clear SC (trend is already up)
- Spring is the key signal
### Pattern 4: Re-Distribution
```
Downtrend → Trading Range → UTAD → Downtrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing downtrend
- Shorter distribution period
- Often no clear BC (trend is already down)
- UTAD is the key signal
### Pattern 5: Failed Breakout
**Bullish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakdown → Immediate reversal (Spring)
```
- Price breaks support
- Volume is LOW
- Immediate strong reversal
- Very bullish
**Bearish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakout → Immediate reversal (UTAD)
```
- Price breaks resistance
- Volume may be high initially
- Quick rejection and reversal
- Very bearish
---
## TIMEFRAME RECOMMENDATIONS
### Daily Charts (Most Reliable)
- Best for swing trading
- Clear phases and events
- Less noise
- Recommended for beginners
### 4-Hour Charts
- Good for active swing traders
- Faster signals than daily
- Still reliable
### 1-Hour Charts
- For day traders
- More false signals
- Need to filter carefully
- Use in conjunction with higher timeframe
### 15-Minute / 5-Minute
- Only for experienced traders
- High noise level
- Many false signals
- Use daily chart for context
**Golden Rule:** Always check higher timeframe first!
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME ANALYSIS
### Top-Down Approach (Recommended)
1. **Weekly Chart** - Identify major trend and phase
2. **Daily Chart** - Find current accumulation/distribution
3. **4H Chart** - Identify entry timing
4. **Entry Timeframe** - Execute trade
### Example Analysis:
**Weekly:** Phase E Markup (bullish)
**Daily:** Phase B Re-accumulation
**4-Hour:** Spring detected
**Action:** Buy on daily LPS
---
## WYCKOFF + OTHER INDICATORS
### Complementary Tools
1. **Moving Averages**
- 20/50 SMA for trend context
- Already plotted on indicator
2. **RSI**
- Divergences at SC/BC
- Confirms overbought/oversold
3. **MACD**
- Confirms trend change in Phase D
- Divergences support Wyckoff events
4. **Volume Profile**
- Identifies value areas
- Confirms supply/demand zones
5. **Order Flow / Footprint Charts**
- See institutional activity
- Confirms smart money signals
**Don't Over-Complicate:**
- Wyckoff is a complete system
- Other indicators are supplementary
- When in doubt, trust Wyckoff
---
## TROUBLESHOOTING
### Issue: Too Many Labels
**Solution:**
- Increase swing length (Settings → 7 or 10)
- Increase volume multipliers
- Turn off VSA labels if not needed
- Focus on major events only (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
### Issue: Missing Expected Events
**Solution:**
- Decrease swing length (Settings → 3)
- Decrease volume multipliers
- Turn OFF volume confirmation
- Check timeframe (use daily chart)
### Issue: False Signals
**Solution:**
- Use higher timeframe
- Wait for confirmation
- Don't trade against major trend
- Look for multiple signal convergence
### Issue: Can't See Background Colors
**Solution:**
- Check "Show Phases" is enabled
- Increase monitor brightness
- Colors are subtle by design (not to obscure price)
### Issue: Volume Shows Incorrectly
**Solution:**
- Ensure volume data is available for your symbol
- Some symbols have poor volume data
- Forex spot pairs have no real volume
- Use futures or stock markets for best results
### Issue: No Trading Range Detected
**Solution:**
- Market may be trending strongly
- Trading range might be too small
- Wait for price to consolidate
- Not all markets have clear ranges
---
## ADVANCED TIPS
### 1. Count Point & Figure Charts
- Wyckoff used P&F to measure "cause"
- Width of range × height = minimum move target
- Longer accumulation = larger markup
### 2. Watch for Absorption
- High volume + narrow spread = someone absorbing
- In downtrend = accumulation
- In uptrend = distribution
### 3. Multiple Timeframe Springs
- Spring on daily + spring on weekly = very strong
- Increases probability significantly
### 4. Failed Signals Are Signals Too
- Failed spring = weakness, expect lower
- Failed UTAD = strength, expect higher
### 5. Context is King
- Don't buy during Phase E Markdown
- Don't sell during Phase E Markup
- Respect the major trend
### 6. Volume Precedes Price
- Study volume changes first
- Price follows volume
- Decreasing volume in range = building energy
### 7. Composite Operator Mindset
- Think like institutions
- Where would smart money buy/sell?
- They need liquidity (retail traders)
---
## RISK MANAGEMENT
### Position Sizing
**Conservative:**
- Risk 1% per trade
- Wider stops at range boundaries
**Moderate:**
- Risk 1-2% per trade
- Stops below spring/above UTAD
**Aggressive:**
- Risk 2-3% per trade
- Tight stops
- Higher win rate needed
### Stop Loss Placement
**Accumulation:**
- Below spring low
- Below trading range bottom
- Below demand zone
**Distribution:**
- Above UTAD high
- Above trading range top
- Above supply zone
### Take Profit Strategy
**Method 1: Measured Move**
- Range height = minimum target
- 2x range height = extended target
**Method 2: Fibonacci Extensions**
- 1.0 = range height
- 1.618 = extended target
- 2.618 = maximum target
**Method 3: Trail the Stop**
- Move stop to breakeven at 1R
- Trail under swing lows in markup
- Lock in profits progressively
---
## BACKTESTING CHECKLIST
Before trading with real money:
- Backtest on 50+ historical examples
- Record all signals in trading journal
- Calculate win rate (aim for >50%)
- Calculate average R:R (aim for >1:2)
- Test on multiple instruments
- Test on multiple timeframes
- Test in different market conditions
- Verify signal consistency
- Practice on demo account
- Start small with real money
---
## RECOMMENDED READING
### Books
1. **"Studies in Tape Reading"** - Richard D. Wyckoff
2. **"The Richard D. Wyckoff Method"** - Rubén Villahermosa
3. **"Charting the Stock Market: The Wyckoff Method"** - Jack Hutson
4. **"Master the Markets"** - Tom Williams (VSA)
### Courses
1. Wyckoff Analytics - Official Wyckoff course
2. TradeVSA - Volume Spread Analysis
3. StockCharts - Wyckoff education
### Communities
1. Wyckoff Analytics Forum
2. Reddit r/Wyckoff
3. TradingView Wyckoff ideas section
---
## FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
**Q: Can I use this on crypto?**
A: Yes, works well on major cryptocurrencies with good volume.
**Q: Does it work on forex?**
A: Yes, but use futures volume (like 6E for EUR/USD) for better accuracy.
**Q: What's the best timeframe?**
A: Daily chart for most traders. 4H for more active trading.
**Q: How long does accumulation last?**
A: Typically 2-12 weeks. Longer accumulation = bigger markup.
**Q: Can I automate this?**
A: You can use the alerts, but manual analysis is recommended.
**Q: What's the win rate?**
A: With proper filtering: 60-70% on major signals (Spring, UTAD, SOS, SOW).
**Q: Should I trade every signal?**
A: No. Focus on Spring, UTAD, SOS, and SOW in trending markets.
**Q: What if I see conflicting signals?**
A: Use higher timeframe for context. When in doubt, stay out.
**Q: How do I know which phase I'm in?**
A: Check the table in top-right corner. Also look at background color.
**Q: Can I use this for options trading?**
A: Yes, excellent for timing option entries (especially around Spring/UTAD).
---
## FINAL THOUGHTS
The Wyckoff Method is:
- **A complete trading system** (not just an indicator)
- **Based on 100+ years** of market wisdom
- **Used by institutions** and professional traders
- **Requires practice** and screen time
- **Highly effective** when applied correctly
**Success Tips:**
1. Start with daily charts
2. Focus on major events (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
3. Always check higher timeframe context
4. Wait for confirmation before entering
5. Manage risk properly
6. Keep a trading journal
7. Be patient - wait for the best setups
**Remember:**
- Not every range will have all events
- Some phases may be abbreviated
- Context and confluence matter most
- Practice makes perfect
---
## SUPPORT & UPDATES
For questions, improvements, or bug reports:
- Check TradingView script comments
- Join Wyckoff trading communities
- Study historical examples
- Practice on demo accounts
**Good luck and happy trading!**
---
*Disclaimer: This indicator is for educational purposes. Always do your own analysis and risk management. Past performance does not guarantee future results.*
# WYCKOFF VISUAL SETUP EXAMPLES
## ACCUMULATION SCHEMATIC #1 (Classic Bottom)
```
Price Chart View:
│ PHASE E
│ MARKUP
│ ╱
│ ╱
┌─SOS─────┤ ╱
│ │ ╱
┌───────────┤ ┌LPS │╱
│ PHASE B │ │ │
│ (Cause) └──┴──────┤
┌AR──┤ │
┌────┤ │ ┌─Spring │ PHASE D
│ └ST──┤ │ │
│ │ │ │
────SC────────┴─────────┴───────────┴──────────
│
PS
│ PHASE A
│
Downtrend
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Downtrend
```
PS: │ High volume down bar
▼ First sign of support
■ Not bottom yet
SC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▼ Panic selling exhaustion
█ Long lower wick
█ This is the low
AR: │ Automatic rally
▲ Relief bounce
■ High volume acceptable
ST: │ Secondary test
▼ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests SC low
```
### PHASE B - Building the Cause
```
┌─────────┐
│ ~~~ │ Multiple tests
│ ~ ~ │ Volume decreases
│~ ~ │ Range gets tighter
└─────────┘
Duration: 2-12 weeks typical
The longer, the bigger the eventual move
```
### PHASE C - The Test (SPRING)
```
║ False breakdown
─────╨─────
▼ Low volume
█ Breaks below support
■
█ Quick reversal
▲ Closes ABOVE support
CRITICAL: Volume must be LOW
Close must be strong
Happens quickly (1-3 bars)
```
### PHASE D - Strength Emerges
```
SOS: ▲ Sign of Strength
────╥──── Break above resistance
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPS: ▼ Last Point Support
■ Pullback on LOW volume
▲ Great entry point
BU: ▲ Backup
■ Final consolidation
▲ Before markup
```
### PHASE E - Markup
```
╱
╱
╱ Strong uptrend
╱ High momentum
╱ Can last months/years
──╱──
```
---
## DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC #2 (Classic Top)
```
Price Chart View:
Uptrend
│
PSY
│ PHASE A
────BC────────┬─────────┬───────────┬──────────
│ │ UTAD │
│ PHASE B │ │ PHASE D
┌AR──┤ ┌LPSY │ │
│ │ │ └───────────┤
│ └──┴──────┐ │╲
└ST──┤ │ │ ╲
│ └───────────┤ ╲
└─SOW─────┤ │ ╲
│ │ ╲
│ PHASE C │ ╲
│ │ PHASE E
│ │ MARKDOWN
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Uptrend
```
PSY: │ High volume up bar
▲ Preliminary supply
■ Selling starting
BC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▲ Buying climax
█ Euphoric top
█ Long upper wick
AR: │ Automatic reaction
▼ Sharp selloff
■ High volume
ST: │ Secondary test
▲ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests BC high
```
### PHASE C - The Test (UTAD)
```
▲ False breakout
────╥────
║ Breaks ABOVE resistance
║ Often high volume spike
▼
█ Rejection / weak close
█ Closes BELOW resistance
▼
CRITICAL: Closes weak
Quick rejection
Traps buyers
```
### PHASE D - Weakness Emerges
```
SOW: ▼ Sign of Weakness
────╨──── Break below support
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPSY: ▲ Last Point Supply
■ Rally on LOW volume
▼ Last chance to exit
```
---
## VOLUME PATTERNS (Critical to Understanding)
### ACCUMULATION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ SC
█
█ ST
■ ■ Spring
■ ■ ■ SOS LPS
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → low → HIGH → low
Key: Volume DECREASES during range
INCREASES on breakout
```
### DISTRIBUTION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ BC
█
█ ST
■ ■ UTAD
■ ■ ■ SOW LPSY
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → varies → HIGH → low
Key: Volume MAY increase on UTAD
Definitely HIGH on breakdown (SOW)
```
---
## REAL TRADE SETUPS
### Setup #1: SPRING BUY
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified
2. Price breaks BELOW support
3. Volume is LOW (critical!)
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes ABOVE support level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Below spring low
Target: Top of range (minimum)
Example:
Support: $100
Spring low: $98 (low volume)
Close: $101
Entry: $102
Stop: $97.50
Target: $120 (range top)
Risk/Reward: 1:4
```
### Setup #2: UTAD SELL
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified (after uptrend)
2. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
3. Often high volume spike
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes BELOW resistance level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Above UTAD high
Target: Bottom of range (minimum)
Example:
Resistance: $200
UTAD high: $205 (spike)
Close: $198
Entry: $197
Stop: $206
Target: $180 (range bottom)
Risk/Reward: 1:2
```
### Setup #3: SOS BREAKOUT
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear accumulation range
2. Spring already occurred (ideal)
3. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
4. HIGH volume on breakout
5. Wide spread up bar
Entry Option A: On breakout ($120)
Entry Option B: Wait for LPS pullback ($115)
Stop: Below range or LPS
Target: Range height projected up
Example:
Range: $100-$120 (20 points)
SOS breakout: $120
Entry A: $120
Stop: $115
Target 1: $140 (100%)
Target 2: $150 (150%)
```
---
## VSA SPECIFIC PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: No Demand (Weakness)
```
▲
■ Up bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▲ Small body
Context: After uptrend
Meaning: Buyers exhausted
Action: Prepare to sell
```
### Pattern 2: No Supply (Strength)
```
▼
■ Down bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▼ Small body
Context: After downtrend
Meaning: Sellers exhausted
Action: Prepare to buy
```
### Pattern 3: Stopping Volume
```
═ Very high volume
█ Narrow spread ◄── KEY
═ Price not moving
Context: At extremes
Meaning: Absorption
Action: Expect reversal
```
---
## COMMON MISTAKES (What NOT to Do)
### ❌ Mistake 1: Buying Prematurely
```
WRONG:
SC
▼
█ ← DON'T BUY HERE
CORRECT:
Spring
─────╨─────
▼
█ ← BUY HERE
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 2: Ignoring Volume
```
WRONG: "It broke below support, must be spring"
─────╨───── High volume
█
This is a BREAKDOWN, not a spring!
CORRECT Spring:
─────╨───── LOW volume ✓
■ Quick reversal ✓
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 3: Trading Against Trend
```
WRONG:
Markdown Phase E
╲
╲ ← Trying to buy here
╲
╲
CORRECT:
Wait for new accumulation to complete
```
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME EXAMPLE
### Weekly Chart: Phase E Markup (Bullish)
```
╱
╱
╱ Long-term uptrend
╱
───╱─────
```
### Daily Chart: Re-Accumulation Phase C
```
┌─────────┐
│ Spring │ ← We are here
│ ▼ │
─────┴────█────┴─────
▲
```
### 4-Hour Chart: Entry Timing
```
Last 48 hours:
─────╨───── Spring occurred
█
▲ ← Enter now
■
```
**Result:** Triple confirmation across timeframes = High probability trade
---
## PROFIT TARGETS (Visual Guide)
### Method 1: Basic Measured Move
```
Resistance: 120 ┐ ─────────
│
│ 20 points
│
Support: 100 ┘ ─────────
Breakout: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140
╱╱╱ 140 (Target)
╱╱╱
╱╱╱
──────◄ 120 (Breakout)
│
Range │ 20
│
──────┘ 100
```
### Method 2: Multiple Targets
```
╱╱╱ 150 (Target 3: 2.5x) - 20% position
╱╱╱
╱╱╱ 140 (Target 2: 2x) - 30% position
╱╱╱
─────◄╱ 130 (Target 1: 1x) - 50% position
│
10 │ 120 (Breakout)
│
─────┘ 110 (Support)
```
### Method 3: Trailing Stop
```
1. Move stop to breakeven at Target 1
2. Trail stop under swing lows
3. Let winners run
╱╱╱
╱ ╱╱ ← Trail stop here
╱╱ ╱
╱ ╱ ← Then here
─────◄──╱
← Start here (breakeven)
```
---
## TIMING ENTRIES (Exact Bar Patterns)
### Perfect Spring Entry
```
Bar 1: ▼ Breaks below (Low vol)
█
Bar 2: ▲ Reverses (Closes strong)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▲
DON'T WAIT for Bar 3!
Enter on Bar 2 close
```
### Perfect UTAD Entry
```
Bar 1: ▲ Breaks above (Spike vol OK)
█
Bar 2: ▼ Reverses (Closes weak)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▼
SHORT on Bar 2 close
Don't wait for more confirmation
```
---
## COMPOSITE OPERATOR PSYCHOLOGY
### What Smart Money Does (Follow Them)
**Accumulation:**
```
1. Create fear (PS, SC)
2. Shake out weak hands (Spring)
3. Absorb supply quietly (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining supply (Test)
5. Mark it up (SOS → Phase E)
💰 They buy LOW when retail panics
```
**Distribution:**
```
1. Create euphoria (PSY, BC)
2. Trap late buyers (UTAD)
3. Distribute to buyers (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining demand (ST)
5. Mark it down (SOW → Phase E)
💰 They sell HIGH when retail buys
```
### Where to Look for Smart Money
```
💰 Buy signals appear at:
- Demand zones (green boxes)
- Springs and shakeouts
- Tests of support
- After selling climax
💰 Sell signals appear at:
- Supply zones (red boxes)
- UTAD and upthrusts
- Weak rallies (LPSY)
- After buying climax
```
---
## PRACTICE EXERCISES
### Exercise 1: Identify the Phase
Look at any chart and ask:
1. Is there a trading range? (Phase B likely)
2. Did we just stop a trend? (Phase A)
3. Was there a spring/UTAD? (Phase C)
4. Is there a breakout? (Phase D)
5. Is trend running? (Phase E)
### Exercise 2: Volume Analysis
For each bar, note:
- Volume level (High/Normal/Low)
- Spread (Wide/Normal/Narrow)
- Effort vs Result (Matching? Diverging?)
### Exercise 3: Find Historical Springs
Go back 6 months:
- Mark all springs you can find
- Note the setup before each
- Track what happened after
- Calculate win rate
---
## FINAL VISUALIZATION: The Complete Cycle
```
ACCUMULATION → MARKUP → DISTRIBUTION → MARKDOWN → ACCUMULATION...
Distribution Accumulation
(Top) (Bottom)
┌───────────────┐ ┌───────────────┐
│ BC UTAD │ │ Spring SC │
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
────┴───┴───┴───────┴─╲ ╱────────┴───┴───┴────
╲ ╱
Markdown ╲ ╱ Markup
(Phase E) ╲ ╱ (Phase E)
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
V
The market cycles endlessly
Your job: Identify where you are in the cycle
Trade accordingly
```
---
**Remember:**
- 📊 Study charts daily
- 📝 Journal every setup
- 🎯 Wait for the best signals
- 💰 Follow smart money
- ⏰ Be patient
- 🚀 Let winners run
**The indicator does the heavy lifting - you make the decisions!**
VV Moving Average Convergence Divergence # VMACDv3 - Volume-Weighted MACD with A/D Divergence Detection
## Overview
**VMACDv3** (Volume-Weighted Moving Average Convergence Divergence Version 3) is a momentum indicator that applies volume-weighting to traditional MACD calculations on price, while using the Accumulation/Distribution (A/D) line for divergence detection. This hybrid approach combines volume-weighted price momentum with volume distribution analysis for comprehensive market insight.
## Key Features
- **Volume-Weighted Price MACD**: Traditional MACD calculation on price but weighted by volume for earlier signals
- **A/D Divergence Detection**: Identifies when A/D trend diverges from MACD momentum
- **Volume Strength Filtering**: Distinguishes high-volume confirmations from low-volume noise
- **Color-Coded Histogram**: 4-color system showing momentum direction and volume strength
- **Real-Time Alerts**: Background colors and alert conditions for bullish/bearish divergences
## Difference from ACCDv3
| Aspect | VMACDv3 | ACCDv3 |
|--------|---------|---------|
| **MACD Input** | **Price (Close)** | **A/D Line** |
| **Volume Weighting** | Applied to price | Applied to A/D line |
| **Primary Signal** | Volume-weighted price momentum | Volume distribution momentum |
| **Use Case** | Price momentum with volume confirmation | Volume flow and accumulation/distribution |
| **Sensitivity** | More responsive to price changes | More responsive to volume patterns |
| **Best For** | Trend following, breakouts | Volume analysis, smart money tracking |
**Key Insight**: VMACDv3 shows *where price is going* with volume weight, while ACCDv3 shows *where volume is accumulating/distributing*.
## Components
### 1. Volume-Weighted MACD on Price
Unlike standard MACD that uses simple price EMAs, VMACDv3 weights each price by its corresponding volume:
```
Fast Line = EMA(Price × Volume, 12) / EMA(Volume, 12)
Slow Line = EMA(Price × Volume, 26) / EMA(Volume, 26)
MACD = Fast Line - Slow Line
```
**Benefits of Volume Weighting**:
- High-volume price movements have greater impact
- Filters out low-volume noise and false moves
- Provides earlier trend change signals
- Better reflects institutional activity
### 2. Accumulation/Distribution (A/D) Line
Used for divergence detection, measuring buying/selling pressure:
```
A/D = Σ ((2 × Close - Low - High) / (High - Low)) × Volume
```
- **Rising A/D**: Accumulation (buying pressure)
- **Falling A/D**: Distribution (selling pressure)
- **Doji Handling**: When High = Low, contribution is zero
### 3. Signal Lines
- **MACD Line** (Blue, #2962FF): The fast-slow difference showing momentum
- **Signal Line** (Orange, #FF6D00): EMA or SMA smoothing of MACD
- **Zero Line**: Reference for bullish (above) vs bearish (below) bias
### 4. Histogram Color System
The histogram uses 4 distinct colors based on **direction** and **volume strength**:
| Condition | Color | Meaning |
|-----------|-------|---------|
| Rising + High Volume | **Dark Green** (#1B5E20) | Strong bullish momentum with volume confirmation |
| Rising + Low Volume | **Light Teal** (#26A69A) | Bullish momentum but weak volume (less reliable) |
| Falling + High Volume | **Dark Red** (#B71C1C) | Strong bearish momentum with volume confirmation |
| Falling + Low Volume | **Light Pink** (#FFCDD2) | Bearish momentum but weak volume (less reliable) |
Additional shading:
- **Light Cyan** (#B2DFDB): Positive but not rising (momentum stalling)
- **Bright Red** (#FF5252): Negative and accelerating down
### 5. Divergence Detection
VMACDv3 compares A/D trend against volume-weighted price MACD:
#### Bullish Divergence (Green Background)
- **Condition**: A/D is trending up BUT MACD is negative and trending down
- **Interpretation**: Volume is accumulating while price momentum appears weak
- **Signal**: Smart money accumulation, potential bullish reversal
- **Action**: Look for long entries, especially at support levels
#### Bearish Divergence (Red Background)
- **Condition**: A/D is trending down BUT MACD is positive and trending up
- **Interpretation**: Volume is distributing while price momentum appears strong
- **Signal**: Smart money distribution, potential bearish reversal
- **Action**: Consider exits, avoid new longs, watch for breakdown
## Parameters
| Parameter | Default | Range | Description |
|-----------|---------|-------|-------------|
| **Source** | Close | OHLC/HLC3/etc | Price source for MACD calculation |
| **Fast Length** | 12 | 1-50 | Period for fast EMA (shorter = more sensitive) |
| **Slow Length** | 26 | 1-100 | Period for slow EMA (longer = smoother) |
| **Signal Smoothing** | 9 | 1-50 | Period for signal line (MACD smoothing) |
| **Signal Line MA Type** | EMA | SMA/EMA | Moving average type for signal calculation |
| **Volume MA Length** | 20 | 5-100 | Period for volume average (strength filter) |
## Usage Guide
### Reading the Indicator
1. **MACD Lines (Blue & Orange)**
- **Blue Line (MACD)**: Volume-weighted price momentum
- **Orange Line (Signal)**: Smoothed trend of MACD
- **Crossovers**: Blue crosses above orange = bullish, below = bearish
- **Distance**: Wider gap = stronger momentum
- **Zero Line Position**: Above = bullish bias, below = bearish bias
2. **Histogram Colors**
- **Dark Green (#1B5E20)**: Strong bullish move with high volume - **most reliable buy signal**
- **Light Teal (#26A69A)**: Bullish but low volume - wait for confirmation
- **Dark Red (#B71C1C)**: Strong bearish move with high volume - **most reliable sell signal**
- **Light Pink (#FFCDD2)**: Bearish but low volume - may be temporary dip
3. **Background Divergence Alerts**
- **Green Background**: A/D accumulating while price weak - potential bottom
- **Red Background**: A/D distributing while price strong - potential top
- Most powerful at key support/resistance levels
### Trading Strategies
#### Strategy 1: Volume-Confirmed Trend Following
1. Wait for MACD to cross above zero line
2. Look for **dark green** histogram bars (high volume confirmation)
3. Enter long on second consecutive dark green bar
4. Hold while histogram remains green
5. Exit when histogram turns light green or red appears
6. Set stop below recent swing low
**Example**:
```
Price: 26,400 → 26,450 (rising)
MACD: -50 → +20 (crosses zero)
Histogram: Light teal → Dark green → Dark green
Volume: 50k → 75k → 90k (increasing)
```
#### Strategy 2: Divergence Reversal Trading
1. Identify divergence background (green = bullish, red = bearish)
2. Confirm with price structure (support/resistance, chart patterns)
3. Wait for MACD to cross signal line in divergence direction
4. Enter on first **dark colored** histogram bar after divergence
5. Set stop beyond divergence area
6. Target previous swing high/low
**Example - Bullish Divergence**:
```
Price: Making lower lows (26,350 → 26,300 → 26,250)
A/D: Rising (accumulation)
MACD: Below zero but starting to curve up
Background: Green shading appears
Entry: MACD crosses signal line + dark green bar
Stop: Below 26,230
Target: 26,450 (previous high)
```
#### Strategy 3: Momentum Scalping
1. Trade only in direction of MACD zero line (above = long, below = short)
2. Enter on dark colored bars only
3. Exit on first light colored bar or opposite color
4. Quick in and out (1-5 minute holds)
5. Tight stops (0.2-0.5% depending on instrument)
#### Strategy 4: Histogram Pattern Trading
**V-Bottom Reversal (Bullish)**:
- Red histogram bars start rising (becoming less negative)
- Forms "V" shape at the bottom
- Transitions to light red → light teal → **dark green**
- Entry: First dark green bar
- Signal: Momentum reversal with volume
**Λ-Top Reversal (Bearish)**:
- Green histogram bars start falling (becoming less positive)
- Forms inverted "V" at the top
- Transitions to light green → light pink → **dark red**
- Entry: First dark red bar
- Signal: Momentum exhaustion with volume
### Multi-Timeframe Analysis
**Recommended Approach**:
1. **Higher Timeframe (15m/1h)**: Identify overall trend direction
2. **Trading Timeframe (5m)**: Time entries using VMACDv3 signals
3. **Lower Timeframe (1m)**: Fine-tune entry prices
**Example Setup**:
```
15-minute: MACD above zero (bullish bias)
5-minute: Dark green histogram appears after pullback
1-minute: Enter on break of recent high with volume
```
### Volume Strength Interpretation
The volume filter compares current volume to 20-period average:
- **Volume > Average**: Dark colors (green/red) - high confidence signals
- **Volume < Average**: Light colors (teal/pink) - lower confidence signals
**Trading Rules**:
- ✓ **Aggressive**: Take all dark colored signals
- ✓ **Conservative**: Only take dark colors that follow 2+ light colors of same type
- ✗ **Avoid**: Trading light colored signals during high volatility
- ✗ **Avoid**: Ignoring volume context during news events
## Technical Details
### Volume-Weighted Calculation
```pine
// Volume-weighted fast EMA
fast_ma = ta.ema(src * volume, fast_length) / ta.ema(volume, fast_length)
// Volume-weighted slow EMA
slow_ma = ta.ema(src * volume, slow_length) / ta.ema(volume, slow_length)
// MACD is the difference
macd = fast_ma - slow_ma
// Signal line smoothing
signal = ta.ema(macd, signal_length) // or ta.sma() if SMA selected
// Histogram
hist = macd - signal
```
### Divergence Detection Logic
```pine
// A/D trending up if above its 5-period SMA
ad_trend = ad > ta.sma(ad, 5)
// MACD trending up if above zero
macd_trend = macd > 0
// Divergence when trends oppose each other
divergence = ad_trend != macd_trend
// Specific conditions for alerts
bullish_divergence = ad_trend and not macd_trend and macd < 0
bearish_divergence = not ad_trend and macd_trend and macd > 0
```
### Histogram Coloring Logic
```pine
hist_color = (hist >= 0
? (hist < hist
? (vol_strength ? #1B5E20 : #26A69A) // Rising: dark/light green
: #B2DFDB) // Positive but falling: cyan
: (hist < hist
? (vol_strength ? #B71C1C : #FFCDD2) // Rising (less negative): dark/light red
: #FF5252)) // Falling more: bright red
```
## Alerts
Built-in alert conditions for divergence detection:
### Bullish Divergence Alert
- **Trigger**: A/D trending up, MACD negative and trending down
- **Message**: "Bullish Divergence: A/D trending up but MACD trending down"
- **Use Case**: Potential reversal or continuation after pullback
- **Action**: Look for long entry setups
### Bearish Divergence Alert
- **Trigger**: A/D trending down, MACD positive and trending up
- **Message**: "Bearish Divergence: A/D trending down but MACD trending up"
- **Use Case**: Potential top or trend reversal
- **Action**: Consider exits or short entries
### Setting Up Alerts
1. Click "Create Alert" in TradingView
2. Condition: Select "VMACDv3"
3. Choose alert type: "Bullish Divergence" or "Bearish Divergence"
4. Configure: Email, SMS, webhook, or popup
5. Set frequency: "Once Per Bar Close" recommended
## Comparison Tables
### VMACDv3 vs Standard MACD
| Feature | Standard MACD | VMACDv3 |
|---------|---------------|---------|
| **Price Weighting** | Equal weight all bars | Volume-weighted |
| **Sensitivity** | Fixed | Adaptive to volume |
| **False Signals** | More during low volume | Fewer (volume filter) |
| **Divergence** | Price vs MACD | A/D vs MACD |
| **Volume Analysis** | None | Built-in |
| **Color System** | 2 colors | 4+ colors |
| **Best For** | Simple trend following | Volume-confirmed trading |
### VMACDv3 vs ACCDv3
| Aspect | VMACDv3 | ACCDv3 |
|--------|---------|--------|
| **Focus** | Price momentum | Volume distribution |
| **Reactivity** | Faster to price moves | Faster to volume shifts |
| **Best Markets** | Trending, breakouts | Accumulation/distribution phases |
| **Signal Type** | Where price + volume going | Where smart money positioning |
| **Divergence Meaning** | Volume vs price disagreement | A/D vs momentum disagreement |
| **Use Together?** | ✓ Yes, complementary | ✓ Yes, different perspectives |
## Example Trading Scenarios
### Scenario 1: Strong Bullish Breakout
```
Time: 9:30 AM (market open)
Price: Breaks above 26,400 resistance
MACD: Crosses above zero line
Histogram: Dark green bars (#1B5E20)
Volume: 2x average (150k vs 75k avg)
A/D: Rising (no divergence)
Action: Enter long at 26,405
Stop: 26,380 (below breakout)
Target 1: 26,450 (risk:reward 1:2)
Target 2: 26,500 (risk:reward 1:4)
Result: High probability setup with volume confirmation
```
### Scenario 2: False Breakout (Avoided)
```
Time: 2:30 PM (slow period)
Price: Breaks above 26,400 resistance
MACD: Slightly positive
Histogram: Light teal bars (#26A69A)
Volume: 0.5x average (40k vs 75k avg)
A/D: Flat/declining
Action: Avoid trade
Reason: Low volume, no conviction, potential false breakout
Outcome: Price reverses back below 26,400 within 10 minutes
Saved: Avoided losing trade due to volume filter
```
### Scenario 3: Bullish Divergence Bottom
```
Time: 11:00 AM
Price: Making lower lows (26,350 → 26,300 → 26,280)
MACD: Below zero but curving upward
Histogram: Red bars getting shorter (V-bottom forming)
Background: Green shading (divergence alert)
A/D: Rising despite price falling
Volume: Increasing on down bars
Setup:
1. Divergence appears at 26,280 (green background)
2. Wait for MACD to cross signal line
3. First dark green bar appears at 26,290
4. Enter long: 26,295 (next bar open)
5. Stop: 26,265 (below divergence low)
6. Target: 26,350 (previous swing high)
Result: +55 points (30 point risk, 1.8:1 reward)
Key: Divergence + volume confirmation = high probability reversal
```
### Scenario 4: Bearish Divergence Top
```
Time: 1:45 PM
Price: Making higher highs (26,500 → 26,520 → 26,540)
MACD: Positive but flattening
Histogram: Green bars getting shorter (Λ-top forming)
Background: Red shading (bearish divergence)
A/D: Declining despite rising price
Volume: Decreasing on up bars
Setup:
1. Bearish divergence at 26,540 (red background)
2. MACD crosses below signal line
3. First dark red bar appears at 26,535
4. Enter short: 26,530
5. Stop: 26,555 (above divergence high)
6. Target: 26,475 (support level)
Result: +55 points (25 point risk, 2.2:1 reward)
Key: Distribution while price rising = smart money exiting
```
### Scenario 5: V-Bottom Reversal
```
Downtrend in progress
MACD: Deep below zero (-150)
Histogram: Series of dark red bars
Pattern Development:
Bar 1: Dark red, hist = -80, falling
Bar 2: Dark red, hist = -95, falling
Bar 3: Dark red, hist = -100, falling (extreme)
Bar 4: Light pink, hist = -98, rising!
Bar 5: Light pink, hist = -90, rising
Bar 6: Light teal, hist = -75, rising (crosses to positive momentum)
Bar 7: Dark green, hist = -55, rising + volume
Action: Enter long on Bar 7
Reason: V-bottom confirmed with volume
Stop: Below Bar 3 low
Target: Zero line on histogram (mean reversion)
```
## Best Practices
### Entry Rules
✓ **Wait for dark colors**: High-volume confirmation is key
✓ **Confirm divergences**: Use with price support/resistance
✓ **Trade with zero line**: Long above, short below for best odds
✓ **Multiple timeframes**: Align 1m, 5m, 15m signals
✓ **Watch for patterns**: V-bottoms and Λ-tops are reliable
### Exit Rules
✓ **Partial profits**: Take 50% at first target
✓ **Trail stops**: Use histogram color changes
✓ **Respect signals**: Exit on opposite dark color
✓ **Time stops**: Close positions before major news
✓ **End of day**: Square up before close
### Avoid
✗ **Don't chase light colors**: Low volume = low confidence
✗ **Don't ignore divergence**: Early warning system
✗ **Don't overtrade**: Wait for clear setups
✗ **Don't fight the trend**: Zero line dictates bias
✗ **Don't skip stops**: Always use risk management
## Risk Management
### Position Sizing
- **Dark green/red signals**: 1-2% account risk
- **Light signals**: 0.5% account risk or skip
- **Divergence plays**: 1% account risk (higher uncertainty)
- **Multiple confirmations**: Up to 2% account risk
### Stop Loss Placement
- **Trend trades**: Below/above recent swing (20-30 points typical)
- **Breakout trades**: Below/above breakout level (15-25 points)
- **Divergence trades**: Beyond divergence extreme (25-40 points)
- **Scalp trades**: Tight stops at 10-15 points
### Profit Targets
- **Minimum**: 1.5:1 reward to risk ratio
- **Scalps**: 15-25 points (quick in/out)
- **Swing**: 50-100 points (hold through pullbacks)
- **Runners**: Trail with histogram color changes
## Timeframe Recommendations
| Timeframe | Trading Style | Typical Hold | Advantages | Challenges |
|-----------|---------------|--------------|------------|------------|
| **1-minute** | Scalping | 1-5 minutes | Fast profits, many setups | Noisy, high false signals |
| **5-minute** | Intraday | 15-60 minutes | Balance of speed/clarity | Still requires quick decisions |
| **15-minute** | Swing | 1-4 hours | Clearer trends, less noise | Fewer opportunities |
| **1-hour** | Position | 4-24 hours | Strong signals, less monitoring | Wider stops required |
**Recommendation**: Start with 5-minute for best balance of signal quality and opportunity frequency.
## Combining with Other Indicators
### VMACDv3 + ACCDv3
- **Use**: Confirm volume flow with price momentum
- **Signal**: Both showing dark green = highest conviction long
- **Divergence**: VMACDv3 bullish + ACCDv3 bearish = examine price action
### VMACDv3 + RSI
- **Use**: Overbought/oversold with momentum confirmation
- **Signal**: RSI < 30 + dark green VMACD = strong reversal
- **Caution**: RSI > 70 + light green VMACD = potential false breakout
### VMACDv3 + Elder Impulse
- **Use**: Bar coloring + histogram confirmation
- **Signal**: Green Elder bars + dark green VMACD = aligned momentum
- **Exit**: Blue Elder bars + light colors = momentum stalling
## Limitations
- **Requires volume data**: Will not work on instruments without volume feed
- **Lagging indicator**: MACD inherently follows price (2-3 bar delay)
- **Consolidation noise**: Generates false signals in tight ranges
- **Gap handling**: Large gaps can distort volume-weighted values
- **Not standalone**: Should combine with price action and support/resistance
## Troubleshooting
**Problem**: Too many light colored signals
**Solution**: Increase Volume MA Length to 30-40 for stricter filtering
**Problem**: Missing entries due to waiting for dark colors
**Solution**: Lower Volume MA Length to 10-15 for more signals (accept lower quality)
**Problem**: Divergences not appearing
**Solution**: Verify volume data available; check if A/D line is calculating
**Problem**: Histogram colors not changing
**Solution**: Ensure real-time data feed; refresh indicator
## Version History
- **v3**: Removed traditional MACD, using volume-weighted MACD on price with A/D divergence
- **v2**: Added A/D divergence detection, volume strength filtering, enhanced histogram colors
- **v1**: Basic volume-weighted MACD on price
## Related Indicators
**Companion Tools**:
- **ACCDv3**: Volume-weighted MACD on A/D line (distribution focus)
- **RSIv2**: RSI with A/D divergence detection
- **DMI**: Directional Movement Index with A/D divergence
- **Elder Impulse**: Bar coloring system using volume-weighted MACD
**Use Together**: VMACDv3 (momentum) + ACCDv3 (distribution) + Elder Impulse (bar colors) = complete volume-based trading system
---
*This indicator is for educational purposes. Past performance does not guarantee future results. Always practice proper risk management and never risk more than you can afford to lose.*
Ultimate RSI [captainua]Ultimate RSI
Overview
This indicator combines multiple RSI calculations with volume analysis, divergence detection, and trend filtering to provide a comprehensive RSI-based trading system. The script calculates RSI using three different periods (6, 14, 24) and applies various smoothing methods to reduce noise while maintaining responsiveness. The combination of these features creates a multi-layered confirmation system that reduces false signals by requiring alignment across multiple indicators and timeframes.
The script includes optimized configuration presets for instant setup: Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, and Position Trading. Simply select a preset to instantly configure all settings for your trading style, or use Custom mode for full manual control. All settings include automatic input validation to prevent configuration errors and ensure optimal performance.
Configuration Presets
The script includes preset configurations optimized for different trading styles, allowing you to instantly configure the indicator for your preferred trading approach. Simply select a preset from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown menu:
- Scalping: Optimized for fast-paced trading with shorter RSI periods (4, 7, 9) and minimal smoothing. Noise reduction is automatically disabled, and momentum confirmation is disabled to allow faster signal generation. Designed for quick entries and exits in volatile markets.
- Day Trading: Balanced configuration for intraday trading with moderate RSI periods (6, 9, 14) and light smoothing. Momentum confirmation is enabled for better signal quality. Ideal for day trading strategies requiring timely but accurate signals.
- Swing Trading: Configured for medium-term positions with standard RSI periods (14, 14, 21) and moderate smoothing. Provides smoother signals suitable for swing trading timeframes. All noise reduction features remain active.
- Position Trading: Optimized for longer-term trades with extended RSI periods (24, 21, 28) and heavier smoothing. Filters are configured for highest-quality signals. Best for position traders holding trades over multiple days or weeks.
- Custom: Full manual control over all settings. All input parameters are available for complete customization. This is the default mode and maintains full backward compatibility with previous versions.
When a preset is selected, it automatically adjusts RSI periods, smoothing lengths, and filter settings to match the trading style. The preset configurations ensure optimal settings are applied instantly, eliminating the need for manual configuration. All settings can still be manually overridden if needed, providing flexibility while maintaining ease of use.
Input Validation and Error Prevention
The script includes comprehensive input validation to prevent configuration errors:
- Cross-Input Validation: Smoothing lengths are automatically validated to ensure they are always less than their corresponding RSI period length. If you set a smoothing length greater than or equal to the RSI length, the script automatically adjusts it to (RSI Length - 1). This prevents logical errors and ensures valid configurations.
- Input Range Validation: All numeric inputs have minimum and maximum value constraints enforced by TradingView's input system, preventing invalid parameter values.
- Smart Defaults: Preset configurations use validated default values that are tested and optimized for each trading style. When switching between presets, all related settings are automatically updated to maintain consistency.
Core Calculations
Multi-Period RSI:
The script calculates RSI using the standard Wilder's RSI formula: RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS)), where RS = Average Gain / Average Loss over the specified period. Three separate RSI calculations run simultaneously:
- RSI(6): Uses 6-period lookback for high sensitivity to recent price changes, useful for scalping and early signal detection
- RSI(14): Standard 14-period RSI for balanced analysis, the most commonly used RSI period
- RSI(24): Longer 24-period RSI for trend confirmation, provides smoother signals with less noise
Each RSI can be smoothed using EMA, SMA, RMA (Wilder's smoothing), WMA, or Zero-Lag smoothing. Zero-Lag smoothing uses the formula: ZL-RSI = RSI + (RSI - RSI ) to reduce lag while maintaining signal quality. You can apply individual smoothing lengths to each RSI period, or use global smoothing where all three RSIs share the same smoothing length.
Dynamic Overbought/Oversold Thresholds:
Static thresholds (default 70/30) are adjusted based on market volatility using ATR. The formula: Dynamic OB = Base OB + (ATR × Volatility Multiplier × Base Percentage / 100), Dynamic OS = Base OS - (ATR × Volatility Multiplier × Base Percentage / 100). This adapts to volatile markets where traditional 70/30 levels may be too restrictive. During high volatility, the dynamic thresholds widen, and during low volatility, they narrow. The thresholds are clamped between 0-100 to remain within RSI bounds. The ATR is cached for performance optimization, updating on confirmed bars and real-time bars.
Adaptive RSI Calculation:
An adaptive RSI adjusts the standard RSI(14) based on current volatility relative to average volatility. The calculation: Adaptive Factor = (Current ATR / SMA of ATR over 20 periods) × Volatility Multiplier. If SMA of ATR is zero (edge case), the adaptive factor defaults to 0. The adaptive RSI = Base RSI × (1 + Adaptive Factor), clamped to 0-100. This makes the indicator more responsive during high volatility periods when traditional RSI may lag. The adaptive RSI is used for signal generation (buy/sell signals) but is not plotted on the chart.
Overbought/Oversold Fill Zones:
The script provides visual fill zones between the RSI line and the threshold lines when RSI is in overbought or oversold territory. The fill logic uses inclusive conditions: fills are shown when RSI is currently in the zone OR was in the zone on the previous bar. This ensures complete coverage of entry and exit boundaries. A minimum gap of 0.1 RSI points is maintained between the RSI plot and threshold line to ensure reliable polygon rendering in TradingView. The fill uses invisible plots at the threshold levels and the RSI value, with the fill color applied between them. You can select which RSI (6, 14, or 24) to use for the fill zones.
Divergence Detection
Regular Divergence:
Bullish divergence: Price makes a lower low (current low < lowest low from previous lookback period) while RSI makes a higher low (current RSI > lowest RSI from previous lookback period). Bearish divergence: Price makes a higher high (current high > highest high from previous lookback period) while RSI makes a lower high (current RSI < highest RSI from previous lookback period). The script compares current price/RSI values to the lowest/highest values from the previous lookback period using ta.lowest() and ta.highest() functions with index to reference the previous period's extreme.
Pivot-Based Divergence:
An enhanced divergence detection method that uses actual pivot points instead of simple lowest/highest comparisons. This provides more accurate divergence detection by identifying significant pivot lows/highs in both price and RSI. The pivot-based method uses a tolerance-based approach with configurable constants: 1% tolerance for price comparisons (priceTolerancePercent = 0.01) and 1.0 RSI point absolute tolerance for RSI comparisons (pivotTolerance = 1.0). Minimum divergence threshold is 1.0 RSI point (minDivergenceThreshold = 1.0). It looks for two recent pivot points and compares them: for bullish divergence, price makes a lower low (at least 1% lower) while RSI makes a higher low (at least 1.0 point higher). This method reduces false divergences by requiring actual pivot points rather than just any low/high within a period. When enabled, pivot-based divergence replaces the traditional method for more accurate signal generation.
Strong Divergence:
Regular divergence is confirmed by an engulfing candle pattern. Bullish engulfing requires: (1) Previous candle is bearish (close < open ), (2) Current candle is bullish (close > open), (3) Current close > previous open, (4) Current open < previous close. Bearish engulfing is the inverse: previous bullish, current bearish, current close < previous open, current open > previous close. Strong divergence signals are marked with visual indicators (🐂 for bullish, 🐻 for bearish) and have separate alert conditions.
Hidden Divergence:
Continuation patterns that signal trend continuation rather than reversal. Bullish hidden divergence: Price makes a higher low (current low > lowest low from previous period) but RSI makes a lower low (current RSI < lowest RSI from previous period). Bearish hidden divergence: Price makes a lower high (current high < highest high from previous period) but RSI makes a higher high (current RSI > highest RSI from previous period). These patterns indicate the trend is likely to continue in the current direction.
Volume Confirmation System
Volume threshold filtering requires current volume to exceed the volume SMA multiplied by the threshold factor. The formula: Volume Confirmed = Volume > (Volume SMA × Threshold). If the threshold is set to 0.1 or lower, volume confirmation is effectively disabled (always returns true). This allows you to use the indicator without volume filtering if desired.
Volume Climax is detected when volume exceeds: Volume SMA + (Volume StdDev × Multiplier). This indicates potential capitulation moments where extreme volume accompanies price movements. Volume Dry-Up is detected when volume falls below: Volume SMA - (Volume StdDev × Multiplier), indicating low participation periods that may produce unreliable signals. The volume SMA is cached for performance, updating on confirmed and real-time bars.
Multi-RSI Synergy
The script generates signals when multiple RSI periods align in overbought or oversold zones. This creates a confirmation system that reduces false signals. In "ALL" mode, all three RSIs (6, 14, 24) must be simultaneously above the overbought threshold OR all three must be below the oversold threshold. In "2-of-3" mode, any two of the three RSIs must align in the same direction. The script counts how many RSIs are in each zone: twoOfThreeOB = ((rsi6OB ? 1 : 0) + (rsi14OB ? 1 : 0) + (rsi24OB ? 1 : 0)) >= 2.
Synergy signals require: (1) Multi-RSI alignment (ALL or 2-of-3), (2) Volume confirmation, (3) Reset condition satisfied (enough bars since last synergy signal), (4) Additional filters passed (RSI50, Trend, ADX, Volume Dry-Up avoidance). Separate reset conditions track buy and sell signals independently. The reset condition uses ta.barssince() to count bars since the last trigger, returning true if the condition never occurred (allowing first signal) or if enough bars have passed.
Regression Forecasting
The script uses historical RSI values to forecast future RSI direction using four methods. The forecast horizon is configurable (1-50 bars ahead). Historical data is collected into an array, and regression coefficients are calculated based on the selected method.
Linear Regression: Calculates the least-squares fit line (y = mx + b) through the last N RSI values. The calculation: meanX = sumX / horizon, meanY = sumY / horizon, denominator = sumX² - horizon × meanX², m = (sumXY - horizon × meanX × meanY) / denominator, b = meanY - m × meanX. The forecast projects this line forward: forecast = b + m × i for i = 1 to horizon.
Polynomial Regression: Fits a quadratic curve (y = ax² + bx + c) to capture non-linear trends. The system of equations is solved using Cramer's rule with a 3×3 determinant. If the determinant is too small (< 0.0001), the system falls back to linear regression. Coefficients are calculated by solving: n×c + sumX×b + sumX²×a = sumY, sumX×c + sumX²×b + sumX³×a = sumXY, sumX²×c + sumX³×b + sumX⁴×a = sumX²Y. Note: Due to the O(n³) computational complexity of polynomial regression, the forecast horizon is automatically limited to a maximum of 20 bars when using polynomial regression to maintain optimal performance. If you set a horizon greater than 20 bars with polynomial regression, it will be automatically capped at 20 bars.
Exponential Smoothing: Applies exponential smoothing with adaptive alpha = 2/(horizon+1). The smoothing iterates from oldest to newest value: smoothed = alpha × series + (1 - alpha) × smoothed. Trend is calculated by comparing current smoothed value to an earlier smoothed value (at 60% of horizon): trend = (smoothed - earlierSmoothed) / (horizon - earlierIdx). Forecast: forecast = base + trend × i.
Moving Average: Uses the difference between short MA (horizon/2) and long MA (horizon) to estimate trend direction. Trend = (maShort - maLong) / (longLen - shortLen). Forecast: forecast = maShort + trend × i.
Confidence bands are calculated using RMSE (Root Mean Squared Error) of historical forecast accuracy. The error calculation compares historical values with forecast values: RMSE = sqrt(sumSquaredError / count). If insufficient data exists, it falls back to calculating standard deviation of recent RSI values. Confidence bands = forecast ± (RMSE × confidenceLevel). All forecast values and confidence bands are clamped to 0-100 to remain within RSI bounds. The regression functions include comprehensive safety checks: horizon validation (must not exceed array size), empty array handling, edge case handling for horizon=1 scenarios, division-by-zero protection, and bounds checking for all array access operations to prevent runtime errors.
Strong Top/Bottom Detection
Strong buy signals require three conditions: (1) RSI is at its lowest point within the bottom period: rsiVal <= ta.lowest(rsiVal, bottomPeriod), (2) RSI is below the oversold threshold minus a buffer: rsiVal < (oversoldThreshold - rsiTopBottomBuffer), where rsiTopBottomBuffer = 2.0 RSI points, (3) The absolute difference between current RSI and the lowest RSI exceeds the threshold value: abs(rsiVal - ta.lowest(rsiVal, bottomPeriod)) > threshold. This indicates a bounce from extreme levels with sufficient distance from the absolute low.
Strong sell signals use the inverse logic: RSI at highest point, above overbought threshold + rsiTopBottomBuffer (2.0 RSI points), and difference from highest exceeds threshold. Both signals also require: volume confirmation, reset condition satisfied (separate reset for buy vs sell), and all additional filters passed (RSI50, Trend, ADX, Volume Dry-Up avoidance).
The reset condition uses separate logic for buy and sell: resetCondBuy checks bars since isRSIAtBottom, resetCondSell checks bars since isRSIAtTop. This ensures buy signals reset based on bottom conditions and sell signals reset based on top conditions, preventing incorrect signal blocking.
Filtering System
RSI(50) Filter: Only allows buy signals when RSI(14) > 50 (bullish momentum) and sell signals when RSI(14) < 50 (bearish momentum). This filter ensures you're buying in uptrends and selling in downtrends from a momentum perspective. The filter is optional and can be disabled. Recommended to enable for noise reduction.
Trend Filter: Uses a long-term EMA (default 200) to determine trend direction. Buy signals require price above EMA, sell signals require price below EMA. The EMA slope is calculated as: emaSlope = ema - ema . Optional EMA slope filter additionally requires the EMA to be rising (slope > 0) for buy signals or falling (slope < 0) for sell signals. This provides stronger trend confirmation by requiring both price position and EMA direction.
ADX Filter: Uses the Directional Movement Index (calculated via ta.dmi()) to measure trend strength. Signals only fire when ADX exceeds the threshold (default 20), indicating a strong trend rather than choppy markets. The ADX calculation uses separate length and smoothing parameters. This filter helps avoid signals during sideways/consolidation periods.
Volume Dry-Up Avoidance: Prevents signals during periods of extremely low volume relative to average. If volume dry-up is detected and the filter is enabled, signals are blocked. This helps avoid unreliable signals that occur during low participation periods.
RSI Momentum Confirmation: Requires RSI to be accelerating in the signal direction before confirming signals. For buy signals, RSI must be consistently rising (recovering from oversold) over the lookback period. For sell signals, RSI must be consistently falling (declining from overbought) over the lookback period. The momentum check verifies that all consecutive changes are in the correct direction AND the cumulative change is significant. This filter ensures signals only fire when RSI momentum aligns with the signal direction, reducing false signals from weak momentum.
Multi-Timeframe Confirmation: Requires higher timeframe RSI to align with the signal direction. For buy signals, current RSI must be below the higher timeframe RSI by at least the confirmation threshold. For sell signals, current RSI must be above the higher timeframe RSI by at least the confirmation threshold. This ensures signals align with the larger trend context, reducing counter-trend trades. The higher timeframe RSI is fetched using request.security() from the selected timeframe.
All filters use the pattern: filterResult = not filterEnabled OR conditionMet. This means if a filter is disabled, it always passes (returns true). Filters can be combined, and all must pass for a signal to fire.
RSI Centerline and Period Crossovers
RSI(50) Centerline Crossovers: Detects when the selected RSI source crosses above or below the 50 centerline. Bullish crossover: ta.crossover(rsiSource, 50), bearish crossover: ta.crossunder(rsiSource, 50). You can select which RSI (6, 14, or 24) to use for these crossovers. These signals indicate momentum shifts from bearish to bullish (above 50) or bullish to bearish (below 50).
RSI Period Crossovers: Detects when different RSI periods cross each other. Available pairs: RSI(6) × RSI(14), RSI(14) × RSI(24), or RSI(6) × RSI(24). Bullish crossover: fast RSI crosses above slow RSI (ta.crossover(rsiFast, rsiSlow)), indicating momentum acceleration. Bearish crossover: fast RSI crosses below slow RSI (ta.crossunder(rsiFast, rsiSlow)), indicating momentum deceleration. These crossovers can signal shifts in momentum before price moves.
StochRSI Calculation
Stochastic RSI applies the Stochastic oscillator formula to RSI values instead of price. The calculation: %K = ((RSI - Lowest RSI) / (Highest RSI - Lowest RSI)) × 100, where the lookback is the StochRSI length. If the range is zero, %K defaults to 50.0. %K is then smoothed using SMA with the %K smoothing length. %D is calculated as SMA of smoothed %K with the %D smoothing length. All values are clamped to 0-100. You can select which RSI (6, 14, or 24) to use as the source for StochRSI calculation.
RSI Bollinger Bands
Bollinger Bands are applied to RSI(14) instead of price. The calculation: Basis = SMA(RSI(14), BB Period), StdDev = stdev(RSI(14), BB Period), Upper = Basis + (StdDev × Deviation Multiplier), Lower = Basis - (StdDev × Deviation Multiplier). This creates dynamic zones around RSI that adapt to RSI volatility. When RSI touches or exceeds the bands, it indicates extreme conditions relative to recent RSI behavior.
Noise Reduction System
The script includes a comprehensive noise reduction system to filter false signals and improve accuracy. When enabled, signals must pass multiple quality checks:
Signal Strength Requirement: RSI must be at least X points away from the centerline (50). For buy signals, RSI must be at least X points below 50. For sell signals, RSI must be at least X points above 50. This ensures signals only trigger when RSI is significantly in oversold/overbought territory, not just near neutral.
Extreme Zone Requirement: RSI must be deep in the OB/OS zone. For buy signals, RSI must be at least X points below the oversold threshold. For sell signals, RSI must be at least X points above the overbought threshold. This ensures signals only fire in extreme conditions where reversals are more likely.
Consecutive Bar Confirmation: The signal condition must persist for N consecutive bars before triggering. This reduces false signals from single-bar spikes or noise. The confirmation checks that the signal condition was true for all bars in the lookback period.
Zone Persistence (Optional): Requires RSI to remain in the OB/OS zone for N consecutive bars, not just touch it. This ensures RSI is truly in an extreme state rather than just briefly touching the threshold. When enabled, this provides stricter filtering for higher-quality signals.
RSI Slope Confirmation (Optional): Requires RSI to be moving in the expected signal direction. For buy signals, RSI should be rising (recovering from oversold). For sell signals, RSI should be falling (declining from overbought). This ensures momentum is aligned with the signal direction. The slope is calculated by comparing current RSI to RSI N bars ago.
All noise reduction filters can be enabled/disabled independently, allowing you to customize the balance between signal frequency and accuracy. The default settings provide a good balance, but you can adjust them based on your trading style and market conditions.
Alert System
The script includes separate alert conditions for each signal type: buy/sell (adaptive RSI crossovers), divergence (regular, strong, hidden), crossovers (RSI50 centerline, RSI period crossovers), synergy signals, and trend breaks. Each alert type has its own alertcondition() declaration with a unique title and message.
An optional cooldown system prevents alert spam by requiring a minimum number of bars between alerts of the same type. The cooldown check: canAlert = na(lastAlertBar) OR (bar_index - lastAlertBar >= cooldownBars). If the last alert bar is na (first alert), it always allows the alert. Each alert type maintains its own lastAlertBar variable, so cooldowns are independent per signal type. The default cooldown is 10 bars, which is recommended for noise reduction.
Higher Timeframe RSI
The script can display RSI from a higher timeframe using request.security(). This allows you to see the RSI context from a larger timeframe (e.g., daily RSI on an hourly chart). The higher timeframe RSI uses RSI(14) calculation from the selected timeframe. This provides context for the current timeframe's RSI position relative to the larger trend.
RSI Pivot Trendlines
The script can draw trendlines connecting pivot highs and lows on RSI(6). This feature helps visualize RSI trends and identify potential trend breaks.
Pivot Detection: Pivots are detected using a configurable period. The script can require pivots to have minimum strength (RSI points difference from surrounding bars) to filter out weak pivots. Lower minPivotStrength values detect more pivots (more trendlines), while higher values detect only stronger pivots (fewer but more significant trendlines). Pivot confirmation is optional: when enabled, the script waits N bars to confirm the pivot remains the extreme, reducing repainting. Pivot confirmation functions (f_confirmPivotLow and f_confirmPivotHigh) are always called on every bar for consistency, as recommended by TradingView. When pivot bars are not available (na), safe default values are used, and the results are then used conditionally based on confirmation settings. This ensures consistent calculations and prevents calculation inconsistencies.
Trendline Drawing: Uptrend lines connect confirmed pivot lows (green), and downtrend lines connect confirmed pivot highs (red). By default, only the most recent trendline is shown (old trendlines are deleted when new pivots are confirmed). This keeps the chart clean and uncluttered. If "Keep Historical Trendlines" is enabled, the script preserves up to N historical trendlines (configurable via "Max Trendlines to Keep", default 5). When historical trendlines are enabled, old trendlines are saved to arrays instead of being deleted, allowing you to see multiple trendlines simultaneously for better trend analysis. The arrays are automatically limited to prevent memory accumulation.
Trend Break Detection: Signals are generated when RSI breaks above or below trendlines. Uptrend breaks (RSI crosses below uptrend line) generate buy signals. Downtrend breaks (RSI crosses above downtrend line) generate sell signals. Optional trend break confirmation requires the break to persist for N bars and optionally include volume confirmation. Trendline angle filtering can exclude flat/weak trendlines from generating signals (minTrendlineAngle > 0 filters out weak/flat trendlines).
How Components Work Together
The combination of multiple RSI periods provides confirmation across different timeframes, reducing false signals. RSI(6) catches early moves, RSI(14) provides balanced signals, and RSI(24) confirms longer-term trends. When all three align (synergy), it indicates strong consensus across timeframes.
Volume confirmation ensures signals occur with sufficient market participation, filtering out low-volume false breakouts. Volume climax detection identifies potential reversal points, while volume dry-up avoidance prevents signals during unreliable low-volume periods.
Trend filters align signals with the overall market direction. The EMA filter ensures you're trading with the trend, and the EMA slope filter adds an additional layer by requiring the trend to be strengthening (rising EMA for buys, falling EMA for sells).
ADX filter ensures signals only fire during strong trends, avoiding choppy/consolidation periods. RSI(50) filter ensures momentum alignment with the trade direction.
Momentum confirmation requires RSI to be accelerating in the signal direction, ensuring signals only fire when momentum is aligned. Multi-timeframe confirmation ensures signals align with higher timeframe trends, reducing counter-trend trades.
Divergence detection identifies potential reversals before they occur, providing early warning signals. Pivot-based divergence provides more accurate detection by using actual pivot points. Hidden divergence identifies continuation patterns, useful for trend-following strategies.
The noise reduction system combines multiple filters (signal strength, extreme zone, consecutive bars, zone persistence, RSI slope) to significantly reduce false signals. These filters work together to ensure only high-quality signals are generated.
The synergy system requires alignment across all RSI periods for highest-quality signals, significantly reducing false positives. Regression forecasting provides forward-looking context, helping anticipate potential RSI direction changes.
Pivot trendlines provide visual trend analysis and can generate signals when RSI breaks trendlines, indicating potential reversals or continuations.
Reset conditions prevent signal spam by requiring a minimum number of bars between signals. Separate reset conditions for buy and sell signals ensure proper signal management.
Usage Instructions
Configuration Presets (Recommended): The script includes optimized preset configurations for instant setup. Simply select your trading style from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown:
- Scalping Preset: RSI(4, 7, 9) with minimal smoothing. Noise reduction disabled, momentum confirmation disabled for fastest signals.
- Day Trading Preset: RSI(6, 9, 14) with light smoothing. Momentum confirmation enabled for better signal quality.
- Swing Trading Preset: RSI(14, 14, 21) with moderate smoothing. Balanced configuration for medium-term trades.
- Position Trading Preset: RSI(24, 21, 28) with heavier smoothing. Optimized for longer-term positions with all filters active.
- Custom Mode: Full manual control over all settings. Default behavior matches previous script versions.
Presets automatically configure RSI periods, smoothing lengths, and filter settings. You can still manually adjust any setting after selecting a preset if needed.
Getting Started: The easiest way to get started is to select a configuration preset matching your trading style (Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, or Position Trading) from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown. This instantly configures all settings for optimal performance. Alternatively, use "Custom" mode for full manual control. The default configuration (Custom mode) shows RSI(6), RSI(14), and RSI(24) with their default smoothing. Overbought/oversold fill zones are enabled by default.
Customizing RSI Periods: Adjust the RSI lengths (6, 14, 24) based on your trading timeframe. Shorter periods (6) for scalping, standard (14) for day trading, longer (24) for swing trading. You can disable any RSI period you don't need.
Smoothing Selection: Choose smoothing method based on your needs. EMA provides balanced smoothing, RMA (Wilder's) is traditional, Zero-Lag reduces lag but may increase noise. Adjust smoothing lengths individually or use global smoothing for consistency. Note: Smoothing lengths are automatically validated to ensure they are always less than the corresponding RSI period length. If you set smoothing >= RSI length, it will be auto-adjusted to prevent invalid configurations.
Dynamic OB/OS: The dynamic thresholds automatically adapt to volatility. Adjust the volatility multiplier and base percentage to fine-tune sensitivity. Higher values create wider thresholds in volatile markets.
Volume Confirmation: Set volume threshold to 1.2 (default) for standard confirmation, higher for stricter filtering, or 0.1 to disable volume filtering entirely.
Multi-RSI Synergy: Use "ALL" mode for highest-quality signals (all 3 RSIs must align), or "2-of-3" mode for more frequent signals. Adjust the reset period to control signal frequency.
Filters: Enable filters gradually to find your preferred balance. Start with volume confirmation, then add trend filter, then ADX for strongest confirmation. RSI(50) filter is useful for momentum-based strategies and is recommended for noise reduction. Momentum confirmation and multi-timeframe confirmation add additional layers of accuracy but may reduce signal frequency.
Noise Reduction: The noise reduction system is enabled by default with balanced settings. Adjust minSignalStrength (default 3.0) to control how far RSI must be from centerline. Increase requireConsecutiveBars (default 1) to require signals to persist longer. Enable requireZonePersistence and requireRsiSlope for stricter filtering (higher quality but fewer signals). Start with defaults and adjust based on your needs.
Divergence: Enable divergence detection and adjust lookback periods. Strong divergence (with engulfing confirmation) provides higher-quality signals. Hidden divergence is useful for trend-following strategies. Enable pivot-based divergence for more accurate detection using actual pivot points instead of simple lowest/highest comparisons. Pivot-based divergence uses tolerance-based matching (1% for price, 1.0 RSI point for RSI) for better accuracy.
Forecasting: Enable regression forecasting to see potential RSI direction. Linear regression is simplest, polynomial captures curves, exponential smoothing adapts to trends. Adjust horizon based on your trading timeframe. Confidence bands show forecast uncertainty - wider bands indicate less reliable forecasts.
Pivot Trendlines: Enable pivot trendlines to visualize RSI trends and identify trend breaks. Adjust pivot detection period (default 5) - higher values detect fewer but stronger pivots. Enable pivot confirmation (default ON) to reduce repainting. Set minPivotStrength (default 1.0) to filter weak pivots - lower values detect more pivots (more trendlines), higher values detect only stronger pivots (fewer trendlines). Enable "Keep Historical Trendlines" to preserve multiple trendlines instead of just the most recent one. Set "Max Trendlines to Keep" (default 5) to control how many historical trendlines are preserved. Enable trend break confirmation for more reliable break signals. Adjust minTrendlineAngle (default 0.0) to filter flat trendlines - set to 0.1-0.5 to exclude weak trendlines.
Alerts: Set up alerts for your preferred signal types. Enable cooldown to prevent alert spam. Each signal type has its own alert condition, so you can be selective about which signals trigger alerts.
Visual Elements and Signal Markers
The script uses various visual markers to indicate signals and conditions:
- "sBottom" label (green): Strong bottom signal - RSI at extreme low with strong buy conditions
- "sTop" label (red): Strong top signal - RSI at extreme high with strong sell conditions
- "SyBuy" label (lime): Multi-RSI synergy buy signal - all RSIs aligned oversold
- "SySell" label (red): Multi-RSI synergy sell signal - all RSIs aligned overbought
- 🐂 emoji (green): Strong bullish divergence detected
- 🐻 emoji (red): Strong bearish divergence detected
- 🔆 emoji: Weak divergence signals (if enabled)
- "H-Bull" label: Hidden bullish divergence
- "H-Bear" label: Hidden bearish divergence
- ⚡ marker (top of pane): Volume climax detected (extreme volume) - positioned at top for visibility
- 💧 marker (top of pane): Volume dry-up detected (very low volume) - positioned at top for visibility
- ↑ triangle (lime): Uptrend break signal - RSI breaks below uptrend line
- ↓ triangle (red): Downtrend break signal - RSI breaks above downtrend line
- Triangle up (lime): RSI(50) bullish crossover
- Triangle down (red): RSI(50) bearish crossover
- Circle markers: RSI period crossovers
All markers are positioned at the RSI value where the signal occurs, using location.absolute for precise placement.
Signal Priority and Interpretation
Signals are generated independently and can occur simultaneously. Higher-priority signals generally indicate stronger setups:
1. Multi-RSI Synergy signals (SyBuy/SySell) - Highest priority: Requires alignment across all RSI periods plus volume and filter confirmation. These are the most reliable signals.
2. Strong Top/Bottom signals (sTop/sBottom) - High priority: Indicates extreme RSI levels with strong bounce conditions. Requires volume confirmation and all filters.
3. Divergence signals - Medium-High priority: Strong divergence (with engulfing) is more reliable than regular divergence. Hidden divergence indicates continuation rather than reversal.
4. Adaptive RSI crossovers - Medium priority: Buy when adaptive RSI crosses below dynamic oversold, sell when it crosses above dynamic overbought. These use volatility-adjusted RSI for more accurate signals.
5. RSI(50) centerline crossovers - Medium priority: Momentum shift signals. Less reliable alone but useful when combined with other confirmations.
6. RSI period crossovers - Lower priority: Early momentum shift indicators. Can provide early warning but may produce false signals in choppy markets.
Best practice: Wait for multiple confirmations. For example, a synergy signal combined with divergence and volume climax provides the strongest setup.
Chart Requirements
For proper script functionality and compliance with TradingView requirements, ensure your chart displays:
- Symbol name: The trading pair or instrument name should be visible
- Timeframe: The chart timeframe should be clearly displayed
- Script name: "Ultimate RSI " should be visible in the indicator title
These elements help traders understand what they're viewing and ensure proper script identification. The script automatically includes this information in the indicator title and chart labels.
Performance Considerations
The script is optimized for performance:
- ATR and Volume SMA are cached using var variables, updating only on confirmed and real-time bars to reduce redundant calculations
- Forecast line arrays are dynamically managed: lines are reused when possible, and unused lines are deleted to prevent memory accumulation
- Calculations use efficient Pine Script functions (ta.rsi, ta.ema, etc.) which are optimized by TradingView
- Array operations are minimized where possible, with direct calculations preferred
- Polynomial regression automatically caps the forecast horizon at 20 bars (POLYNOMIAL_MAX_HORIZON constant) to prevent performance degradation, as polynomial regression has O(n³) complexity. This safeguard ensures optimal performance even with large horizon settings
- Pivot detection includes edge case handling to ensure reliable calculations even on early bars with limited historical data. Regression forecasting functions include comprehensive safety checks: horizon validation (must not exceed array size), empty array handling, edge case handling for horizon=1 scenarios, and division-by-zero protection in all mathematical operations
The script should perform well on all timeframes. On very long historical data, forecast lines may accumulate if the horizon is large; consider reducing the forecast horizon if you experience performance issues. The polynomial regression performance safeguard automatically prevents performance issues for that specific regression type.
Known Limitations and Considerations
- Forecast lines are forward-looking projections and should not be used as definitive predictions. They provide context but are not guaranteed to be accurate.
- Dynamic OB/OS thresholds can exceed 100 or go below 0 in extreme volatility scenarios, but are clamped to 0-100 range. This means in very volatile markets, the dynamic thresholds may not widen as much as the raw calculation suggests.
- Volume confirmation requires sufficient historical volume data. On new instruments or very short timeframes, volume calculations may be less reliable.
- Higher timeframe RSI uses request.security() which may have slight delays on some data feeds.
- Regression forecasting requires at least N bars of history (where N = forecast horizon) before it can generate forecasts. Early bars will not show forecast lines.
- StochRSI calculation requires the selected RSI source to have sufficient history. Very short RSI periods on new charts may produce less reliable StochRSI values initially.
Practical Use Cases
The indicator can be configured for different trading styles and timeframes:
Swing Trading: Select the "Swing Trading" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses RSI periods (14, 14, 21) with moderate smoothing. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(24) with Multi-RSI Synergy in "ALL" mode, combined with trend filter (EMA 200) and ADX filter. This configuration provides high-probability setups with strong confirmation across multiple RSI periods.
Day Trading: Select the "Day Trading" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses RSI periods (6, 9, 14) with light smoothing and momentum confirmation enabled. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(6) with Zero-Lag smoothing for fast signal detection. Enable volume confirmation with threshold 1.2-1.5 for reliable entries. Combine with RSI(50) filter to ensure momentum alignment. Strong top/bottom signals work well for day trading reversals.
Trend Following: Enable trend filter (EMA) and EMA slope filter for strong trend confirmation. Use RSI(14) or RSI(24) with ADX filter to avoid choppy markets. Hidden divergence signals are useful for trend continuation entries.
Reversal Trading: Focus on divergence detection (regular and strong) combined with strong top/bottom signals. Enable volume climax detection to identify capitulation moments. Use RSI(6) for early reversal signals, confirmed by RSI(14) and RSI(24).
Forecasting and Planning: Enable regression forecasting with polynomial or exponential smoothing methods. Use forecast horizon of 10-20 bars for swing trading, 5-10 bars for day trading. Confidence bands help assess forecast reliability.
Multi-Timeframe Analysis: Enable higher timeframe RSI to see context from larger timeframes. For example, use daily RSI on hourly charts to understand the larger trend context. This helps avoid counter-trend trades.
Scalping: Select the "Scalping" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses RSI periods (4, 7, 9) with minimal smoothing, disables noise reduction, and disables momentum confirmation for faster signals. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(6) with minimal smoothing (or Zero-Lag) for ultra-fast signals. Disable most filters except volume confirmation. Use RSI period crossovers (RSI(6) × RSI(14)) for early momentum shifts. Set volume threshold to 1.0-1.2 for less restrictive filtering.
Position Trading: Select the "Position Trading" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses extended RSI periods (24, 21, 28) with heavier smoothing, optimized for longer-term trades. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(24) with all filters enabled (Trend, ADX, RSI(50), Volume Dry-Up avoidance). Multi-RSI Synergy in "ALL" mode provides highest-quality signals.
Practical Tips and Best Practices
Getting Started: The fastest way to get started is to select a configuration preset that matches your trading style. Simply choose "Scalping", "Day Trading", "Swing Trading", or "Position Trading" from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown to instantly configure all settings optimally. For advanced users, use "Custom" mode for full manual control. The default configuration (Custom mode) is balanced and works well across different markets. After observing behavior, customize settings to match your trading style.
Reducing Repainting: All signals are based on confirmed bars, minimizing repainting. The script uses confirmed bar data for all calculations to ensure backtesting accuracy.
Signal Quality: Multi-RSI Synergy signals in "ALL" mode provide the highest-quality signals because they require alignment across all three RSI periods. These signals have lower frequency but higher reliability. For more frequent signals, use "2-of-3" mode. The noise reduction system further improves signal quality by requiring multiple confirmations (signal strength, extreme zone, consecutive bars, optional zone persistence and RSI slope). Adjust noise reduction settings to balance signal frequency vs. accuracy.
Filter Combinations: Start with volume confirmation, then add trend filter for trend alignment, then ADX filter for trend strength. Combining all three filters significantly reduces false signals but also reduces signal frequency. Find your balance based on your risk tolerance.
Volume Filtering: Set volume threshold to 0.1 or lower to effectively disable volume filtering if you trade instruments with unreliable volume data or want to test without volume confirmation. Standard confirmation uses 1.2-1.5 threshold.
RSI Period Selection: RSI(6) is most sensitive and best for scalping or early signal detection. RSI(14) provides balanced signals suitable for day trading. RSI(24) is smoother and better for swing trading and trend confirmation. You can disable any RSI period you don't need to reduce visual clutter.
Smoothing Methods: EMA provides balanced smoothing with moderate lag. RMA (Wilder's smoothing) is traditional and works well for RSI. Zero-Lag reduces lag but may increase noise. WMA gives more weight to recent values. Choose based on your preference for responsiveness vs. smoothness.
Forecasting: Linear regression is simplest and works well for trending markets. Polynomial regression captures curves and works better in ranging markets. Exponential smoothing adapts to trends. Moving average method is most conservative. Use confidence bands to assess forecast reliability.
Divergence: Strong divergence (with engulfing confirmation) is more reliable than regular divergence. Hidden divergence indicates continuation rather than reversal, useful for trend-following strategies. Pivot-based divergence provides more accurate detection by using actual pivot points instead of simple lowest/highest comparisons. Adjust lookback periods based on your timeframe: shorter for day trading, longer for swing trading. Pivot divergence period (default 5) controls the sensitivity of pivot detection.
Dynamic Thresholds: Dynamic OB/OS thresholds automatically adapt to volatility. In volatile markets, thresholds widen; in calm markets, they narrow. Adjust the volatility multiplier and base percentage to fine-tune sensitivity. Higher values create wider thresholds in volatile markets.
Alert Management: Enable alert cooldown (default 10 bars, recommended) to prevent alert spam. Each alert type has its own cooldown, so you can set different cooldowns for different signal types. For example, use shorter cooldown for synergy signals (high quality) and longer cooldown for crossovers (more frequent). The cooldown system works independently for each signal type, preventing spam while allowing different signal types to fire when appropriate.
Technical Specifications
- Pine Script Version: v6
- Indicator Type: Non-overlay (displays in separate panel below price chart)
- Repainting Behavior: Minimal - all signals are based on confirmed bars, ensuring accurate backtesting results
- Performance: Optimized with caching for ATR and volume calculations. Forecast arrays are dynamically managed to prevent memory accumulation.
- Compatibility: Works on all timeframes (1 minute to 1 month) and all instruments (stocks, forex, crypto, futures, etc.)
- Edge Case Handling: All calculations include safety checks for division by zero, NA values, and boundary conditions. Reset conditions and alert cooldowns handle edge cases where conditions never occurred or values are NA.
- Reset Logic: Separate reset conditions for buy signals (based on bottom conditions) and sell signals (based on top conditions) ensure logical correctness.
- Input Parameters: 60+ customizable parameters organized into logical groups for easy configuration. Configuration presets available for instant setup (Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, Position Trading, Custom).
- Noise Reduction: Comprehensive noise reduction system with multiple filters (signal strength, extreme zone, consecutive bars, zone persistence, RSI slope) to reduce false signals.
- Pivot-Based Divergence: Enhanced divergence detection using actual pivot points for improved accuracy.
- Momentum Confirmation: RSI momentum filter ensures signals only fire when RSI is accelerating in the signal direction.
- Multi-Timeframe Confirmation: Optional higher timeframe RSI alignment for trend confirmation.
- Enhanced Pivot Trendlines: Trendline drawing with strength requirements, confirmation, and trend break detection.
Technical Notes
- All RSI values are clamped to 0-100 range to ensure valid oscillator values
- ATR and Volume SMA are cached for performance, updating on confirmed and real-time bars
- Reset conditions handle edge cases: if a condition never occurred, reset returns true (allows first signal)
- Alert cooldown handles na values: if no previous alert, cooldown allows the alert
- Forecast arrays are dynamically sized based on horizon, with unused lines cleaned up
- Fill logic uses a minimum gap (0.1) to ensure reliable polygon rendering in TradingView
- All calculations include safety checks for division by zero and boundary conditions. Regression functions validate that horizon doesn't exceed array size, and all array access operations include bounds checking to prevent out-of-bounds errors
- The script uses separate reset conditions for buy signals (based on bottom conditions) and sell signals (based on top conditions) for logical correctness
- Background coloring uses a fallback system: dynamic color takes priority, then RSI(6) heatmap, then monotone if both are disabled
- Noise reduction filters are applied after accuracy filters, providing multiple layers of signal quality control
- Pivot trendlines use strength requirements to filter weak pivots, reducing noise in trendline drawing. Historical trendlines are stored in arrays and automatically limited to prevent memory accumulation when "Keep Historical Trendlines" is enabled
- Volume climax and dry-up markers are positioned at the top of the pane for better visibility
- All calculations are optimized with conditional execution - features only calculate when enabled (performance optimization)
- Input Validation: Automatic cross-input validation ensures smoothing lengths are always less than RSI period lengths, preventing configuration errors
- Configuration Presets: Four optimized preset configurations (Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, Position Trading) for instant setup, plus Custom mode for full manual control
- Constants Management: Magic numbers extracted to documented constants for improved maintainability and easier tuning (pivot tolerance, divergence thresholds, fill gap, etc.)
- TradingView Function Consistency: All TradingView functions (ta.crossover, ta.crossunder, ta.atr, ta.lowest, ta.highest, ta.lowestbars, ta.highestbars, etc.) and custom functions that depend on historical results (f_consecutiveBarConfirmation, f_rsiSlopeConfirmation, f_rsiZonePersistence, f_applyAllFilters, f_rsiMomentum, f_forecast, f_confirmPivotLow, f_confirmPivotHigh) are called on every bar for consistency, as recommended by TradingView. Results are then used conditionally when needed. This ensures consistent calculations and prevents calculation inconsistencies.
Hellenic EMA Matrix - PremiumHellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium
Complete User Guide
Table of Contents
Introduction
Indicator Philosophy
Mathematical Constants
EMA Types
Settings
Trading Signals
Visualization
Usage Strategies
FAQ
Introduction
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a premium indicator based on mathematical constants of nature: Phi (Phi - Golden Ratio), Pi (Pi), e (Euler's number). The indicator uses these universal constants to create dynamic EMAs that adapt to the natural rhythms of the market.
Key Features:
6 EMA types based on mathematical constants
Premium visualization with Neon Glow and Gradient Clouds
Automatic Fast/Mid/Slow EMA sorting
STRONG signals for powerful trends
Pulsing Ribbon Bar for instant trend assessment
Works on all timeframes (M1 - MN)
Indicator Philosophy
Why Mathematical Constants?
Traditional EMAs use arbitrary periods (9, 21, 50, 200). Hellenic Matrix goes further, using universal mathematical constants found in nature:
Phi (1.618) - Golden Ratio: galaxy spirals, seashells, human body proportions
Pi (3.14159) - Pi: circles, waves, cycles
e (2.71828) - Natural logarithm base: exponential growth, radioactive decay
Markets are also a natural system composed of millions of participants. Using mathematical constants allows tuning into the natural rhythms of market cycles.
Mathematical Constants
Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio
Phi = 1.618033988749895
Properties:
Phi² = Phi + 1 = 2.618
Phi³ = 4.236
Phi⁴ = 6.854
Application: Ideal for trending movements and Fibonacci corrections
Pi (Pi) - Pi Number
Pi = 3.141592653589793
Properties:
2Pi = 6.283 (full circle)
3Pi = 9.425
4Pi = 12.566
Application: Excellent for cyclical markets and wave structures
e (Euler) - Euler's Number
e = 2.718281828459045
Properties:
e² = 7.389
e³ = 20.085
e⁴ = 54.598
Application: Suitable for exponential movements and volatile markets
EMA Types
1. Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio EMA
Description: EMA based on the golden ratio
Period Formula:
Period = Phi^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Phi Power Level (1-8): Power of Phi
Phi¹ = 1.618 → ~16 period (with Base=10)
Phi² = 2.618 → ~26 period
Phi³ = 4.236 → ~42 period (recommended)
Phi⁴ = 6.854 → ~69 period
Recommendations:
Phi² or Phi³ for day trading
Phi⁴ or Phi⁵ for swing trading
Works excellently as Fast EMA
2. Pi (Pi) - Circular EMA
Description: EMA based on Pi for cyclical movements
Period Formula:
Period = Pi × Multiple × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Pi Multiple (1-10): Pi multiplier
1Pi = 3.14 → ~31 period (with Base=10)
2Pi = 6.28 → ~63 period (recommended)
3Pi = 9.42 → ~94 period
Recommendations:
2Pi ideal as Mid or Slow EMA
Excellently identifies cycles and waves
Use on volatile markets (crypto, forex)
3. e (Euler) - Natural EMA
Description: EMA based on natural logarithm
Period Formula:
Period = e^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
e Power Level (1-6): Power of e
e¹ = 2.718 → ~27 period (with Base=10)
e² = 7.389 → ~74 period (recommended)
e³ = 20.085 → ~201 period
Recommendations:
e² works excellently as Slow EMA
Ideal for stocks and indices
Filters noise well on lower timeframes
4. Delta (Delta) - Adaptive EMA
Description: Adaptive EMA that changes period based on volatility
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + (Volatility - 1) × Factor)
Parameters:
Delta Base Period (5-200): Base period (default 20)
Delta Volatility Sensitivity (0.5-5.0): Volatility sensitivity (default 2.0)
How it works:
During low volatility → period decreases → EMA reacts faster
During high volatility → period increases → EMA smooths noise
Recommendations:
Works excellently on news and sharp movements
Use as Fast EMA for quick adaptation
Sensitivity 2.0-3.0 for crypto, 1.0-2.0 for stocks
5. Sigma (Sigma) - Composite EMA
Description: Composite EMA combining multiple active EMAs
Composition Methods:
Weighted Average (default):
Sigma = (Phi + Pi + e + Delta) / 4
Simple average of all active EMAs
Geometric Mean:
Sigma = fourth_root(Phi × Pi × e × Delta)
Geometric mean (more conservative)
Harmonic Mean:
Sigma = 4 / (1/Phi + 1/Pi + 1/e + 1/Delta)
Harmonic mean (more weight to smaller values)
Recommendations:
Enable for additional confirmation
Use as Mid EMA
Weighted Average - most universal method
6. Lambda (Lambda) - Wave EMA
Description: Wave EMA with sinusoidal period modulation
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + Amplitude × sin(2Pi × bar / Frequency))
Parameters:
Lambda Base Period (10-200): Base period
Lambda Wave Amplitude (0.1-2.0): Wave amplitude
Lambda Wave Frequency (10-200): Wave frequency in bars
How it works:
Period pulsates sinusoidally
Creates wave effect following market cycles
Recommendations:
Experimental EMA for advanced users
Works well on cyclical markets
Frequency = 50 for day trading, 100+ for swing
Settings
Matrix Core Settings
Base Multiplier (1-100)
Multiplies all EMA periods
Base = 1: Very fast EMAs (Phi³ = 4, 2Pi = 6, e² = 7)
Base = 10: Standard (Phi³ = 42, 2Pi = 63, e² = 74)
Base = 20: Slow EMAs (Phi³ = 85, 2Pi = 126, e² = 148)
Recommendations by timeframe:
M1-M5: Base = 5-10
M15-H1: Base = 10-15 (recommended)
H4-D1: Base = 15-25
W1-MN: Base = 25-50
Matrix Source
Data source selection for EMA calculation:
close - closing price (standard)
open - opening price
high - high
low - low
hl2 - (high + low) / 2
hlc3 - (high + low + close) / 3
ohlc4 - (open + high + low + close) / 4
When to change:
hlc3 or ohlc4 for smoother signals
high for aggressive longs
low for aggressive shorts
Manual EMA Selection
Critically important setting! Determines which EMAs are used for signal generation.
Use Manual Fast/Slow/Mid Selection
Enabled (default): You select EMAs manually
Disabled: Automatic selection by periods
Fast EMA
Fast EMA - reacts first to price changes
Recommendations:
Phi Golden (recommended) - universal choice
Delta Adaptive - for volatile markets
Must be fastest (smallest period)
Slow EMA
Slow EMA - determines main trend
Recommendations:
Pi Circular (recommended) - excellent trend filter
e Natural - for smoother trend
Must be slowest (largest period)
Mid EMA
Mid EMA - additional signal filter
Recommendations:
e Natural (recommended) - excellent middle level
Pi Circular - alternative
None - for more frequent signals (only 2 EMAs)
IMPORTANT: The indicator automatically sorts selected EMAs by their actual periods:
Fast = EMA with smallest period
Mid = EMA with middle period
Slow = EMA with largest period
Therefore, you can select any combination - the indicator will arrange them correctly!
Premium Visualization
Neon Glow
Enable Neon Glow for EMAs - adds glowing effect around EMA lines
Glow Strength:
Light - subtle glow
Medium (recommended) - optimal balance
Strong - bright glow (may be too bright)
Effect: 2 glow layers around each EMA for 3D effect
Gradient Clouds
Enable Gradient Clouds - fills space between EMAs with gradient
Parameters:
Cloud Transparency (85-98): Cloud transparency
95-97 (recommended)
Higher = more transparent
Dynamic Cloud Intensity - automatically changes transparency based on EMA distance
Cloud Colors:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - when Pi above Phi (bullish)
Gold - when Phi above Pi (bearish)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - when e above Pi (bullish)
Blue - when Pi above e (bearish)
2 layers for volumetric effect
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Enable Pulsing Indicator Bar - pulsing strip at bottom/top of chart
Parameters:
Ribbon Position: Top / Bottom (recommended)
Pulse Speed: Slow / Medium (recommended) / Fast
Symbols and colors:
Green filled square - STRONG BULLISH
Pink filled square - STRONG BEARISH
Blue hollow square - Bullish (regular)
Red hollow square - Bearish (regular)
Purple rectangle - Neutral
Effect: Pulsation with sinusoid for living market feel
Signal Bar Highlights
Enable Signal Bar Highlights - highlights bars with signals
Parameters:
Highlight Transparency (88-96): Highlight transparency
Highlight Style:
Light Fill (recommended) - bar background fill
Thin Line - bar outline only
Highlights:
Golden Cross - green
Death Cross - pink
STRONG BUY - green
STRONG SELL - pink
Show Greek Labels
Shows Greek alphabet letters on last bar:
Phi - Phi EMA (gold)
Pi - Pi EMA (blue)
e - Euler EMA (green)
Delta - Delta EMA (purple)
Sigma - Sigma EMA (pink)
When to use: For education or presentations
Show Old Background
Old background style (not recommended):
Green background - STRONG BULLISH
Pink background - STRONG BEARISH
Blue background - Bullish
Red background - Bearish
Not recommended - use new Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Info Table
Show Info Table - table with indicator information
Parameters:
Position: Top Left / Top Right (recommended) / Bottom Left / Bottom Right
Size: Tiny / Small (recommended) / Normal / Large
Table contents:
EMA list - periods and current values of all active EMAs
Effects - active visual effects
TREND - current trend state:
STRONG UP - strong bullish
STRONG DOWN - strong bearish
Bullish - regular bullish
Bearish - regular bearish
Neutral - neutral
Momentum % - percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Setup - current Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Trading Signals
Show Golden/Death Cross
Golden Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below (bullish signal) Death Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above (bearish signal)
Symbols:
Yellow dot "GC" below - Golden Cross
Dark red dot "DC" above - Death Cross
Show STRONG Signals
STRONG BUY and STRONG SELL - the most powerful indicator signals
Conditions for STRONG BULLISH:
EMA Alignment: Fast > Mid > Slow (all EMAs aligned)
Trend: Fast > Slow (clear uptrend)
Distance: EMAs separated by minimum 0.15%
Price Position: Price above Fast EMA
Fast Slope: Fast EMA rising
Slow Slope: Slow EMA rising
Mid Trending: Mid EMA also rising (if enabled)
Conditions for STRONG BEARISH:
Same but in reverse
Visual display:
Green label "STRONG BUY" below bar
Pink label "STRONG SELL" above bar
Difference from Golden/Death Cross:
Golden/Death Cross = crossing moment (1 bar)
STRONG signal = sustained trend (lasts several bars)
IMPORTANT: After fixes, STRONG signals now:
Work on all timeframes (M1 to MN)
Don't break on small retracements
Work with any Fast/Mid/Slow combination
Automatically adapt thanks to EMA sorting
Show Stop Loss/Take Profit
Automatic SL/TP level calculation on STRONG signal
Parameters:
Stop Loss (ATR) (0.5-5.0): ATR multiplier for stop loss
1.5 (recommended) - standard
1.0 - tight stop
2.0-3.0 - wide stop
Take Profit R:R (1.0-5.0): Risk/reward ratio
2.0 (recommended) - standard (risk 1.5 ATR, profit 3.0 ATR)
1.5 - conservative
3.0-5.0 - aggressive
Formulas:
LONG:
Stop Loss = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
SHORT:
Stop Loss = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
Visualization:
Red X - Stop Loss
Green X - Take Profit
Levels remain active while STRONG signal persists
Trading Signals
Signal Types
1. Golden Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
Signal: Beginning of bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Golden Cross
STOP: Below local low or below Slow EMA
TARGET: Next resistance level or 2:1 R:R
Strengths:
Simple and clear
Works well on trending markets
Clear entry point
Weaknesses:
Lags (signal after movement starts)
Many false signals in ranging markets
May be late on fast moves
Optimal timeframes: H1, H4, D1
2. Death Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
Signal: Beginning of bearish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Death Cross
STOP: Above local high or above Slow EMA
TARGET: Next support level or 2:1 R:R
Application: Mirror of Golden Cross
3. STRONG BUY
Description: All EMAs aligned + trend + all EMAs rising
Signal: Powerful bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with STRONG BUY or on pullback to Fast EMA
STOP: Below Fast EMA or automatic SL (if enabled)
TARGET: Automatic TP (if enabled) or by levels
TRAILING: Follow Fast EMA
Entry strategies:
Aggressive: Enter immediately on signal
Conservative: Wait for pullback to Fast EMA, then enter on bounce
Pyramiding: Add positions on pullbacks to Mid EMA
Position management:
Hold while STRONG signal active
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross appearance
Move stop behind Fast EMA
Strengths:
Most reliable indicator signal
Doesn't break on pullbacks
Catches large moves
Works on all timeframes
Weaknesses:
Appears less frequently than other signals
Requires confirmation (multiple conditions)
Optimal timeframes: All (M5 - D1)
4. STRONG SELL
Description: All EMAs aligned down + downtrend + all EMAs falling
Signal: Powerful bearish trend
How to trade: Mirror of STRONG BUY
Visual Signals
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Quick market assessment at a glance:
Symbol Color State
Filled square Green STRONG BULLISH
Filled square Pink STRONG BEARISH
Hollow square Blue Bullish
Hollow square Red Bearish
Rectangle Purple Neutral
Pulsation: Sinusoidal, creates living effect
Signal Bar Highlights
Bars with signals are highlighted:
Green highlight: STRONG BUY or Golden Cross
Pink highlight: STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Gradient Clouds
Colored space between EMAs shows trend strength:
Wide clouds - strong trend
Narrow clouds - weak trend or consolidation
Color change - trend change
Info Table
Quick reference in corner:
TREND: Current state (STRONG UP, Bullish, Neutral, Bearish, STRONG DOWN)
Momentum %: Movement strength
Effects: Active visual effects
Setup: Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Usage Strategies
Strategy 1: "Golden Trailing"
Idea: Follow STRONG signals using Fast EMA as trailing stop
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
Wait for STRONG BUY
Enter on bar close or on pullback to Fast EMA
Stop below Fast EMA
Management:
Hold position while STRONG signal active
Move stop behind Fast EMA daily
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Take Profit:
Partially close at +2R
Trail remainder until exit signal
For whom: Swing traders, trend followers
Pros:
Catches large moves
Simple rules
Emotionally comfortable
Cons:
Requires patience
Possible extended drawdowns on pullbacks
Strategy 2: "Scalping Bounces"
Idea: Scalp bounces from Fast EMA during STRONG trend
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sensitivity 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 5
Timeframe: M5, M15
Entry rules:
STRONG signal must be active
Wait for price pullback to Fast EMA
Enter on bounce (candle closes above/below Fast EMA)
Stop behind local extreme (15-20 pips)
Take Profit:
+1.5R or to Mid EMA
Or to next level
For whom: Active day traders
Pros:
Many signals
Clear entry point
Quick profits
Cons:
Requires constant monitoring
Not all bounces work
Requires discipline for frequent trading
Strategy 3: "Triple Filter"
Idea: Enter only when all 3 EMAs and price perfectly aligned
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Entry rules (LONG):
STRONG BUY active
Price above all three EMAs
Fast > Mid > Slow (all aligned)
All EMAs rising (slope up)
Gradient Clouds wide and bright
Entry:
On bar close meeting all conditions
Or on next pullback to Fast EMA
Stop:
Below Mid EMA or -1.5 ATR
Take Profit:
First target: +3R
Second target: next major level
Trailing: Mid EMA
For whom: Conservative swing traders, investors
Pros:
Very reliable signals
Minimum false entries
Large profit potential
Cons:
Rare signals (2-5 per month)
Requires patience
Strategy 4: "Adaptive Scalper"
Idea: Use only Delta Adaptive EMA for quick volatility reaction
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None
Slow: Delta Adaptive (Base 30, Sensitivity 2.0)
Base Multiplier: 3
Timeframe: M1, M5
Feature: Two different Delta EMAs with different settings
Entry rules:
Golden Cross between two Delta EMAs
Both Delta EMAs must be rising/falling
Enter on next bar
Stop:
10-15 pips or below Slow Delta EMA
Take Profit:
+1R to +2R
Or Death Cross
For whom: Scalpers on cryptocurrencies and forex
Pros:
Instant volatility adaptation
Many signals on volatile markets
Quick results
Cons:
Much noise on calm markets
Requires fast execution
High commissions may eat profits
Strategy 5: "Cyclical Trader"
Idea: Use Pi and Lambda for trading cyclical markets
Settings:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Lambda Wave (Base 30, Amplitude 0.5, Frequency 50)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
STRONG signal active
Lambda Wave EMA synchronized with trend
Enter on bounce from Lambda Wave
For whom: Traders of cyclical assets (some altcoins, commodities)
Pros:
Catches cyclical movements
Lambda Wave provides additional entry points
Cons:
More complex to configure
Not for all markets
Lambda Wave may give false signals
Strategy 6: "Multi-Timeframe Confirmation"
Idea: Use multiple timeframes for confirmation
Scheme:
Higher TF (D1): Determine trend direction (STRONG signal)
Middle TF (H4): Wait for STRONG signal in same direction
Lower TF (M15): Look for entry point (Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA)
Settings for all TFs:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Rules:
All 3 TFs must show one trend
Entry on lower TF
Stop by lower TF
Target by higher TF
For whom: Serious traders and investors
Pros:
Maximum reliability
Large profit targets
Minimum false signals
Cons:
Rare setups
Requires analysis of multiple charts
Experience needed
Practical Tips
DOs
Use STRONG signals as primary - they're most reliable
Let signals develop - don't exit on first pullback
Use trailing stop - follow Fast EMA
Combine with levels - S/R, Fibonacci, volumes
Test on demo before real
Adjust Base Multiplier for your timeframe
Enable visual effects - they help see the picture
Use Info Table - quick situation assessment
Watch Pulsing Bar - instant state indicator
Trust auto-sorting of Fast/Mid/Slow
DON'Ts
Don't trade against STRONG signal - trend is your friend
Don't ignore Mid EMA - it adds reliability
Don't use too small Base Multiplier on higher TFs
Don't enter on Golden Cross in range - check for trend
Don't change settings during open position
Don't forget risk management - 1-2% per trade
Don't trade all signals in row - choose best ones
Don't use indicator in isolation - combine with Price Action
Don't set too tight stops - let trade breathe
Don't over-optimize - simplicity = reliability
Optimal Settings by Asset
US Stocks (SPY, AAPL, TSLA)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 10-15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Use on daily for swing
STRONG signals very reliable
Works well on trending stocks
Forex (EUR/USD, GBP/USD)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sens 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 8-12
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Features:
Delta Adaptive works excellently on news
Many signals on M15-H1
Consider spreads
Cryptocurrencies (BTC, ETH, altcoins)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sens 3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M5, M15, H1
Features:
High volatility - adaptation needed
STRONG signals can last days
Be careful with scalping on M1-M5
Commodities (Gold, Oil)
Recommendation:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base: 12-18
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Pi works excellently on cyclical commodities
Gold responds especially well to Phi
Oil volatile - use wide stops
Indices (S&P500, Nasdaq, DAX)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 15-20
Timeframe: H4, D1, W1
Features:
Very trending instruments
STRONG signals last weeks
Good for position trading
Alerts
The indicator supports 6 alert types:
1. Golden Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: GOLDEN CROSS - Fast EMA crossed above Slow EMA - Bullish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
2. Death Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: DEATH CROSS - Fast EMA crossed below Slow EMA - Bearish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
3. STRONG BULLISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BULLISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful uptrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG BUY met (first bar)
4. STRONG BEARISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BEARISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful downtrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG SELL met (first bar)
5. Bullish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BULLISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for uptrend"
When: EMAs aligned bullish + price above Fast EMA (less strict condition)
6. Bearish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BEARISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for downtrend"
When: EMAs aligned bearish + price below Fast EMA (less strict condition)
How to Set Up Alerts:
Open indicator on chart
Click on three dots next to indicator name
Select "Create Alert"
In "Condition" field select needed alert:
Golden Cross
Death Cross
STRONG BULLISH
STRONG BEARISH
Bullish Ribbon
Bearish Ribbon
Configure notification method:
Pop-up in browser
Email
SMS (in Premium accounts)
Push notifications in mobile app
Webhook (for automation)
Select frequency:
Once Per Bar Close (recommended) - once on bar close
Once Per Bar - during bar formation
Only Once - only first time
Click "Create"
Tip: Create separate alerts for different timeframes and instruments
FAQ
1. Why don't STRONG signals appear?
Possible reasons:
Incorrect Fast/Mid/Slow order
Solution: Indicator automatically sorts EMAs by periods, but ensure selected EMAs have different periods
Base Multiplier too large
Solution: Reduce Base to 5-10 on lower timeframes
Market in range
Solution: STRONG signals appear only in trends - this is normal
Too strict EMA settings
Solution: Try classic combination: Phi³ / Pi×2 / e² with Base=10
Mid EMA too close to Fast or Slow
Solution: Select Mid EMA with period between Fast and Slow
2. How often should STRONG signals appear?
Normal frequency:
M1-M5: 5-15 signals per day (very active markets)
M15-H1: 2-8 signals per day
H4: 3-10 signals per week
D1: 2-5 signals per month
W1: 2-6 signals per year
If too many signals - market very volatile or Base too small
If too few signals - market in range or Base too large
4. What are the best settings for beginners?
Universal "out of the box" settings:
Matrix Core:
Base Multiplier: 10
Source: close
Phi Golden: Enabled, Power = 3
Pi Circular: Enabled, Multiple = 2
e Natural: Enabled, Power = 2
Delta Adaptive: Enabled, Base = 20, Sensitivity = 2.0
Manual Selection:
Fast: Phi Golden
Mid: e Natural
Slow: Pi Circular
Visualization:
Gradient Clouds: ON
Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
Pulsing Bar: ON (Medium)
Signal Highlights: ON (Light Fill)
Table: ON (Top Right, Small)
Signals:
Golden/Death Cross: ON
STRONG Signals: ON
Stop Loss: OFF (while learning)
Timeframe for learning: H1 or H4
5. Can I use only one EMA?
No, minimum 2 EMAs (Fast and Slow) for signal generation.
Mid EMA is optional:
With Mid EMA = more reliable but rarer signals
Without Mid EMA = more signals but less strict filtering
Recommendation: Start with 3 EMAs (Fast/Mid/Slow), then experiment
6. Does the indicator work on cryptocurrencies?
Yes, works excellently! Especially good on:
Bitcoin (BTC)
Ethereum (ETH)
Major altcoins (SOL, BNB, XRP)
Recommended settings for crypto:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10-15, Sensitivity 2.5-3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Crypto market features:
High volatility → use Delta Adaptive
24/7 trading → set alerts
Sharp movements → wide stops
7. Can I trade only with this indicator?
Technically yes, but NOT recommended.
Best approach - combine with:
Price Action - support/resistance levels, candle patterns
Volume - movement strength confirmation
Fibonacci - retracement and extension levels
RSI/MACD - divergences and overbought/oversold
Fundamental analysis - news, company reports
Hellenic Matrix:
Excellently determines trend and its strength
Provides clear entry/exit points
Doesn't consider fundamentals
Doesn't see major levels
8. Why do Gradient Clouds change color?
Color depends on EMA order:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - Pi EMA above Phi EMA (bullish alignment)
Gold - Phi EMA above Pi EMA (bearish alignment)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - e EMA above Pi EMA (bullish alignment)
Blue - Pi EMA above e EMA (bearish alignment)
Color change = EMA order change = possible trend change
9. What is Momentum % in the table?
Momentum % = percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Formula:
Momentum = ((Close - Fast EMA) / Fast EMA) × 100
Interpretation:
+0.5% to +2% - normal bullish momentum
+2% to +5% - strong bullish momentum
+5% and above - overheating (correction possible)
-0.5% to -2% - normal bearish momentum
-2% to -5% - strong bearish momentum
-5% and below - oversold (bounce possible)
Usage:
Monitor momentum during STRONG signals
Large momentum = don't enter (wait for pullback)
Small momentum = good entry point
10. How to configure for scalping?
Settings for scalping (M1-M5):
Base Multiplier: 3-5
Source: close or hlc3 (smoother)
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 8-12, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None (for more signals)
Slow: Phi Golden (Phi²) or Pi Circular (1Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON (helps see strength)
- Neon Glow: OFF (doesn't clutter chart)
- Pulsing Bar: ON (quick assessment)
- Signal Highlights: ON
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: ON (1.0-1.5 ATR, R:R 1.5-2.0)
Scalping rules:
Trade only STRONG signals
Enter on bounce from Fast EMA
Tight stops (10-20 pips)
Quick take profit (+1R to +2R)
Don't hold through news
11. How to configure for long-term investing?
Settings for investing (D1-W1):
Base Multiplier: 20-30
Source: close
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³ or Phi⁴)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi or 4Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON
- Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
- Everything else - to taste
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: OFF (use percentage stop)
Investing rules:
Enter only on STRONG signals
Hold while STRONG active (weeks/months)
Stop below Slow EMA or -10%
Take profit: by company targets or +50-100%
Ignore short-term pullbacks
12. What if indicator slows down chart?
Indicator is optimized, but if it slows:
Disable unnecessary visual effects:
Neon Glow: OFF (saves 8 plots)
Gradient Clouds: ON but low quality
Lambda Wave EMA: OFF (if not using)
Reduce number of active EMAs:
Sigma Composite: OFF
Lambda Wave: OFF
Leave only Phi, Pi, e, Delta
Simplify settings:
Pulsing Bar: OFF
Greek Labels: OFF
Info Table: smaller size
13. Can I use on different timeframes simultaneously?
Yes! Multi-timeframe analysis is very powerful:
Classic scheme:
Higher TF (D1, W1) - determine global trend
Wait for STRONG signal
This is our trading direction
Middle TF (H4, H1) - look for confirmation
STRONG signal in same direction
Precise entry zone
Lower TF (M15, M5) - entry point
Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA
Precise stop loss
Example:
W1: STRONG BUY active (global uptrend)
H4: STRONG BUY appeared (confirmation)
M15: Wait for Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA → ENTRY
Advantages:
Maximum reliability
Clear timeframe hierarchy
Large targets
14. How does indicator work on news?
Delta Adaptive EMA adapts excellently to news:
Before news:
Low volatility → Delta EMA becomes fast → pulls to price
During news:
Sharp volatility spike → Delta EMA slows → filters noise
After news:
Volatility normalizes → Delta EMA returns to normal
Recommendations:
Don't trade at news release moment (spreads widen)
Wait for STRONG signal after news (2-5 bars)
Use Delta Adaptive as Fast EMA for quick reaction
Widen stops by 50-100% during important news
Advanced Techniques
Technique 1: "Divergences with EMA"
Idea: Look for discrepancies between price and Fast EMA
Bullish divergence:
Price makes lower low
Fast EMA makes higher low
= Possible reversal up
Bearish divergence:
Price makes higher high
Fast EMA makes lower high
= Possible reversal down
How to trade:
Find divergence
Wait for STRONG signal in divergence direction
Enter on confirmation
Technique 2: "EMA Tunnel"
Idea: Use space between Fast and Slow EMA as "tunnel"
Rules:
Wide tunnel - strong trend, hold position
Narrow tunnel - weak trend or consolidation, caution
Tunnel narrowing - trend weakening, prepare to exit
Tunnel widening - trend strengthening, can add
Visually: Gradient Clouds show this automatically!
Trading:
Enter on STRONG signal (tunnel starts widening)
Hold while tunnel wide
Exit when tunnel starts narrowing
Technique 3: "Wave Analysis with Lambda"
Idea: Lambda Wave EMA creates sinusoid matching market cycles
Setup:
Lambda Base Period: 30
Lambda Wave Amplitude: 0.5
Lambda Wave Frequency: 50 (adjusted to asset cycle)
How to find correct Frequency:
Look at historical cycles (distance between local highs)
Average distance = your Frequency
Example: if highs every 40-60 bars, set Frequency = 50
Trading:
Enter when Lambda Wave at bottom of sinusoid (growth potential)
Exit when Lambda Wave at top (fall potential)
Combine with STRONG signals
Technique 4: "Cluster Analysis"
Idea: When all EMAs gather in narrow cluster = powerful breakout soon
Cluster signs:
All EMAs (Phi, Pi, e, Delta) within 0.5-1% of each other
Gradient Clouds almost invisible
Price jumping around all EMAs
Trading:
Identify cluster (all EMAs close)
Determine breakout direction (where more volume, higher TFs direction)
Wait for breakout and STRONG signal
Enter on confirmation
Target = cluster size × 3-5
This is very powerful technique for big moves!
Technique 5: "Sigma as Dynamic Level"
Idea: Sigma Composite EMA = average of all EMAs = magnetic level
Usage:
Enable Sigma Composite (Weighted Average)
Sigma works as dynamic support/resistance
Price often returns to Sigma before trend continuation
Trading:
In trend: Enter on bounces from Sigma
In range: Fade moves from Sigma (trade return to Sigma)
On breakout: Sigma becomes support/resistance
Risk Management
Basic Rules
1. Position Size
Conservative: 1% of capital per trade
Moderate: 2% of capital per trade (recommended)
Aggressive: 3-5% (only for experienced)
Calculation formula:
Lot Size = (Capital × Risk%) / (Stop in pips × Pip value)
2. Risk/Reward Ratio
Minimum: 1:1.5
Standard: 1:2 (recommended)
Optimal: 1:3
Aggressive: 1:5+
3. Maximum Drawdown
Daily: -3% to -5%
Weekly: -7% to -10%
Monthly: -15% to -20%
Upon reaching limit → STOP trading until end of period
Position Management Strategies
1. Fixed Stop
Method:
Stop below/above Fast EMA or local extreme
DON'T move stop against position
Can move to breakeven
For whom: Beginners, conservative traders
2. Trailing by Fast EMA
Method:
Each day (or bar) move stop to Fast EMA level
Position closes when price breaks Fast EMA
Advantages:
Stay in trend as long as possible
Automatically exit on reversal
For whom: Trend followers, swing traders
3. Partial Exit
Method:
50% of position close at +2R
50% hold with trailing by Mid EMA or Slow EMA
Advantages:
Lock profit
Leave position for big move
Psychologically comfortable
For whom: Universal method (recommended)
4. Pyramiding
Method:
First entry on STRONG signal (50% of planned position)
Add 25% on pullback to Fast EMA
Add another 25% on pullback to Mid EMA
Overall stop below Slow EMA
Advantages:
Average entry price
Reduce risk
Increase profit in strong trends
Caution:
Works only in trends
In range leads to losses
For whom: Experienced traders
Trading Psychology
Correct Mindset
1. Indicator is a tool, not holy grail
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
There will be losing trades - this is normal
Important is series statistics, not one trade
2. Trust the system
If STRONG signal appeared - enter
Don't search for "perfect" moment
Follow trading plan
3. Patience
STRONG signals don't appear every day
Better miss signal than enter against trend
Quality over quantity
4. Discipline
Always set stop loss
Don't move stop against position
Don't increase risk after losses
Beginner Mistakes
1. "I know better than indicator"
Indicator says STRONG BUY, but you think "too high, will wait for pullback"
Result: miss profitable move
Solution: Trust signals or don't use indicator
2. "Will reverse now for sure"
Trading against STRONG trend
Result: stops, stops, stops
Solution: Trend is your friend, trade with trend
3. "Will hold a bit more"
Don't exit when STRONG signal disappears
Greed eats profit
Solution: If signal gone - exit!
4. "I'll recover"
After losses double risk
Result: huge losses
Solution: Fixed % risk ALWAYS
5. "I don't like this signal"
Skip signals because of "feeling"
Result: inconsistency, no statistics
Solution: Trade ALL signals or clearly define filters
Trading Journal
What to Record
For each trade:
1. Entry/exit date and time
2. Instrument and timeframe
3. Signal type
Golden Cross
STRONG BUY
STRONG SELL
Death Cross
4. Indicator settings
Fast/Mid/Slow EMA
Base Multiplier
Other parameters
5. Chart screenshot
Entry moment
Exit moment
6. Trade parameters
Position size
Stop loss
Take Profit
R:R
7. Result
Profit/Loss in $
Profit/Loss in %
Profit/Loss in R
8. Notes
What was right
What was wrong
Emotions during trade
Lessons
Journal Analysis
Analyze weekly:
1. Win Rate
Win Rate = (Profitable trades / All trades) × 100%
Good: 50-60%
Excellent: 60-70%
Exceptional: 70%+
2. Average R
Average R = Sum of all R / Number of trades
Good: +0.5R
Excellent: +1.0R
Exceptional: +1.5R+
3. Profit Factor
Profit Factor = Total profit / Total losses
Good: 1.5+
Excellent: 2.0+
Exceptional: 3.0+
4. Maximum Drawdown
Track consecutive losses
If more than 5 in row - stop, check system
5. Best/Worst Trades
What was common in best trades? (do more)
What was common in worst trades? (avoid)
Pre-Trade Checklist
Technical Analysis
STRONG signal active (BUY or SELL)
All EMAs properly aligned (Fast > Mid > Slow or reverse)
Price on correct side of Fast EMA
Gradient Clouds confirm trend
Pulsing Bar shows STRONG state
Momentum % in normal range (not overheated)
No close strong levels against direction
Higher timeframe doesn't contradict
Risk Management
Position size calculated (1-2% risk)
Stop loss set
Take profit calculated (minimum 1:2)
R:R satisfactory
Daily/weekly risk limit not exceeded
No other open correlated positions
Fundamental Analysis
No important news in coming hours
Market session appropriate (liquidity)
No contradicting fundamentals
Understand why asset is moving
Psychology
Calm and thinking clearly
No emotions from previous trades
Ready to accept loss at stop
Following trading plan
Not revenging market for past losses
If at least one point is NO - think twice before entering!
Learning Roadmap
Week 1: Familiarization
Goals:
Install and configure indicator
Study all EMA types
Understand visualization
Tasks:
Add indicator to chart
Test all Fast/Mid/Slow settings
Play with Base Multiplier on different timeframes
Observe Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Study Info Table
Result: Comfort with indicator interface
Week 2: Signals
Goals:
Learn to recognize all signal types
Understand difference between Golden Cross and STRONG
Tasks:
Find 10 Golden Cross examples in history
Find 10 STRONG BUY examples in history
Compare their results (which worked better)
Set up alerts
Get 5 real alerts
Result: Understanding signals
Week 3: Demo Trading
Goals:
Start trading signals on demo account
Gather statistics
Tasks:
Open demo account
Trade ONLY STRONG signals
Keep journal (minimum 20 trades)
Don't change indicator settings
Strictly follow stop losses
Result: 20+ documented trades
Week 4: Analysis
Goals:
Analyze demo trading results
Optimize approach
Tasks:
Calculate win rate and average R
Find patterns in profitable trades
Find patterns in losing trades
Adjust approach (not indicator!)
Write trading plan
Result: Trading plan on 1 page
Month 2: Improvement
Goals:
Deepen understanding
Add additional techniques
Tasks:
Study multi-timeframe analysis
Test combinations with Price Action
Try advanced techniques (divergences, tunnels)
Continue demo trading (minimum 50 trades)
Achieve stable profitability on demo
Result: Win rate 55%+ and Profit Factor 1.5+
Month 3: Real Trading
Goals:
Transition to real account
Maintain discipline
Tasks:
Open small real account
Trade minimum lots
Strictly follow trading plan
DON'T increase risk
Focus on process, not profit
Result: Psychological comfort on real
Month 4+: Scaling
Goals:
Increase account
Become consistently profitable
Tasks:
With 60%+ win rate can increase risk to 2%
Upon doubling account can add capital
Continue keeping journal
Periodically review and improve strategy
Share experience with community
Result: Stable profitability month after month
Additional Resources
Recommended Reading
Technical Analysis:
"Technical Analysis of Financial Markets" - John Murphy
"Trading in the Zone" - Mark Douglas (psychology)
"Market Wizards" - Jack Schwager (trader interviews)
EMA and Moving Averages:
"Moving Averages 101" - Steve Burns
Articles on Investopedia about EMA
Risk Management:
"The Mathematics of Money Management" - Ralph Vince
"Trade Your Way to Financial Freedom" - Van K. Tharp
Trading Journals:
Edgewonk (paid, very powerful)
Tradervue (free version + premium)
Excel/Google Sheets (free)
Screeners:
TradingView Stock Screener
Finviz (stocks)
CoinMarketCap (crypto)
Conclusion
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a powerful tool based on universal mathematical constants of nature. The indicator combines:
Mathematical elegance - Phi, Pi, e instead of arbitrary numbers
Premium visualization - Neon Glow, Gradient Clouds, Pulsing Bar
Reliable signals - STRONG BUY/SELL work on all timeframes
Flexibility - 6 EMA types, adaptation to any trading style
Automation - auto-sorting EMAs, SL/TP calculation, alerts
Key Success Principles:
Simplicity - start with basic settings (Phi/Pi/e, Base=10)
Discipline - follow STRONG signals strictly
Patience - wait for quality setups
Risk Management - 1-2% per trade, ALWAYS
Journal - document every trade
Learning - constantly improve skills
Remember:
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
Important is series statistics, not one trade
Psychology more important than technique
Quality more important than quantity
Process more important than result
Acknowledgments
Thank you for using Hellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium!
The indicator was created with love for mathematics, markets, and beautiful visualization.
Wishing you profitable trading!
Guide Version: 1.0
Date: 2025
Compatibility: Pine Script v6, TradingView
"In the simplicity of mathematical constants lies the complexity of market movements"
